JP7040564B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening. The variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol to be executed, and each symbol can be changed at the same time . Further, there is a game state in which the first symbol is easily changed and displayed according to the game state and a game state in which the second symbol is easily changed and displayed is set to improve the interest of the game .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-319221

However, there is a problem that it is difficult to inform the player of the variable display status of the first symbol and the second symbol, which are changed at the same time, in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the gaming state .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first acquisition means acquired by the first acquisition means. The first determination means for executing the first determination based on the information, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period, and the first effect. 1 The second determination is executed based on the second acquisition means for acquiring the second information and the second information acquired by the second acquisition means based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the acquisition condition. The second determination means, the second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination are specific first determinations. It is advantageous to the player when a specific first effect based on the result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. It has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, and when a specific condition is satisfied, sets an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means and the advantageous state setting means, the second determination is more easily executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, the second determination is completed. The variable control means that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the determination, and if the advantageous state is not set, the first effect is predetermined even during the period during which the second effect is being executed. Based on the fact that the first display mode is not executed, the first display setting for displaying the first display mode is set, and when the advantageous state is set, the first effect is executed. Even during the period, the display for setting the second display setting for displaying the second display mode different from the first display mode based on the fact that the second effect is not executed in the predetermined second period. The gaming machine has a setting means, and when the advantageous state ends while the second display mode is displayed, the gaming machine has a third display different from the second display mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The mode can be displayed, and when the advantageous state is set, the first effect and the first effect are displayed from the period when the second display mode is not displayed to the period when the second display mode is displayed. It is possible to continuously suggest the remaining number of times until the total number of executions with the second effect reaches the predetermined number of times .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first information acquired by the first acquisition means. The first determination means for executing one determination, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period, and the first acquisition condition are A second acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of different second acquisition conditions, and a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means. The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. When a specific first effect based on the above or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. An advantageous state setting means that has a privileged game executing means and, when a specific condition is satisfied, sets an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, the second determination is more easily executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, the first determination is performed from the second determination. The variable control means for facilitating the determination, and the first period in which the first effect is predetermined even during the period in which the second effect is executed when the advantageous state is not set. Based on the fact that the first display mode is not executed, the first display setting for displaying the first display mode is set, and when the advantageous state is set, even during the period when the first effect is executed. , A display setting means for setting a second display setting for displaying a second display mode different from the first display mode based on the fact that the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. When the advantageous state ends while the second display mode is displayed, the gaming machine can display a third display mode different from the second display mode after a lapse of a predetermined period. When the advantageous state is set, the first effect and the second effect are displayed from the period when the second display mode is not displayed to the period when the second display mode is displayed. It is possible to continuously suggest the remaining number of times until the total number of times of execution of the above reaches the predetermined number of times .

Therefore , there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to- understand game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the containment body. (A) is a side view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. (A) is a front view of the central rotation unit in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotation unit in the state of being arranged in the overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. (A) is a front view of the connected displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connected displacement member in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 32 (a). It is sectional drawing of the connection displacement member in the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. (A) is a front schematic diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connection displacement member, and (b) is a cross-sectional schematic view of the front base and the connection displacement member in the XXXB-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a figure. (A) is a front schematic view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is the front base and the first displacement member in the direction of arrow XLb of FIG. 40 (a). It is a schematic side view, (c) is a sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member in the XLc-XLc line of FIG. 40 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an extension position. It is a rear view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is sectional drawing of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII portion of FIG. 47 (c), and (b) is the first displacement member in the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). It is a side view of the second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a prize-winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a prize-winning device. (A) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning apparatus in the line LIIa-LIIA of FIG. 51. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device in line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. 52 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 52 (b). It is a rear schematic diagram of a prize-winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board which partially enlarged the LVI part of FIG. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board which partially enlarged the LVI part of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. It is a front view of the region forming part. It is sectional drawing of the area formation part in the LX-LX line of FIG. 59. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a top view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a top view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit in the fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit in the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a sectional view of the cage in the CXVIIb-CXVII line b of (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the cage in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line of (a). It is sectional drawing of a cage. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an overhang position to an evacuation position. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the outbound route from the retracted position to the overhanging position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state when operating a return path from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a front base and a displacement side engaging member. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the left-handed rotating unit in the CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the left-handed rotating unit in the CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the CXLIb-CXLIb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base in the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a front base (opening) and a displacement side engaging member. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a top view of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement action by the back base and the displacement side engaging member. It is an exploded perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotation unit in 19th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a right-handed rotation unit. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracting position and an overhanging position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from an extension position to an evacuation position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning apparatus in 21st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning apparatus in the 22nd embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of a winning apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of a winning apparatus. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of a winning apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a prize-winning device. (A) is a front view of the rotation axis, and (b) is a side view of the rotation axis in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a prize-winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in the CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa line in FIG. 176 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device in the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line in FIG. 176 (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device on the CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176 (b). It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the CLXXIX part in FIG. 178. It is a figure which showed typically the timed change of the operation of the flow path solenoid, and the timed change of the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate for each jackpot type. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method from one gaming state to another gaming state about three kinds of gaming states set in a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol strings are changing in the variable display effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a stop display of the jackpot stop symbol. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the reach effect which suggests to a player that there is a high possibility of this. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the reach effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the reach effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is out of order in a normal state or a probable change state, and (b) is an example of a customer waiting demo screen. It is a figure, and (c) is a figure which showed an example of the demo screen during the change of special figure 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the symbol variation in the latent state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the case where the variation display is completed within 30 seconds. c) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the case of 30 seconds or later after the end of the variable display. (A) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. It is a figure which showed an example of the revival production which is a kind of production performed in the latent state. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent probability table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the screen display selection table schematically. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the standby command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a front view which shows the inside of the distribution unit in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state in the 2nd control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as a type of the additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect B is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the additional effect C as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen at the time of execution. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of the additional effect during the residual period. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the second control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo display A screen (customer waiting demo screen) in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing a demo display B screen (customer waiting demo screen) in the third symbol display device. ) Is shown in the figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special display A screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special display B screen in the third symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the second control example, and (b) is the variation pattern selection table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table (for within 2 times after the end of latent probability) in the second control example, and (b) is the normal table in the second control example (b). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of (for 3 to 8 times after the end of latency). (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency table in the second control example. Is. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection table in the second control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the additional effect selection table in the 2nd control example schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in another example of 2nd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of the 2nd control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state, and (b) is a hit game during the latent state (during a small hit game). ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special map fluctuation in the latent probability state, and (b) is a schematic diagram. , It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the hit effect in the latent state. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table in the third control example. be. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation setting process of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode when the hold notice effect is executed. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode when the pressing addition effect is executed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode when the pressing addition effect is executed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode when the non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is hidden in the latent state is set. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the non-display mode in the latent state. (A) is a diagram showing the display contents when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 in the non-display mode and the latent state is completed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display contents in the non-display mode. It is a figure which showed the display mode (pinch de-appearance) when it was set and the remaining number of times of a latent state was 5 times or less, and it became a big hit. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the participation degree normal table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the participation degree low table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the jackpot table in the fourth control example schematically. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pressing period table in the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table in the fourth control example. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the hold notice determination table in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing process during the addition effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing process during hold notice executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the addition effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold notice setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the residual probability variation number command process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the non-display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is the variation pattern selection in the first modification of the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability (second half) table in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is the first modification of the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st modification of 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st modification of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 3 table in the 2nd modification of the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table (for 3 times or more after the end of the latent probability state) in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing process during reach executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot middle pressing process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the processing at the time of pressing end executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the residual probability variation number command process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the press-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the push command processing during reach executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the scroll change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the scroll non-change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is the first modification of the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot middle press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is the character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the storage area for symbol arrangement in the second modification of the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 4th control example.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. A port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 1640, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form a peripheral portion thereof. It is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 1640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball entry port 1640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 1640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second entry slot 1640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during the time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol increases and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 1640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins a prize in the second entrance 1640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 1640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entry port 1640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 1640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 1640a is opened and the electric accessory 1640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entry port 1640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 1640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Triggered by the passage of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying variable display of the third symbol, and balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 overhangs into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It is visible through the part.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device has a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. It is a variable display that lights and alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entry port 1640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 1640a of the second entrance 1640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 1640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second entrance 1640 may be used by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is opened for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 1640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol. It is also lit and displayed on the hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). May be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry slot 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 1640 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first ball entry port 64. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 1640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins (winning), and the second entry opening 1640 is a winning opening in which a ball wins (winning). Then, one ball is one of the winning openings to be paid out as a prize ball. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 1640 are different. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry slot 1640 (for example, both are 5). It may be configured as.

Further, an electric accessory 1640a is attached to the second entrance 1640. The electric accessory 1640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 1640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second entry port 1640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state depending on whether the ball wins in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. be. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second entry slot 1640 than when the ball wins the first entry opening 64. Is also set high. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have the electric accessory 1640a as in the second ball entry port 1640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 1640. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. , It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second entrance 1640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second entry port 1640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 1640a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second entrance 1640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper side of the second ball entry port 1640, and on the right side thereof, an opening / closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the inside of the variable winning device 65 by being closed. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first ball entrance 64 or the second entry slot 1640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot will be won after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the opening / closing plate 65f1, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until five balls are won).

The opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is driven to open and close to the right side with the opening / closing plate 65f1 that prevents the ball from entering the entrance portion (specific winning opening 65a) of the variable winning device 65 and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for this purpose. The opening / closing plate 65f1 is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the upper side of the second ball entry port 1640, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of a variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the payout prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

It should be noted that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the descending position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are arranged in the overhanging position. The state in which the body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the ascending position and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged in the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operating unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, a rotating body elevating unit 300 emits light upward. The decorative unit 400 and the central rotation unit 500 are arranged, and the right rotation unit 600 and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right respectively.

The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of these wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a box-shaped accommodating body 330 in which a plurality of units (three in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality of units (two in the present embodiment) housed in each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) (1st rotating body 340a and 2nd rotating body 340b) are mainly provided.

The plurality of housings 330 are independently formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, at the ascending position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Will be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the accommodating body 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let me. The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

In the present embodiment, the drive sources of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are shared by the drive motor 350 of 1, and the parts cost can be reduced, while the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body are able to be reduced. The combination of the figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to be irradiated), the effect of light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

The central rotation unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the back surface base 510, and is arranged on the back surface side of the light emitting decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the rear side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player. It is rotated to and from the retracted position (see FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

The right-handed rotating unit 600 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a displacement in which the base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. A member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640) is provided. On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged on the front surface of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. A displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640) is provided. Each displacement member has an overhanging position (see FIG. 7) overhanging into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player. (See FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central accommodating body 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for elevating and lowering the left and right accommodating bodies 330, respectively. It is formed from 3 units of. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three housings 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C is provided on the front side of the front base 311 having an L-shape in front view, the front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the back base 311 and the front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 to be arranged, the accommodating body 330 which is raised and lowered with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the first rotating body 340a and the first rotating body 340a accommodated in the accommodating body 330. It mainly includes a two-rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and cut on the side surface of a flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 are arranged on one side and an accommodating body 330 is arranged on the other side. It is provided with a connecting member 325 to be provided.

A pair of shafts are projected from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Further, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the slide guides 351 and 352 are used to connect members 325 (rack gear 324). ) And the housing 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion in which the accommodating body 330 is arranged by connecting the lower end sides thereof with the horizontally elongated portion. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the left housing 330 is placed in the lowered position and the central housing 330 is placed in the rising position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the rear base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the accommodating body 330, and the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left housing 330 is juxtaposed on the side of the central housing 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) is correspondingly large. ) The dimensions become longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid visibility from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central containment body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central accommodating body 330, the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position. However, the extended slide guide 352 regulates the swing in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central accommodation body 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central accommodation body 330 is arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L is a rear base 313 formed vertically in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313 thereof. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 arranged on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing body 330 that is moved up and down with respect to each base 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330, and the housing between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 thereof, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and having a gear cut on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and a connecting member 326 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and rotatably supported.

A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the accommodating body 330 is provided in the guide groove 353a via the collar C. It is inserted. Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear motion of the rack gear 324. It is converted, and the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 with the linear motion of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L-shape on the front surface and connected to the right end portion of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and a rear base 316 thereof. The front base 317 overlapped on the front side of the rear base 313, the drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 raises and lowers the rear base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330 is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodating the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly comprises a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface, and a connecting member 327 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a which is an elongated hole-shaped opening is extended along the vertical direction, and in the guide groove 316a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the accommodating body 330 is collared (FIG. It is inserted via (not shown). Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 has a linear motion. Along with the linear motion, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the lateral width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central accommodating body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surfaces of the left accommodating body 330 and the right accommodating body 330, the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). (Left and right direction) The dimensions can be shortened to increase the rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the left and right accommodating bodies 330 (make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Along with this, it is not necessary to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right accommodating bodies 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide plate 353. Therefore, the posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the accommodating body 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the housing body 330. 18 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). Is. In addition, in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the substrate 331 are provided, and the respective parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The substrate 331 is a member forming the back surface (back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (upper side and lower side in FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Is formed integrally. A reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged on the front surface of the portion forming the back surface of the housing 330.

The reflective portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects at least in the vertical direction from the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18 (b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the accommodating body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are bored at two positions, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which the fixed shaft 341 described later of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is inserted, and holds the fixed shaft 341 non-rotatably. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which one of the inner peripheral surfaces thereof is defined by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line from a circular shape.

The partition wall 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall 332, and the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the side wall 332. Further, the partition wall 334 is provided with insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 at two places.

The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in the shape of a front view frame by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The housing body 330 formed in this way is driven by a drive motor 350 arranged on the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and a second rotating body 340b. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 is a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed with the drive gear 351 in this order. It is equipped with a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a representative example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported at both ends in the axial direction (shaft portion 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair thereof. It mainly includes three display plates (first display plate 343A, second display plate 343B, and third display plate 343C) erected between the end face plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and a shaft portion 341a connected to both ends of the body portion 341b in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall body 332, 333 (see FIG. 17) of the accommodating body 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft portions 341a. A body portion 341b is provided.

The shaft portion 341a has a shape in which the straight cross-sectional shape of the shaft is formed by removing one of the circular shapes obtained by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered by a plane). The shape is slightly smaller than that of the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332 and 333. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the accommodating body 330 (side wall body 332,333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

In this case, the body portion 341b has the irradiation direction of the LED 344 in the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (decorative body 335) in a state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held non-rotatably. The opening 335a and FIG. 18B are arranged in a posture (rotational position) toward the front side of the paper surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate arranged on the front surface (“viewing position” described later) of the housing body 330 in the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. can.

Since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends open in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed by utilizing the internal space. It can be pulled out of the housing 330 through the opening at the directional end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 is made non-rotatable with respect to the accommodating body 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force of twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342a having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center thereof. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end face plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing body 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end face plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the accommodating body 330 and the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. In the second rotating body 340b, the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, but the mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are plate-shaped members having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and are paired by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342. It is erected between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plate 342.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the display plates 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed by being curved in an arc shape which is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotation position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display board 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In the present embodiment, in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise end portions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward. The central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arcuate portion formed by being curved is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display plate 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times). It is set to (below).

Here, in the following, the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the housing 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visible position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged in the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular columnar body is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343B or the third display plate is displayed. The other side of the plate 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transparent portions PN through which light can be transmitted. Is formed in preparation for a part. Further, on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display plate arranged at the visual recognition position among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmission portion PN of each display board 343B, 343C and directly viewed by the player. Can be made to.

On the other hand, in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331 of the accommodating body 330 after being reflected by the reflecting portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331. It can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotating position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the substrate 331 of the accommodating body 330 is visually recognized. It is possible to remind the player of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. Thereby, it is possible to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the figure of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied by the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical spacing in FIG. 18B), or. The apparent diameters of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical dimensions in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b face each other with respect to the reflecting plate RF. The angle can be changed. That is, the reflected light of the reflected light is visually recognized as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331, which is emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN as the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate. The aspect (eg, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 17 and 18. The detection mechanism is a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. It includes a terminal gear 363 having a detected plate 363a projecting outward in the direction, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the substrate 331 with the detection region arranged on the movement locus of the detected plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position) based on the detection result of the sensor device 364.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite directions to those described above.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three sets in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven synchronously by the drive motor of 1, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display plate 343A and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. The first combination for arranging the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340b at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b at the display position. There were only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b to be arranged at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotated and driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, since two drive motors are required, the component cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while limiting the number of drive motors 350 to only one, it is possible to form nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of 9 sets is promptly displayed by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotation position without requiring perfect matching of the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can get it out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 21 From (a) to FIG. 21 (e), No. 20 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) show No. 20 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 10.

In FIG. 20, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is indicated by the reference numeral "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display board 343B is arranged is represented by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display board 343C is arranged in the viewing position is represented by the code "C" or "C'". Will be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 In the state represented by "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, respectively, and the first rotating body. From 340a, the figure drawn on the first display board 343A and from the second rotating body 340b, the figure drawn on the third display board 343C correspond to a state in which the player can visually recognize them.

Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by reference numerals “A to C” to be second. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotating body 340b are illustrated with reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each is set to different values. In the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a having the number of teeth of the first gear 353 being 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 being 20 is rotated by 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 108 degrees. Is formed to do.

No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 21 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 20 in FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 21 (b), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees, there is a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees between the two rotating positions, but each rotating body 340a , 340b is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees from the direction perpendicular to the axis, and as a result, each second display plate of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are each arranged at the viewing position (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341. (That is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the rotation direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , It can be difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, since a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 4 and FIG. 21 (d), No. 20 in FIG. In the rotation in the section up to the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C in the visible position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body. The 340b is arranged at a position where its rotation position is deviated from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. 9 and from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, FIG. No. 20 As shown in 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even in the section where the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed, the second rotation is performed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure will be combined in the third combination.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21 (a) of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22 (e) of FIG. 20). By repeating the embodiment two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. B "), a fifth combination (No. 12" B', C "in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, No. 20 in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. A "C"), an eighth combination (No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20) and a ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a plurality of gears (drive gears 351 to 355). It is formed as a gear train composed of the five gears), and is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

As a result, the rotation cycle of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified to reduce component costs and improve durability and reliability, but each gear is always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction.

Therefore, for example, the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which the table in FIG. 20 is advanced in the positive direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established) is formed. Then, after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. It is possible to repeat a series of operations of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20), whereby it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. When it is necessary to move the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), in addition to revealing the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is moved in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated once. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, when it is set to "1 / integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), but in the remaining 6 combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body It is allowed that a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of possible combinations of figures can be set to 9.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the drive motor 350 of 1, the number of possible combinations of the figures is set to 9, so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotating body 340a. And it is not achievable only by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotating body 340b as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, at the rotating position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of the effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) in which a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), FIG. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to make them inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 22 (e), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotation position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to make them inconspicuous.

As described above, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, each of the accommodating bodies 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are mounted on the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b can be promptly displayed at a required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the combination of nine sets of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1-rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging each accommodating body 300 in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. Can be done. As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotation position in advance without being recognized by the player, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing arrives, each accommodating body 300 is placed in an ascending position (see FIG. 8) and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are performed to promptly obtain the desired combination. Can be made to appear in.

It should be noted that the arrangement of each of the housing bodies 300 in the descending position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each of the contained bodies 300 is not arranged in the descending position, and each of them is not arranged. While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the descending position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. This makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated, so even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the descending position and become invisible to the player, at the time of the rotation. There is a possibility that the player may be made to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the time of the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to mix in the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

As the operating means, for example, a payout device 133, a voice output device 226, or a ball launching unit 112a (all of which see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is exemplified. In the state where these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated due to the payout of the ball, the output of voice, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

In addition, instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b It may be possible to perform the pre-rotation of. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, so that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation can be made accordingly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the light emitting decoration unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and the width of the base body 410. A light emitting device 420 arranged on the front surface in the center of the direction, a light shielding member 430 overlaid on the front surface of the light emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 overlaid on the front surface of the light shielding member 430 and made of a light transmissive material. The light emitting device 420, the light shielding member 430, and the outer peripheral decorative bodies 450 and 460 that surround the cover member 440 are mainly provided.

A plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitting bodies (LED 421) are arranged on the front surface side of the light emitting device 420 in a state of being dispersed over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. .. Here, the light-shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 formed of a light-shielding material (light-impermeable material) and a partition wall 432 erected from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 431.

In the main body portion 431 of the light-shielding member 430, openings 431a having a circular front view are formed at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 in the front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the back surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light-shielding member 430.

The partition wall 432 is formed in a front view annular shape having a diameter smaller than that of the main body portion 431, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 431. As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is located on the outer peripheral side of the front view circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and the front view substantially crescent-shaped first space. It is divided into two spaces.

By forming the partition by the partition wall 431 in this way, the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 can be clarified. That is, when only the LED 421 in the first space emits light, the circular shape can be visually recognized, and when only the LED 421 in the second space emits light, the crescent shape can be visually recognized.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26A is a front view of the central rotation unit 500 in a state of being arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 26B is a front view of the central rotation unit 500 in a state of being arranged in the overhanging position. .. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotation unit 500 has a rear base 510 arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210 and a front surface superimposed on the front surface of the rear base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and a drive motor 540 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member 530. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

Shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the proximal end side (rotational shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed in the front surface of the rear surface base 510 and the back surface of the front surface base 520, respectively. Further, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is provided on the front surface of the rear base 510.

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front surface on the tip side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531, a connecting gear 532, and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotary shaft 531 is a shaft pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511, 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and is projected from the front and the back of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connecting gear 532 is a gear that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side with the rotating shaft 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531 of the coupling gear 532, the rotation is transmitted to the other coupling gear 532 to rotate the coupling gear 532. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

The crank groove 533 is a groove having a linear front view through which the connecting pin 542a of the crank gear 542 described later of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is one of the pair of displacement members 530 (left side of FIG. 27, FIG. 28). It is recessed in the back surface of the displacement member 530 (on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and the pinion 541 thereof. It mainly includes a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 includes a connecting pin 542a that projects at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (support shaft 512) and is inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, so that one of them (left side in FIG. 27, right side in FIG. 28) is displaced. The member 530 is rotated around the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also rotated synchronously via the connecting gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIGS. 7 and 26 (a)) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back surface of the light emitting decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26 (b)).

Next, the right-handed rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are an exploded rear perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 600. Note that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right-handed rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right-handed rotation unit 600 has a base body including a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement displaceably arranged on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. A drive motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacementing the member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 610, and a drive thereof. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650.

A part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is provided on the back surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is provided to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 inserted through 652a are provided so as to project.

Further, the front base 620 has a front view circular shaft support hole 624, 625 formed through to rotatably support the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, respectively. The front bases 620 are arranged side by side in the width direction (short side direction) at predetermined intervals.

The shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is on the opening side of the game board 13 (the overhanging position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29) with respect to the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. Since it is arranged on the left side), as will be described later, at the overhanging position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure an overhanging area overhanging to the opening side of the game board 13, while the retracted position. And between the overhanging positions, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630.

A ridge 626 and a bearing portion 627 are projected from the front surface of the front base 620. The ridge 626 is a horizontally long protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620, and the cross section is formed in a substantially triangular shape. The ridge 626 is formed by curving the top thereof in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 624 in the front view. When the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced, the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with each other, and as will be described later, as compared with the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in contact with the entire surface. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced to suppress sliding resistance, and the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmissive material can be suppressed.

On the left side of the front base 620 when viewed from the front (the left side of FIG. 29, that is, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridgeline portion of the front surface is arranged. .. Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced when retracting to the retracted position (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a tubular body concentric with the shaft support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotary shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 together with the shaft support hole 624 on the inner peripheral surface thereof. From the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, the protruding portion 628 is formed so as to project radially outward and downward toward the front base 620. The protrusion 628 can regulate the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and suppress the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward. The details will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, and the first pinion 651 is placed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 by utilizing the bearing recess 621. Can be held rotatably. Therefore, since it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, the number of parts can be reduced, and the parts cost and the assembly cost can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 is projected from the front surface of the front base 620 along with the recess. In the present embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction The second displacement member 640 may interfere with the protruding portion 623, and such interference is suppressed by the ridge 626. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 are teeth. The rack member 652 is formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be fitted is geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member.

The rack member 652 includes two sliding grooves 652a having a long hole shape in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are inserted into each of the sliding grooves 652a. By doing so, the moving direction is maintained in a defined state. That is, the rack member 652 is held so as to be able to move linearly between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotary shaft 654a projecting from the back surface on one end side, a drive pin 654b projecting from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotary shaft 654a, and the rotary shaft 654a and the drive pin. It is provided with a recessed portion 654c formed by recessing between 654b in an arc shape in the front view, and the rotating shaft 654a is inserted into the shaft support hole 625 so that the shaft can rotate toward the front side of the front base 620. Be provided.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b described later in the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640. The arc shape in the front view of the recessed portion 654c is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape in which the bearing portion 627 can be accepted on the inner peripheral side thereof).

Therefore, while keeping the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, it is suppressed from interfering with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620, and the transmission member. The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced more greatly while reducing the size of the entire right-handed rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652. By rotating the second pinion 653, the transmission member 654 is rotated around the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620. As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement according to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed. 1 Displacement member 630 and 2nd displacement member 640 can be independently performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

On the back surface of the first displacement member 630, a rotary shaft 631, a support shaft 632, 633, and a contact portion 634 are respectively projected, and a first groove 635 is recessed. As described above, the rotary shaft 631 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is the front base 620 via the rotary shaft 631 and the shaft support hole 624. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotary shaft 631, thereby restricting the rotary shaft 631 from coming out of the shaft support hole 624.

The support shafts 632 and 633 are axial bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via the support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction about the rotation shaft 631. Between these pair of contact portions 634, a protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is arranged in a state where the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620. This makes it possible to regulate the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove into which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by being bent in a substantially square shape in front view. Specifically, the first groove 635 has an action section 635a extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630 and a first displacement while being curved in an arc shape having a concave rotation shaft 631 side. It includes a non-interference section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed into a shape in which an annular shape concentric with the rotation shaft 631 is divided). As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives an action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 in the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed in the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The connecting displacement member 642 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the driven member 641 is first displaced via the support shaft 632. It is rotatably pivotally supported on the back surface of the member 630. A screw having a head diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, whereby the support shaft 632 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. ..

The second groove 641b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. In a state where the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641b is superposed on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. The second groove 641b is formed as an action section affected by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643.

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhanging portion 642c are formed so as to project outward with the shaft support hole 642a interposed therebetween. Further, the connecting displacement member 642 is provided with a connecting pin 643 that protrudes toward the front surface side thereof.

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the connection displacement member 642 is first displaced via the support shaft 633. It is rotatably pivotally supported on the back surface of the member 630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 633, whereby the rotating shaft 633 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a.

As described above, the connecting pin 643 is inserted into the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 641, whereby the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642. That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the rotation center, it is possible to form a rotation with the support shaft 633 of the connection displacement member 642 as the rotation center.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected to each other by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is utilized by utilizing the amplification effect of the link mechanism, as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connected displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a front view of the connected displacement member 642, and FIG. 32 (b) is a side view of the connected displacement member 642 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), FIG. 32 (c). Is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 in the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, since the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the connecting displacement member 642 so as to project from the decorative portion 642b on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 642a, the decorative portion 642b is upwardly formed as described later. The overhanging portion 642c can play a role as a weight for balancing when and after lifting.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to project from the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (b)) of the decorative portion 642b so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. As described above, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), the rattling of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. Further, since the overhanging portion 642c has both a role as a weight and a role as a contact portion with the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the overhanging portion 642c, four side walls are erected on the back side from the four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side (the side facing the back surface of the first displacement member 630) of the connecting displacement member 642. , The back side is formed in an open box shape. Therefore, it is possible to secure the weight and rigidity while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it cannot be seen from the front) is secured. While doing so, it is possible to reliably exert the function as a weight and the function of abutting on the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the ridge 642c1 is a first displacement member. It is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the 630. Therefore, the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the overhanging portion 642c comes into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

The connecting pin 643 is formed of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than the resin material, and its rear end surface (upper surface in FIG. 32 (c)) is the back surface of the connecting displacement member 642 (that is, that is). , The surface facing the front base 620) is embedded in the connecting displacement member 642 (insert molding).

In this case, the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement locus of the connecting pin 643 when the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 is displaced, so that the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the vehicle. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing between the ridges 626 of the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, it is possible to continuously exert the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. 33 and 34 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 show the operation between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 600 in each state at the time of evacuating. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right-handed rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33 (a) is shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), FIG. 33 (b) is shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 37 (b), and FIG. 33 (c) is shown in FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 37 (c) are in the same state, respectively, FIG. 34 (a) is shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 38 (a), and FIG. 34 (b) is shown in FIG. 36 (b). ) And FIG. 38 (b) and FIG. 34 (c) are in the same state as FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33 (c) is the same as FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 35 (c) is FIG. 36 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is FIG. 38 (a). be.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are in front. Displaced in front of the base 620.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (a)), the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are second. The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed in the overhanging direction (right side in FIG. 37 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b) show. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation axis 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 and is not displaced to the first displacement. It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), it is the same as the above-mentioned case. In addition, the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is projected in the projecting direction by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (FIG. 37 (b)). It is pushed to the right side), whereby the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630.

After the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (that is, FIG. 34 (a). ), The state shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 38 (a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes an action section 635a and a non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Is reached at the connection part of.

In the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (that is, FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a)), the first displacement member 630 The contact portion 634 of one of the pair of contact portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620, so that the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the overhanging direction is performed. Be regulated.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a), and 38 (a), the transmission member 654 The drive pin 654b moves with respect to the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 along the non-interference section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface thereof. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38 (a).

On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 38 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 34 (b) is shown. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) for raising the connecting groove 641c. The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 lifts the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation. It is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), it is the same as the above-mentioned case. The second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630 while the first displacement member 630 is stopped. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, whereby FIG. 34 (c). ), The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhanging positions, as shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c).

Contrary to the above-mentioned case, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (c)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. 38 (c). It is maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 38 (c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, whereby FIG. 34 (b), As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in the direction in which the connecting groove 641c is lowered (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), and the connected displacement member. The 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

From the state shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), when the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), the case described above is used. Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

After the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a) (that is, FIG. 33 (c). ), The state shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and 37 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes an action section 635a and a non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Is reached at the connection part of.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c), the first displacement The inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (working section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed in the upright direction (left side in FIG. 37 (c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 and is not displaced to the first displacement. It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), it is the same as the above-mentioned case. In addition, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the starting ends of the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, whereby FIG. 33 (a). , The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged in the retracted position, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a).

In the upright position shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is a front base. By abutting on the other side surface of the protrusion 628 of the 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted.

As described above, in the right-handed rotation unit 600, the first displacement member 630 is in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the front side of the front base 620, these first grooves 635 are compared with the case of the conventional product in which the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side in the same plane. And the plane space required for the arrangement of the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape (planar space) in the front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, it is required to increase the size of the display device (third symbol display device 81). However, even in this case, there is a relatively large margin in the thickness direction (front-back direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a space in the thickness direction having a relatively large margin is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 is small in the front view. It is possible to increase the size of the display device, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, if the configuration is such that the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped with each other, the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 is transmitted to each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 by the drive pin 654b of 1. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to separately provide drive pins (transmission members) for each of the first groove and the second groove as in the conventional product. That is, the parts can be shared, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the relative displacement amount of the connected displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642. By disposing the 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the driven position is driven. It is possible to form a posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are overlapped with each other.

This makes it easier to hide the second displacement member 640 on the back surface side of the first displacement member 630 (make it easier for the player to make it invisible to the player). Therefore, in the retracted position, not only can the outer shape of the right-handed rotating unit 600 be reduced in front view (see FIG. 33A), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the standing posture to the overhanging posture. (See FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)), after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture while hiding the existence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player. The second displacement member 640 can be ejected from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c)), and it is possible to easily perform an effect of giving an impact to the player.

As described above, the operations of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 34 (c) are first described from FIG. 33 (a). As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the collapse direction, referred to as the "first direction") as they are, and FIG. After the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped as shown in 33 (c) and FIG. 34 (a), the second displacement as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). It is an operation that the connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 is displaced (rotated) in the direction (referred to as "second direction") to lift the decorative portion 642b. That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force due to the stoppage of the first displacement member 630, which has been displaced in the first direction, can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts the displacement in the second direction. As a result, a series of operations from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be smoothly performed, and not only the effect of production can be enhanced, but also the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force is reduced, and the durability is improved. Can be planned.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the weight of the first displacement member 630 is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, so that the overhang position shown in FIG. 34 (c) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a). In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the heavy first displacement member 630 can be stopped first, and the lighter weight second displacement member 640 can be stopped last. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the drive motor 650 and the transmission mechanism.

That is, from the above-mentioned state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced in the overhanging direction (first direction) while being integrated (see FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)). 1 Displacement of the displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition from the displaced state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) is that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 shifts from the working section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Since this is done, the rotation of the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653) in the drive motor 650 and the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the transition of such a state, it is possible to avoid the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (the first direction). The transition from the state of being displaced in two directions (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) to the state of stopping the second displacement member 640 (see FIG. 34 (c)) is the drive motor 650. And it is necessary to stop the rotation of the gears of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652 and second pinion 653), and the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gear. However, since the member to be stopped in this case is only the second displacement member 640, which is light in weight, the burden on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is outwardly opposite to the decorative portion 642b with the portion (shaft support hole 642a) pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630 interposed therebetween. It is provided with an overhanging portion 642c formed by overhanging (see FIG. 32), and is formed so that the overhanging portion 642c can play the role of a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the opposite side to the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, the weight of the overhanging portion 642c can be utilized to facilitate the upward lifting of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, enhance the effect of the effect, and suppress the driving force of the drive motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. As compared to the cantilevered state where only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the decorative portion 642b can stabilize the lifted posture and is required to maintain that posture. The driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (convex 642c1, see FIG. 32) can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated), the overhanging portion 642c is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to cause the connecting displacement. The rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the decorative portion 642b at the time of displacement can be stabilized, the effect of effect can be enhanced, and the wear and tear of the shaft support portion due to rattling can be suppressed.

Further, since the overhanging portion 642c not only serves as a weight but also serves as a contact with the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling, it is necessary to separately provide a portion for both of these roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, the weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape of the overhanging portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, invisible to the player in front of the displacement member 630), and the connection displacement is formed. While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is displaced, the overhanging portion 642c reliably exerts a function as a weight and a function of contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling. Can be made to.

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is on the opening side (the first) of the game board 13 with respect to the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. 1 Since it is arranged on the overhanging position side of the displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), as shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member are arranged at the overhanging position. While the 640 can secure an overhanging area that overhangs the opening side of the game board 13, it is possible to easily hide the transmission member 654 on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 while the 640 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be in contact with the bearing portion 627, so that the second displacement member 640 is relative to the first displacement member 630. The rotation can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which has the role of transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in a superposed position (FIG. FIG. 29), where the rigidity is relatively high and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof, the transmission member 654 is brought into contact with the bearing portion 627 as shown in FIG. 38 (c). Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used. It can be changed.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recessed portion 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the second When the displacement member 640 is extended to the overhanging position, the bearing portion 627 is receptively formed in the recessed portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amount of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured by that amount. In other words, while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627, so that the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed and FIG. 37 And as shown in FIG. 38, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (ie, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhang position). , A state in which it is invisible to the player in front) can be easily formed.

As described above, the front base 620 is formed so as to be inclined by chamfering the side surface and the front ridge line portion on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33 (c)). An inclined surface 620a is arranged. Therefore, the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction of lowering the decorative portion 642b from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c), and the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) is changed through the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). In the case of forming, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 33 (b) is shown. Even when the state shown in FIG. 33A is formed through the state shown in FIG. 33A, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotation axis 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged in the first displacement member 630, and the weight is increased. The first displacement member 630 is liable to sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connection displacement member 642 is moved closer to the front base 620), and the connection displacement member 642 It is easy to be locked to the side surface of the front base 620. Therefore, a configuration in which the inclined surface 620a is provided on the front base 620 is particularly effective.

Further, as described above, the front base 620 includes ridges 626 protruding from the front surface thereof and extending along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top of the ridge 626 is the second displacement member 640. Can be contacted with. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the second displacement member 640. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 39 (b) is a front base 620 in the XXXB-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the connection displacement member 642.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the decorative effect by transmitting the light emitted from the light emitter or the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member disposed facing the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the connection displacement member 642, cloudiness is formed on the connection displacement member 642 due to rubbing with the front surface of the front base 620, and the light transmission is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ridge 626 is formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. Fogging (a portion where light transmission is impaired) due to rubbing formed on the connected displacement member 642 can be partially suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connecting pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 to the connecting displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 and along the locus of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). Will be extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 39B) of the connecting pin 642 hits the top of the ridge 626. Can be touched. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be applied to the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on the other parts of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened by that amount. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on the other portion of the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing with the ridge 626, and to prevent the function of transmitting the light from being impaired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. 40 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front base in the direction of arrow XLb of FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic side view of the 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 in the XLc-XLc line of FIG. 40 (a).

As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 630 is placed in front of the front base 620 by the height of the bearing portion 627. Since the bearing is supported in a raised state, a space for arranging the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the back surface of the first displacement member 630. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superposed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes an overhanging portion 628 formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 is projected from the back surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 of the front base 620, whereby the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is within a predetermined range. Can be regulated within.

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. A protrusion 628 is projected outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 in the radial direction, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 to cause the first displacement. The rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40A) portion of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size including the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 in the front view. That is, the front surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side surface of FIG. 40 (a)) is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)).

Further, in addition to the role of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 as a stopper that receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and regulates the relative displacement, the back surface of the first displacement member 630 is mounted on the front surface thereof. Since it is possible to combine the roles of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide the parts for both of these roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotation shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 has a second displacement member 630. Since the displacement member 640 is arranged and the weight is high, the first displacement member 630 is likely to shake in the front-rear direction (FIG. 40 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). The sway in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 is close to the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40 (c)) is the front base 620 (convex 626) of the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642). Although it can be regulated by contact with the top), the swing in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 is separated from the front base 620 (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)) cannot be regulated, and its own weight is as described above. Since it is bulky, it is likely to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress the forward swing (tilt) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is connected to the front surface of the front base 620, so that the rigidity of the protruding portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)), the direction for supporting the tilt (that is, the protrusion 628 is the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620. Since the rigidity in the direction of being sandwiched between the front surface and the front surface can be increased, the tilting of the first displacement member 630 to the front can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 43 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is arranged so that the base body including the rear base 710 and the front base 720 and the base end side can be displaced on the front side of the front base 720 of the base body. The first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 displaceably arranged on the tip end side of the first displacement member 730, and the driving force for displacementing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A connecting member that connects between the drive motor 750 arranged on the back surface of the rear base 710, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 750, and the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. It mainly includes a connecting first member 760 and a connecting second member 770), and a cover body 780 that is laid down on the lower end side front surface of the front base 720.

A part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 751, rack member 752 and second pinion 753) is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720. On the back surface of the front base 720, a pair of insertion pins 722 to be inserted into the sliding groove 752a of the rack member 752 is projected so as to define the moving direction of the rack member 752.

A shaft support hole 723, 724, 725 having a circular front view is formed through the front base 720, and each of these shaft support holes 723, 724, 725 has a rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 and a transmission member 754. The rotary shaft 754a and the rotary shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a shaft support hole 781 having a circular front view is formed through the cover body 780, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 781.

Further, a base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving recess 727 is recessed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front surface of the front base 720 and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The second displacement member 740 is formed so that the engagement surfaces can be engaged with each other with the displacement side engagement member 742 described later. As a result, as will be described later, the tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 can be suppressed (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a concave portion having a substantially rectangular shape in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 726, and is a recess of the bent portion 742b in the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740. By being formed with an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed so as to be acceptable. As a result, as will be described later, at the retracted position, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 in the proximity direction can be allowed, and damage due to a collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47 (c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 are teeth. The rack member 752 is formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be fitted is geared on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member.

The rack member 752 includes two sliding grooves 752a having a long hole shape in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are inserted into each of the sliding grooves 752a. By doing so, the moving direction is maintained in a defined state. That is, the rack member 752 is held so as to be able to move linearly between the facing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a projecting from the back surface on one end side, and a drive pin 754b projecting from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 754a, and the rotating shaft 754a is provided. By being inserted through the shaft support hole 724, the shaft is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762 described later of the first connecting member 760.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752. By rotating the second pinion 753, the transmission member 754 is rotated around the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720.

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, as will be described later, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, and the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven. .. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770. Can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotary shaft 731 projecting from one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) and a shaft on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) opposite to the rotary shaft 731. A support hole 732 is formed through, and a sliding groove 733 having an oval shape in front view is recessed on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is projected. Further, an engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

As described above, the rotary shaft 731 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft support hole 781 of the cover body 780, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is a shaft. By being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781, it is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. That is, the base end side of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780.

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end portion of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 faces the front surface. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section inserted into the sliding groove 772 described later of the connecting second member 770, and is on an extension line extending the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction. Is placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 should be aligned with each other. Can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the form of the relative displacement of the connecting second member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is defined as a linear motion (slide displacement). Can be done (see FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that projects to a position where it overlaps with the second displacement member 740 in the rear view, and the displacement of the second displacement member 740 described later at the overhanging position. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed so as to be engageable (see FIG. 48). As a result, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 is a flange member that is fastened and fixed to the end face of the rotary shaft 741 and the displacement side engaging portion 742 that project to the back surface thereof, the receiving recess 743 that is recessed in the back surface thereof, and the end face of the rotary shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotary shaft 741 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and when the rotary shaft 741 is inserted into the shaft support hole 732, the first displacement member is inserted. The second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of the 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 has a base end side to be fastened and fixed to the rotary shaft 741 having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732, whereby the rotation shaft 741 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 732.

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the back surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connecting groove 772 described later of the connecting second member 770. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is acted on by the connecting groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 to cause a second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. As described above, in the retracted position, the engaging surfaces are formed so as to be engaged with the displacement side engaging member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhanging position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. An engaging surface is formed to be engageable with the joint portion 735.

The receiving recess 743 is a concave portion having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742, and is from the outer shape of the bent portion 726b in the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Is also formed with a large opening area so that the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 can be accepted. As a result, as will be described later, at the retracted position, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 in the proximity direction can be allowed, and damage due to a collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47 (c)).

A rotation shaft 761 is projected from the back surface of one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) of the first connecting member 760, and a sliding groove 762 is opened in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, and the second connecting member 770 is provided with a sliding groove 762. The connecting groove 771 and the sliding groove 772 are opened at one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) and the central portion in the longitudinal direction, respectively.

The rotary shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720, and is connected to the connecting groove 771 of the connecting second member 770 by the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. The pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction are pivotally supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted into the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be relatively rotatable.

That is, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the first connecting member 760 is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 770 is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. The connecting portion (connecting pin 790) of the other ends of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730.

As a result, as will be described later, the first member 760 and the second member 770 are connected to each other while allowing the relative displacement of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 and the relative displacement of the front base 720. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhanging position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44 (c) and 45 c (c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, and the first displacement member 730 is inserted into the sliding groove 772 of the connection second member 770. Connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of the left rotating unit 700 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 46 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 44 (a) are shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 46 (a), FIG. 44 (b) is shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (b), and FIG. 44 (c) is shown in FIG. It is in the same state as 45 (c) and FIG. 46 (c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720. Will be set up.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is projected by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with its rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation.

When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to each other. When pushed in the overhanging direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)) by the 790, the first displacement member 730 has its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b). It is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with 731 as the center of rotation.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 770 in which the connecting first member 760 and the other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is lowered (lower side in FIG. 46 (a)). ), And the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the connecting second member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIGS. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, the connecting second member 770 has a connecting shaft 790 and a first displacement member 730 along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770. By sliding the connecting pins 734 of the above, linear motion (slide displacement) is performed along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is the first member 760 thereof. When rotated in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 extends in the extension direction with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation, as in the above case. (FIG. 46 (b) counterclockwise), and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. Relative displacement (relative rotation) to.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted and the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions, and a state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed.

Contrary to the above-mentioned case, the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). When driven, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is pushed in the retracting direction (right side in FIG. 46C) by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754, so that the connection first member 760 is moved. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation.

When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to each other. By pushing in the retracting direction (right side of FIG. 46 (c)), the first displacement member 730 shifts its rotation axis 731 as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b). It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 770 in which the connecting first member 760 and the other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 moves upward (upper side in FIG. 46 (c)). It is pushed up, and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 pushes up the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and FIGS. As shown in 6 (b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

From the states shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is driven. When the rotation shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (b)). 46 (b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. It is displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the start end of the movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected and the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and a state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

As described above, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 includes a connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) for connecting the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 730 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 (relative rotation) with the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730. ) Can be done.

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is erected between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction (overhanging direction) in which the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720. Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 and becomes visible to the player, so that the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is connected to the front base 720. The other end of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the second displacement member 740, and the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction are connected to each other so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection thereof. Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even if the first displacement member 730 is displaced from the front base 720 in a direction (overhanging direction) that protrudes from the front base 720, the connecting member (Connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In this case, as described above, the connecting second member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear motion (slide displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member The amount of displacement (rotation angle) at which the 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction (overhanging direction) in which the 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 is large (that is, the displacement amount of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770). Even in the case of (need to be increased), it is possible to prevent the connecting second member 770 from being visually recognized by the player by maintaining the state of being hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member 730. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 740 is provided with a light emitting body (not shown), and an electrical connection line W for supplying electric power to the light emitting body is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See FIG. 45). In this case, the connecting line W is introduced from the opening formed in the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitting body. Therefore, the connection line W is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere with each other and damage the connecting line W.

In this case, as described above, the connecting member (connecting second member 770) is arranged on the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear motion (slide displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. , It is possible to prevent the connecting second member 770 from interfering with the connecting line W. Therefore, even if a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730) is not secured, interference with the connection second member 770 can be avoided, so that such connection can be achieved. The space for arranging the line W can be reduced, and the front view shape (particularly, the dimension in the width direction) of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-mentioned connecting members (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730). Even in the case of providing a drive groove and connecting the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can perform the same operation as described above. can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased. That is, the connecting member needs to connect the connecting portions of the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770) are connected. It is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member in order to avoid the interference of the above. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 a size (area) including both the displacement locus of the connecting member and the drive groove, and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is correspondingly large. Increase in size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the connection first member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 to drive the drive motor 750. Is provided to the connecting first member 760, so that the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be miniaturized.

That is, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (connecting first member 760 and connecting second member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. The size (area) may be set, and it is not necessary to set the size (area) including the drive groove, so that the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, the engagement action by the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 700 for explaining the engaging action of the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa of FIG. 45 (a). do.

Note that FIG. 47 (a) illustrates the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 730. The state in which the displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in a direction close to the front base 720 in FIG. 47 (b).

As described above, the base side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement side engaging member 742 is projected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 are arranged in a posture in which the open side (the tip end side of the bent portion 726b) faces each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracting direction (upper side of FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b of each other are displaced. , 742b can be made to enter the inner surface side of the other bending portions 726b and 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 47 (b). And the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is erected between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement are located at a position relatively distant from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 730 tries to tilt the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation axis 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720 at the retracted position, the front surface. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740.

However, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal end of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, while the longitudinal end of the connecting first member 760 is relatively to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a close position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the base end (fulcrum), and the tip portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the upright posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740 (the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, that is, the second displacement member 740 side). ) Is easily tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (front, right side in FIG. 47 (b)).

On the other hand, in the state where the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged in the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the second displacement member is attached to the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Since the displacement side engaging member 742 of the 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) on the opposite side of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is separated from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right side of FIG. 47 (b).

The displacement side engaging member 742 may be projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 730. However, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 is projected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Will be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be set to a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. As a result, it is effective that the tip portion (second displacement member 740) on the opposite side of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)). Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement side engaging member 742 is located at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member The 730 is easily affected by shaking in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it becomes difficult to engage the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 is second as the engaging surface of the inner surface of the bent portion 742b moves from the tip end side of the bent portion 742b toward the base end side (base portion 742a side). It is formed so as to be inclined in a direction close to the back surface of the displacement member 740. As a result, the distance between the engaging surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement side engaging member 742 (the tip end side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47 (a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be easily engaged with each other. ..

In this way, while facilitating the engagement between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are retracted. As the displacement toward the base side, the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47 (b)) as the engagement surface of the base side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is tilted. be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate their tip portions (second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only can it suppress tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)), but also it is possible to suppress the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720, and to the front base 720 due to the tilt. Due to the proximity of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are accompanied by a slight elastic deformation as a whole. It is possible to suppress rattling with respect to the 720 and stably maintain the posture in a stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in a direction (forward) in which the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) thereof is close to the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. , It is permissible to tilt to the left side of FIG. 47 (b)). In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-shaped bodies bent in a substantially shape in cross section, and the back or front base of the second displacement member 740 when tilted. When it collides with the front of the 720, it is deformed in the bending direction, so that there is a high risk of breaking.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other party are recessed in the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Since it is installed (opening is formed), as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted in the direction close to the front base 720 (front, left side in FIG. 47 (b)). When this is done, the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other party can be accommodated in the receiving recesses 727 and 743. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

At the time of the above-mentioned tilting, the back surface of the connecting second member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface in a surface-to-plane manner over the entire surface, so that the surface pressure at the time of collision is reduced. Can be (distributed). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

48 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa portion of FIG. 45 (c), and FIG. 48 (b) is the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). It is a side view of the 1st displacement member 730 and the 2nd displacement member 740 in view.

As described above, when the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the first displacement member 730 is overhanging and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. Is relatively displaced (rotated) about its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions (FIG. 45 (c)). (See), the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 (bending portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, whereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are engaged. Can be combined with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 740 from rattling with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the overhanging position.

In particular, since the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. It can be displaced in directions close to each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

Further, in addition to the role of engaging the displacement side engaging member 742 with the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position and coupling the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720, the second displacement member is at the overhanging position. Since the second displacement member 740 can be combined with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 to be coupled to the first displacement member 730, the parts for both of these roles can be individually provided. It is not necessary to provide it, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51 (a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51 (b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51 (c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 in the line LIIa-LIIA of FIG. 51, and FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are FIGS. 52 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning apparatus 65 in the LIIIa-LIIIa line and the LIIIb-LIIIb line of FIG. 52 (b).

In FIG. 51, the opening / closing plate 860 is not shown, and in FIG. 53, the guide rib 813a is not shown. Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 superposed on the back side of the intermediate base 820. A seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 arranged between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening / closing plate 860 for opening and closing the winning opening 65a are mainly provided.

The winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by the front base 810, the front base 820, and the rear base 830, and a guide passage through which the winning ball is guided from the winning opening 65a is formed in the internal space. It is formed so that the weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (the other end decorative portion 843) is raised in a state where the weight of the game ball is not applied (FIG. 52 (a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52 (b)).

That is, the winning device 65 makes the seesaw member 840 alternately appear in the first state and the second state by utilizing the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840. An effect of vertically displacing the body 853) and the other end side (the other end side decorative body 843) is formed so as to be feasible.

Here, as will be described later, in the seesaw member 840, the length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is made larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting one end side and the other end side thereof. To. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls are likely to stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls suppresses the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state, and the first state and the second state are suppressed. It is configured so that the effect of alternately appearing and can be surely executed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such an effect will be described.

The front base 810 has a front substrate 811 forming the front surface thereof, a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 protruding from the back surface of the front substrate 811. And mainly prepare.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge side thereof are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and the seesaw member 840 is provided through the recessed portions 811a and 811b. And a part of the driven member 850 (one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is visibly exposed to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions that form the side walls of the guide passage that guides the game ball, and are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are portions that form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

The open portion on the upper end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other is designated as a winning opening 65a, and the game ball flows into the guide passage from the opening portion (winning opening 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and the front first bottom. The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that inclines downward toward a side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided to the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the downward inclination of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (reception port 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

The guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the front second side wall 813. The guide rib 813a is formed in a shape in which the height of the guide rib 813a is lowered from the front second side wall 813 as it is separated from the front base 811 so that the erecting tip surface thereof is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, when the ball flows into (falls) from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage, it collides with the front first side wall 812 and is bounced off, and as a result, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in this case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the vertical tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 includes an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 at a predetermined interval, an intermediate first side wall 822, an intermediate second side wall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall protruding from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821. Mainly equipped with 824.

The intermediate board 821 is formed with an opening / closing port advancing / retreating port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a feeding port 821c, and a discharging port 821d, and a support shaft 821e and a bearing 821f are formed on the front surface of the intermediate board 821. , The stopper portions 821g and 821h are projected.

The opening / closing port 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening / closing port 860 to move forward / backward. The opening 65a is closed, and the opening / closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening / closing opening 821a, so that the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and the bottom surface of the opening. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed so as to be connected to the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for sending a game ball from the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is the guide bottom surface 824a described later of the intermediate bottom wall 824. Is formed by. That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

The discharge port 821d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the discharge port 821d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the back side of the back base 830. Be sent out.

The support shaft 821e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for abutting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to regulate the rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portion 821g is located on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the discharge surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. Will be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52A), and in the second state, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is a stopper. It is formed by being regulated by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52 (b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the discharge surface 846, so that the discharge of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface on the opposite side to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface on the opposite side of the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can suppress the shaking on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 are portions that form the side walls of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side (the passage that guides the game ball received from the reception entrance 821b to the delivery port 821c), and have a predetermined interval. They are arranged so as to face each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball transmitted from the guide passage on the front base 810 side in the horizontal direction (FIG. 52 (a) left-right direction) from the reception port 821b and the game ball thereof. The received game ball is guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 52 (a) vertical direction).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 is a portion forming the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end side of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that inclines downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The game ball guided through the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and passes through the delivery port 821c in a substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. 52 (a) Left and right direction).

As described above, the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is provided with an intermediate bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball that has rolled the guide bottom wall 824a is laterally laterally directed to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Since the game is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of games can be played on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of dropping the game ball from above the receiving surface 844. It is possible to avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840.

Here, the extended length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferably set as follows. In the present embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52 (a)) from the extended tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back wall 831 described later of the back base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Will be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

Further, the facing distance between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to the same size as the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always rolls the guide bottom surface 824a and sends out the game ball from the delivery port 821c. It can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that the height position of the descending inclined end end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state (in the first state). See FIG. 53 (a)). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be promptly performed.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the descending inclination end is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53 (b)). As a result, as will be described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by utilizing the step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. Can be made easier.

The back base 830 mainly includes a back wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The back wall 831 is abutted against the rear end faces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, it is covered with the open portion on the back side). It is a part and forms a wall (back wall) on the back side of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 are portions that form the side wall and the ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. It is extended along the outer edge of the. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820, the discharge side wall 832 of the back base 830, and the discharge ceiling wall 833 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. To. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be secured, so that a plurality of game balls can be smoothly guided. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the earlier game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and is flipped up, the later game ball can be smoothly guided. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 has a bearing 841 formed in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction, a other end decorative portion 843 formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and an upper surface thereof. It mainly includes a receiving surface 844, an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 to be formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846.

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted, and is a seesaw member via the support shaft 821e and the bearing 841. The 840 is rotatably pivotally supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 described later of the driven member 850. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with the support shaft 821e as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852 to form a rotation centered on the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850. ..

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion on which a design or the like is decorated on the front surface, and is visibly exposed to the player via the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810 as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface-like portion in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 that rolls the guide bottom surface 824a and receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the inclined surface 845 has the receiving surface 844. It is a flat surface-like portion for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846.

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are in a no-load state (that is, the first state, see FIG. 52 (a)) in which the game ball is not placed on the seesaw member 840 regardless of the rotation position of the seesaw member 840. ), It is formed in a shape having a downward inclination toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the discharge surface 646.

Here, in the present embodiment, the receiving surface 844 is located on one end side (left side in FIG. 52 (a)) of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the axial center of the bearing 841, so that the second state (the other end side is lowered). When the receiving surface 844 receives the game ball in the state where the one end side is raised at the same time (see FIG. 52 (b)), the weight of the received game ball causes the one end side (receiving surface 844 side) in the longitudinal direction. Can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface portion for sending (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is a flat surface portion from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52 (b)). It is formed by inclining downward from the front side to the back side of the paper. Therefore, when the game ball is rolled up to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can be rolled toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 by the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

The claw portion 847 is for switching the rolling direction of the game ball toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. The guide surface 847a is provided as an inclined surface for guiding the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. As a result, the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be easily flowed into the discharge port 821d quickly. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened to obtain the first state and the second state. It is possible to smoothly switch between.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is unevenly arranged on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. Will be set up. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is,). , The time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

The driven member 850 has a rotary shaft 851 projecting from the back surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 850, and a rotary shaft 851 that is juxtaposed below the rotary shaft 851 and has a long hole shape in front view on the back surface of the driven member 850. Mainly a connecting groove 852 that is recessed as a groove of the above, and a one-sided decorative portion 853 that is formed on the front surface of the driven member 850 and is visibly exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for.

As described above, the rotary shaft 851 is a shaft-shaped body rotatably inserted into the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, and is a driven member 850 via the rotary shaft 851 and the bearing 821f. Is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted, and the connecting pin 842 is slid along the extending direction of the connecting groove 852. , The driven member 850 is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member 840.

When the seesaw member 840 transitions from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 is centered on the rotation shaft 851 in FIG. 52. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous moving member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is raised (see FIG. 52 (b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 is centered on the rotation shaft 851 in FIG. 52. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous moving member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the link mechanism for connecting the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850 and rotating the driven member 850 with the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is configured. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated by utilizing the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, in the transition from the second state to the first state, the seesaw member 840 needs to be rotated only by its own weight, so that the operation is slow and the time is long. Transition from the second state to the first state in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage. It is necessary to promptly carry out.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the driven member 850 is connected to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, an external force that lowers the weight of the driven member 850 on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. (That is, it can be used as an auxiliary force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state can be shortened, and as a result, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840th. It is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When the game ball flows into the guide passage on the front base 810 side from the winning opening 65a, the game ball is collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and rolls on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. By doing so, the vehicle is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the right in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

The game ball flowing into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is in a substantially vertical direction between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 (downward in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). Guided to reach the intermediate bottom wall 824. The guiding direction of the game ball that has reached the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (leftward in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)) by rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and the intermediate base 820 is fed. It is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives the game ball on the receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. It is moved, and the seesaw member 840 is rotated clockwise around the rotation shaft 841 by the weight of the game ball (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is lowered), and FIG. As shown in 52 (b), a second state is formed. However, in FIG. 52 (b), the illustration of the game ball is omitted.

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotary shaft 841 by its own weight. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the first state is formed by being rotated counterclockwise as the center (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised) (FIG. 52 (b)). The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is lowered in the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side)) due to the weight of the game balls. There is a risk that the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has its receiving surface 844 located on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 52B) with respect to the rotation shaft 841. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on the receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 can lower one end side in the longitudinal direction. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) with the rotation axis 841 as the center of rotation (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and is shown in FIG. 52 (b). The second state can be formed (easily formed). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the guide passage for guiding the game ball is formed in the internal space of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820, and the rear base 830, a plurality of game balls can be generated from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, a plurality of game balls can be stored by using the guide passage, and the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. can.

However, in this way, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game balls are the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the form of being guided by falling from above, these plurality of game balls are likely to be stacked on the receiving surface 844, and the seesaw member 840 is hindered from rolling the game balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845. It is not possible to switch between the first state and the second state of.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) having a guide bottom surface 824a extending in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling a game ball on the terminal side (outlet 821b side) of the guide passage. ) Is formed, and the game ball that has rolled the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 53 (a) and FIG. 5 (b) left-right direction). Can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal passage). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being stacked vertically on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840.

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side runs the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52A) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side of the passage (upstream passage) to guide the passage, and the extended length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced one by one.

That is, the extended length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in the present embodiment, from the extended tip to the back surface of the guide bottom surface 824a). The horizontal distance dimension L to the back wall 831 described later of the base 830 is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball can be present in such a horizontal passage. , Since the extension direction of the horizontal passage and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow to the horizontal passage can be increased by the amount of the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball (next game ball) after the upstream passage changes direction. It takes time to flow into the horizontal passage, and after that, the game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game ball is separated from the earlier game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the second state. Since it is located, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is rolled to guide the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball rides on the receiving surface 844 (collision with the step). This riding motion (collision) can be used to facilitate the descending (moving downward in FIG. 53 (b)) of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, one end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to easily switch between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a)), the seesaw member 840 is in a no-load state, and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is in a no-load state. The game ball guided from the 824a and received on the receiving surface 844 is quickly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to lower (form a second state).

In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a), from the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the first state. Also, since it is located below, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, it is possible to quickly roll the game ball from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 side to facilitate the formation of the second state.

In this first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (equal surface position) as the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do so. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces and the amount is increased. This is because a time lag occurs and the load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 increases due to the impact of dropping, which can be eliminated if the positions are at the same height.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 52 (b).

As shown in FIG. 54, a claw portion 847 is erected on the seesaw member 840 from its discharge surface 846. The claw portion 847 includes a guide surface 847a formed so as to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left-right direction in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846 toward the other end decorative portion 843 side (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball is rolled. Can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847, and the rolling direction thereof can be switched to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upper part of FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, the first state and the second state can be switched alternately. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846, and is in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( In the vertical direction of FIG. 54), the arrangement is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side of FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is set). The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball that rolls the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54) is the discharge port. The distance to the discharge port 821d is long, and the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 in a biased manner toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54), the claw portion 847 is placed close to the front base 810. The former game ball, which rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54), collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base. For the latter game ball that rolls the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the 820 (upper side of FIG. 54), the collision of the claw portion 847 with the guide surface 847a can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball is rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily kept constant.

Next, the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. 55 is a schematic rear view of the winning device 65, where FIG. 55 (a) is the first state shown in FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 55 (b) is the second state shown in FIG. 52 (b). Corresponds to each.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the lateral width dimension of the discharge port 821d (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, while the previous game ball is present on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) of the seesaw member 840, the next game ball is further moved to the other end side in the longitudinal direction. Even when the game balls are rolled toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the later game ball is bounced back to the side opposite to the rolling direction (that is, the distance between the two game balls (FIG. 55). (A) and the left-right spacing in FIG. 55 (b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when each of these game balls is discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. By being secured in, each can flow smoothly.

Further, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is a height dimension on the inclined surface 845 side rather than a height dimension on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840. Is set to a larger dimension. Again, with the previous game ball present on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction (left side of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)), the next game ball is further on the other end side in the longitudinal direction. Even when the ball is rolled toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the later game ball is bounced upward or is bounced off to the opposite side of the rolling direction and is an inclined surface. Even when the ball is flipped upward by the 845, the later game ball can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821 by utilizing the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the inclined surface 845 side. On the other hand, since the earlier game ball is difficult to be flipped up even if it collides with the later game ball, the space required for the discharge port 821d is reduced by keeping the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the discharge surface 846 side low. It is possible to secure a space for arranging other members by that amount.

Next, the gaming area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the game board 13, nails, windmills, inner rails 61, outer rails 62, various winning openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like are attached to a wooden base plate 60. As described above, the area on the front surface of the game board 13 defined by the inner rail 12 is defined as the game area (the area where nails, winning openings, etc. are arranged and the fired ball flows down). Rail.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13, so that the third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect device is displaceably arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. Is being done to secure a visible area. However, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the game board 13.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be built in the opening of the game board 13 (opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed from a light transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as “center frame 86”) is formed. A "region forming portion R") forms a part of the gaming region. As a result, the effect device (in this embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized via the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (through the watermark). Therefore, it is possible to increase the visible area of the left rotation unit 700 while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, the left-handed rotation unit 700 that is visually recognized through the region forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that the inner edge thereof reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). The area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured as much as possible through the area forming portion R of the 86.

On the other hand, since the width dimension of the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 is set to a size that allows the passage of only one game ball, the region forming portion R is formed through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the region is formed). The area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized can be secured as much as possible without going through the portion R).

Hereinafter, the detailed configuration of the region forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the region forming portion R. Further, FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R in the LX-LX line of FIG. 59. In FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 is erected from the back surface of the frame plate base portion 910 formed in the shape of a front view frame and the frame plate base portion 910, and is fitted inside the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 that is erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 that is opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defines the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front surface side thereof is a region in which the game ball is flowed down. The frame plate base 910 is provided with insertion holes 911 at a plurality of locations for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60. Further, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is formed so as to be slanted downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60. Due to this inclination, the rolling of the game ball can be smoothed.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a columnar portion 940, a side wall portion 950, and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86.

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, the first path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and the second path is between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion juxtaposed to the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and partitions the third path M3 between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940.

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is formed by bending toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected to each other in a substantially linear shape. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the sphere to flow down in an inclined direction in the front view.

A concave groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base 910. The concave groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, is formed as a concave portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and is repeatedly bent left and right like a front view saw blade, and the first path M1 and the first path M1 and the first. It is extended along the path direction of the three paths M3.

Protrusions 972 are projected from the side wall portions 950 and the inner edge defining wall portions 930 so as to face each other. The protrusion 972 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erection direction of both wall portions 930 and 950. Each of these protrusions 972 is arranged at a position shifted in phase from the bent portion of the concave groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third path M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960, whereby a fourth portion is formed between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940. Route M4 is partitioned.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (opposite distance between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (opposite distance between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), the width of the third path M3. Only a game ball having a dimension (opposite distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposing distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) can pass through. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the region forming portion R thus formed on the flowing game ball will be described. The game ball guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flowing down from the upper region of the game area is bounced off by a nail or rolled along the inner edge regulation wall portion 930, and then the first path M1 or the first path. It flows into the region forming portion R from any of the two paths M2. The game ball that passes through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flows down the third path M3 is collided with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower region of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed of a resin material, nails cannot be planted. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the flowing game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the confluence portion between the third path M3 and the fourth path M4) in the region forming portion R. The collision with the downstream wall portion 960 reduces the flow speed of the game ball, making it easier for the player to see the flowing game ball.

In this case, since the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, is integrally formed with the center frame 86, it can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold, and the downstream wall portion 960. It is not necessary to perform complicated work such as forming the above as a separate component and fastening and fixing it to the frame plate substrate 910. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the flow speed of the game ball becomes relatively high. , There is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 inclined toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed into a triangular shape in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 after colliding with the inclined surface 961, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of backflow in the third path M3. , The flow can be made to flow toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the burden on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed from this point as well.

Since the side wall portion 950 is also a portion integrally formed with the center frame 86 and can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold, it is formed as a separate part as in the case of the downstream wall portion 960. It is not necessary to perform complicated work such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since the side wall portion 950 having the role of partitioning the third path M3 can also have the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail 61 is that the gaming ball collides with the nail and then collides, so that the speed is relatively slow and this collision occurs. It was unlikely that the inner rail 61 would be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, not through the region forming portion R). In order to secure the maximum, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in the present embodiment, the width dimension that allows the passage of only the game ball in which 1 is 1 in the third path M3). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, it is necessary to significantly change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed down the game area on the upstream side of the region forming portion R (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, a part of the game ball (the game ball flowing down the second path M2) collides with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (bending due to the collision). ..

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side on the inner rail 61, the game ball flowing down the second path M2 is received by the side wall portion 950 and collides with the inner rail 61. It can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to a collision).

That is, it is conceivable that the side wall portion 750 is not formed and the inner rail 61 also serves to partition the third path M3, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid the collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, the width cannot be narrowed, and the opening portion (inner edge defining wall portion 930) of the center frame 86 must be arranged in a direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized is reduced by that amount. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side on the inner rail 61 will, as a result, secure the maximum area where the effect device (left-handed rotation unit 700) can be directly seen.

As described above, since the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light transmitting material, the side wall portion 750 is formed from the light emitting body on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971 and the like). It can function as a light guide body that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back surface side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the upright end surface (upper surface of FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the upright end surface. Not only can the effect of the illuminated light P be exhibited, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light P is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 (upper side surface of FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and the game is performed together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface thereof. It is possible to exert the effect of the light P that illuminates the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls).

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side on the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back surface side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is on the inner rail 61 side (inner edge defining wall). Leakage from the side surface of the portion 930) to the outside can be reduced by the inner rail 61. That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the upright end surface or the side surface (the side surface on the side facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, the amount of light that can be emitted from the upright end surface or the side surface of the side wall portion 950 can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the guided light P can be enhanced.

The light emitting body is arranged in the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is set to the back surface of the region forming portion R. Therefore, in the state where the left rotation unit 700 is arranged in the retracted position, the light P emitted from the light emitting body is guided through the side wall portion 950 while making the left rotation unit 700 visible through the region forming portion R. After making it visible to the player. That is, the shape of the left-handed rotation unit 700 visually recognized via the region forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the vertical end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the light P. The effect of light P can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, protrusions 972 are projected from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the protrusion 972 to prevent the flow down. As a result, in the region forming portion R where the nail cannot be planted, the flowing speed of the game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball.

In this case, the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be alternately collided with the left and right protrusions 972 to meander the game ball to the left and right. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3) is given to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can be done.

Further, as described above, a concave groove 971 formed in a front view saw blade shape is recessed on the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meander to the left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also imparts a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3) to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can be given.

Further, when the light emitted from the back surface side of the region forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game region, the light is diffused or collected in the concave groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910. Since it can be used as a illuminating lens, it is possible to enhance the effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the concave groove 971 is phased along the path direction of the third path M3 with respect to the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930. Are arranged in a staggered manner. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball guided by the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meandering to the left and right can be easily collided with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately, and the concave groove can be easily formed. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of protrusion 972. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower, and the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

Since the protrusions 972 and the concave groove 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third path M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4 is suppressed. Contributes to smooth guidance of the ball.

Further, the terminal side of the concave groove 971 (the portion juxtaposed with the inclined surface 961) has an extension direction overlapping the downstream wall portion 960 and directs the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal side of the concave groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction in which the third path M3 flows backward, and at the same time, it is possible to make the game ball flow down toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing its flow velocity. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the burden on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 in the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the uppermost part of the game area with respect to the game board 13 in the first embodiment. As a result, the effect device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) is directly connected through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the region forming portion R). The visible area can be further expanded as compared with the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is extended along the outer rail 62. As a result, the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6 are partitioned between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in the region above the return ball prevention member 68.

The facing distance between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice and smaller than three times the diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the center frame 2086 forms a passage (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) through which the game balls can pass each other without colliding with each other between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930. The above-mentioned area where the effect device can be directly seen through the opening can be secured to the maximum.

Further, the rotation shaft of the wind turbine WM is arranged substantially in the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. As a result, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the wind turbine WM, and between the rotating shaft of the wind turbine WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930.

According to the region forming portion R thus formed, the gaming ball launched from the ball launching unit and guided to the upper region of the gaming region by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. As a result, after passing through the wind turbine WM, the vehicle is moved on the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value larger than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right side region beyond the upper top of the gaming area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down (move the sixth path M6) along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 without exceeding the upper top of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth path M6 passes through the wind turbine WM and then flows down to the third path M3.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the right-handed rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, a case where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642), can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the right-handed rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has three members, a first displacement member 3630, a second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642), and a third displacement member 3660, as the transmission member 654 is displaced. Is displaceable. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear-viewed view of the right-handed rotating unit 3600. Note that FIGS. 62 and 63 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 3600 (rear base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right-handed rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 which is slidably displaced in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 62) of the first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3461d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3461) is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. The driven member 3641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 (slide displacement). ..

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632, and the groove width is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461. Will be done. Therefore, the connecting pin 3461d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the driven member 3641 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630.

The connecting pin 3461d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section inserted through the through groove 3636, and the protrusion height thereof is set to a dimension that allows protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630. That is, in the assembled state, the tip end side of the connecting pin 3461d can be inserted into the sliding groove 3661 described later of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is formed into a linear groove. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660, and is a rear side rail fixed to the first displacement member 3630 and a rear side thereof. It consists of a front rail that is connected so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible on the front side of the rail. The slide rail 3662 is expanded and contracted by the relative displacement of the rear side rail and the front side rail in the longitudinal direction, so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 is overlapped with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (with the sliding groove 3661). (Crossed with the through groove 3636). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630, and the connecting pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 to displace the connecting pin 3641d as the third displacement member. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 by the connecting pin 3461d).

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. 64 and 65 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 are operated between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 3600 in each state at the time of doing.

It should be noted that FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), and FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (FIG. 67). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 64 (c) is the same as FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 66 (c) is the same as FIG. 67 (a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, whereby the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3630 are slid. Where each of the 3660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is in a shortened state, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 is set. The 3641d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, on the right side in FIG. 66 (a)). In this case, the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 66 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 66 (b) are passed, and FIGS. 64 (c) and FIG. As shown in 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Be displaced. That is, in the section shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) and 66 (a) to 66 (c), the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660. Is maintained at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the first displacement member 3630 is moved to FIG. 67 (a). The second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 while being maintained in the state (position) shown, and the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b) are exhibited. After that, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c).

In this case, where the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3461 causes the connecting pin 3461d to be on the other end side (support shaft) of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660. The rotation is in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) of sliding toward 632 and the end portion on the side close to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67 (a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the extending direction. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) and FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), the third displacement member 3660 is displaced. 1 The length from the base end of the displacement member 3630 to the tip end of the third displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) from the dimension h1 to the dimension h2 via the dimension h2 (h1 <h2 <h3).

Contrary to the above-mentioned case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c), the first displacement occurs. While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 in the opposite direction, and FIG. After passing through the states shown in b) and FIG. 67 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3461d to be connected to one end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). The rotation is in the direction of sliding (clockwise in FIG. 67 (c)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in a shortening direction, the third displacement member 3660 is slid and displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the base end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to the dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 rotates the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the upright direction as a rotation axis and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3461 is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 with respect to the first displacement member 3630 while maintaining the first displacement member 3630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 3660 is individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 65 and 67).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. In the third embodiment, the case where the right-handed rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment is the first. The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. Note that FIGS. 68 and 69 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 4600 (rear base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. .. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3461d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3461) is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The driven member 3641 is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the third displacement member 4660 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

A sliding groove 4661 is recessed in the back surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4662 is projected above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is formed into a linear groove. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body inserted into a shaft support hole 4637 formed on one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and is inserted through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637. The third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotating shaft 4662, whereby the rotating shaft 4662 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 4637.

In a state where the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (axially supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 is overlapped with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630, and the connecting pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 to displace the connecting pin 3641d as the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 by the connecting pin 3461d).

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. 70 and 71 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in each state at the time of doing.

It should be noted that FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c) are shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c), and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) are shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (FIG. 73 (a). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 70 (c) is the same as FIG. 71 (a), and FIG. 72 (c) is the same as FIG. 73 (a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, so that the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3640 are slid. Where each of the 4660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a), at the retracted position, the virtual line L1 passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and is along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630. The angle formed by the virtual line L2 that passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and is along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as the intersection angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 72 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b) are passed through the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b). As shown in 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 in the second displacement member 3640 is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 because it does not slide. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (c) and 72 (a) to 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line). The angle formed with L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 73 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 73 (a). The second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while being maintained in the state (position) shown, and the states shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 73 (b) are displayed. After that, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c).

In this case, where the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3461 is the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3461d). The inner wall surface (upper side of FIG. 73A) is in the direction of being pushed up by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) and 73 (a) to 73 (c). , The angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is changed (decreased) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3 <. θ2 <θ1).

Contrary to the above-mentioned case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c), the first displacement occurs. While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 in the opposite direction, and FIG. After passing through the states shown in b) and 73 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3461 around the support shaft 632 is the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (inner wall surface on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3461d, lower side in FIG. 73 (c)). ) Is in the direction of being pushed down by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3641. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angles formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) intersect. It is increased to the angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the upright direction as a rotation axis and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 3461 is the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 71 and 73).

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, the case where the right-handed rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right-handed rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment is the first. The third displacement member 5660 can appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. In addition, in FIGS. 74 and 75, a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 5600 (rear base 610 and front base 620) is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right-handed rotation unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment, the third displacement member 5660 is located in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 74) of the first displacement member 5630 in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. a) Arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5461) is the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. It is in contact with the back surface of the 5663, and the driven member 5641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 5630, so that the third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction). Can be infested).

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630. The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sliding guide rod 5664. To. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, whereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be able to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Will be done.

The connecting pin 5641d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section inserted through the through groove 3636, and is set to a protrusion height whose tip is located in the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is in contact with the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630.

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-shaped portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is slid, and the back surface on which the connecting pin 5641d is slid is from one end (right side in FIG. 75). It is formed as an inclined surface that ascends toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the height of the protrusion of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end toward the other end (or in the opposite direction) with the rotation of the driven member 5641, the driven member is driven. The distance between the 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is increased (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to a dimension slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and the rear view shape is formed into a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the protruding tip side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state where it can slide in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 appears and disappears in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630, the third displacement member 5660 is slid not only by the sliding guide rod 5664 but also by the sliding inclined portion 5663. Since the motion can be supported (that is, supported at three places), it is possible to suppress the third displacement member 5660 from tilting forward and stabilize its haunting motion.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidably supported by the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding hole 5638 is provided on the axial end surface thereof. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the sliding guide rod C is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the sliding guide rod 5664 from coming out of the sliding hole 5638.

In this case, the urging member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in a state of being elastically compressed (a state in which the total length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is urged in a direction close to the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

Therefore, the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630, and the connecting pin 5641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is displaced. 3 Act on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the displacement member 5660 (slide the connecting pin 5641d along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663), and move the third displacement member 5660 back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630. It can be infested in the direction.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 and 77 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhang position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 5600 in each state at the time of doing. Further, FIGS. 80 and 81 are top views of the right-handed rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

It should be noted that FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), 80 (a) to 80 (c), and 77 (a) to 77 (c). ) Are in the same state as FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) and FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (c) is FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (c) is FIG. 81 (a). be.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, so that the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member Where each of the 5660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 80 (a), in the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is in a state of being close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 is set. 58 (a), the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in FIG. ) And the right side of FIG. 80 (a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is defined as the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 78 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 76 (b), 78 (b) and 80 (b) are passed through the states shown in FIG. As shown in 76 (c), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 5660. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. Is displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), and FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the third displacement member 5660 is the third displacement member. 1 It is maintained in a state closest to the displacement member 5630 (a state in which the protrusion amount is the dimension J1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a), the first displacement member 5630 is driven. While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (a), the second displacement member 5640 (connected displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (b) and 79 (B). After passing through the states shown in b) and 81 (b), they are arranged at the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c).

In this case, where the driven member 5641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5461 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to be on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660. Direction to slide toward the end side (the end portion on the side where the protrusion height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79 (a), the left side in FIG. 81 (a)) (FIG. 79 (a). ) Counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (upper side in FIG. 81 (a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is projected forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c), 79 (a) to 79 (c) and 81 (a). In the section shown in FIG. 81 (c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is changed (increased) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1). <J2 <J3).

Contrary to the above-mentioned case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (c), the second displacement member 5640 (connected displacement member 642) is relative to the first displacement member 5630 in the opposite direction. After being displaced and undergoing the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b), 79 (b) and 81 (b), they are placed in the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a). Displacement.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to protrude from the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction of sliding (clockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) at the end on the lower side, the lower right side in FIG. 79 (c), and the right side in FIG. 81 (c).

Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d is moved to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is retracted (immersed) to the rear (rear side) by that amount. Is allowed, so that the elastic recovery force of the urging member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to be brought close to the first displacement member 5630 from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660. The amount of protrusion is shortened to the dimension J1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member The 5630 is rotated in the upright direction with the rotation axis 631 as the rotation axis, and is arranged at the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5461 is the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of the 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are integrally displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced. A form in which the third displacement member 5660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 76, 78 and 81) and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81). In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement in other adjacent units, and the movable range in such other units can be increased. Can be secured. Further, by projecting the third displacement member 5660 forward, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought closer to the player, and a powerful effect can be performed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. In the third embodiment, the case where the right-handed rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period in which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced coincides with the period in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the clockwise rotation unit 6600, the period in which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced and the period in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced are different. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear-viewed view of the right-handed rotating unit 6600. It should be noted that FIGS. 82 and 83 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 6600 (rear base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is the third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side of FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. The 4660 is rotatably supported, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connected displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are first displaced. It is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the member 4630.

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed linearly, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 has an action section 6641c1 as described later. It is formed by bending from the non-interference section 6641c2 in a shape of abbreviated front view.

As a result, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the working section 6641c1, both the second displacement member 6640 (connecting displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, while the connecting pin. During the period when 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and has an action section 6641c1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 6641. It is curved in an arc shape with the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) side concave and extends along the width direction of the driven member 6641 (that is, a shape that divides the annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631). It is provided with a non-interference section 6641c2 (formed in).

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. 84 and 85 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhang position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 show the operation between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in each state at the time of doing.

It should be noted that FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) are shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (FIG. 87). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 84 (c) is the same as FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

Here, the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has substantially no other configuration except that the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is different from that of the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment. Since they are formed to be the same, the description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 86 (a)) from the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 86 (a), the above is described. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the working section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (driven member 6641) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 is not formed. , The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) and FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. The angle formed by L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85A and 87A, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and the non-interfering section 6641c2). It is located at the end opposite to the connection portion, on the right side of FIG. 87 (a). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at the connecting portion of the working section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 87 (a). The driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 87 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 while being maintained in the indicated state (position) presses the support shaft 632. It is rotated in the direction of raising the connecting groove 6641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) as the center.

Due to the rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 while sliding on the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)). As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b) (decorative portion 642b is lifted to the uppermost position). State) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (left side of FIG. 87 (b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the position of the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a. The connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connecting pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interference section 6641c2 is formed as a surface whose inner wall surface intersects with the moving direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates by its own weight about the shaft support hole 642a at a predetermined angle. Will be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (restricts the movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby restricting the movement of the connecting displacement member. It is possible to restrict the rotation of the 642 around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), in the third displacement member 4660, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641 as described above. As a result, it is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the crossing angle θ2 ( Is reduced) (θ2 <θ1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line). The angle formed with L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1).

In this case, since the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a), the driven member 6641 has the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). Even when rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b) as the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 provides the shaft support hole 642a. It restricts rotation by its own weight as the center, but does not push the connecting pin 643 upward, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above-mentioned case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the connected displacement member While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interfering section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c) (FIG. 85 (b)). And FIG. 87 (b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 to lower the decorative portion 642b. The coupling displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment thus formed will be described with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

88 (a) to 88 (c) are schematic front views of the right-handed rotating unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88 (d) to 88 (g) are right-handed rotating units in the sixth embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of 6600, and each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position is shown.

In the right-handed rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the first displacement member 4630 are not displaced. 2 Displacement member 3640 and third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (a form between FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b)), and the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state. It is possible to form a form in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a form between FIGS. 88 (b) and 88 (c)). can. In this case, in the latter form, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 3640 is substantially the same as the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660.

On the other hand, in the right-handed rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88 (d) and 88 (e)). The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state (FIG. 88). (E) and the form between FIG. 88 (f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state. Therefore, a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIGS. 88 (f) and 88 (g)) can be formed.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (start and end) and the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end) can be different. More specifically, while the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is started at the same time, the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is shifted (second displacement member 6640). The displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

<7th Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, the case where the connected displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably arranged in the first displacement member 3630 to form the right-handed rotation unit 3600 has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the case has been described. In the right-handed rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connected displacement member 642 is displaceably arranged on the third displacement member 7660. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. Note that FIGS. 89 and 90 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 7600 (rear base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the right-handed rotation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, the third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported on the front surface of one end side (upper side of FIG. 89) of the first displacement member 7630. , The connected displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated. Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of the center of rotation in a curved locus.

In the first displacement member 7630, a notch 7369 is formed at the edge portion on one end side (upper side of FIG. 90), and the space created by the notch portion 7369 is the support shaft 7665 of the third displacement member 7660 described later. It is considered as an arrangement space of. A connecting groove 7641c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641c is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is longer than that of the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. As a result, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be secured.

A support shaft 7665 is projected from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642, and the connection displacement member 642 is the third displacement member 7660 via the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. It is rotatably supported on the back of the shaft.

A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, whereby the indicator shaft 7665 is restricted from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a. Further, the support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion formed on the base side and a small diameter portion having a smaller diameter than the large diameter portion on the tip end side, and the small diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660, and the raising of the large-diameter portion causes the connecting displacement member 642 to be raised in the front-rear direction (for example, for example) with respect to the driven member 7641. , FIG. 91 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface) is set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of the right-handed rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. 91 and 92 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 show the operation between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 7600 in each state at the time of doing.

It should be noted that FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are shown in FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), and FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c) are shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c). It is in the same state as c). In this case, FIG. 91 (c) is the same as FIG. 92 (a), and FIG. 93 (c) is the same as FIG. 94 (a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, whereby the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member Where each of the 7660s is displaced, the mode of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 93 (a)) from the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 93 (a), the above is described. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the working section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 7640 (driven member 7641) with respect to the first displacement member 7630 is not formed. , The second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) and FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. The angle formed by L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 94A) from the state shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 94 (a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 becomes the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b of the above, the driven member 7641 rotates around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a) while the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94 (a). In the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d (FIG. 94 (a) counterclockwise direction).

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is formed by the connecting pin 3461d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , Each is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94 (a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual). The angle formed with the line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 is attached to the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a). ) Is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 94 (a), and the decorative portion 642b is lifted upward.

In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward with the rotation shaft 4662 as the center of rotation. Therefore, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 is used to rotate the third displacement member 7660. The connecting displacement member 642 itself, which is pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 of the above, can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connected displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 with the support shaft 7665 as the center of rotation, and the first displacement member 7630 has an arcuate locus. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be linked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to form a more complicated embodiment, and the amount of protrusion of the decorative portion 642b upward (first). Crossing angle θ4, which is an angle formed by the virtual line L3 that passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and is along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1)). Can be expanded to a more upwardly protruding posture.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the aspect of the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed is described as described above, in the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the outward path and the return path. Is different. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. Further, FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide unit 8773. In addition, in FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 8700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment, the guide portion 8773 is recessed in front of one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 95) of the connecting second member 8770. As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circumferential path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773 so that the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different between the outward path and the return path.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, which is projected from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axis of the rotating shaft 741, and its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting it to a small size, it can be moved along the guide portion 8773. An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is housed in the connecting second member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body connects the connecting pin 8744a to the connecting second member 8770. It acts in the direction of protruding from the back of the. Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744a moves along the guide portion 8773, the state in which the tip of the connecting pin 8744a is in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 is maintained.

The guide portion 8773 is a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a, is formed as a circumferential path, and has a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8773h to 8773j) in the path. Is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

Specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends in a substantially straight line in front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 starting from the position P1. The first groove 8773a is connected to the end of the first groove 8773a and extends linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 starting from the position P2. The two grooves 8773b are connected to the end of the second groove 8773b and are extended while being curved in an arc shape (in this embodiment, an arc shape that is convex in the direction away from the position P2) starting from the position P3. The end is formed from a third groove 8773c whose end is connected to the start end of the first groove 8773a.

A first step 8773h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the start end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b lower than the bottom surface on the end side of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side of FIG. 97). It is a vertical plane that connects each other. As a result, the movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the start end of the second groove 8773b is allowed, while the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the start end of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is the second. It can be regulated by one step of 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed at the connection portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and the connection portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a, respectively. In the second step 8773i, the bottom surface of the start end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is made lower than the bottom surface of the end side of the second groove 8773b, so that the third step 8773j is the start end side of the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8773c on the terminal side.

As a result, the connection pin 8744a is allowed to move from the end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the start end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a), while the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) is allowed to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the start end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the end can be regulated by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

That is, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to orbitally move the guide portion 8773 in the order of the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b, and the third groove 8773c along the directions of the arrows L1, the arrow L2, and the arrow L3. ..

Next, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member Where the 8770 and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 100 and 101 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 100 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720.

In this case, it passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741), the virtual line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741). The angle formed by the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. Further, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at the position P1 (starting end of the first groove 8773a) of the guide portion 8773 (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is located on the uppermost side (upper side of FIG. 100 (a)). ) Is pushed up.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is extended in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation. By being rotated in the clockwise direction), the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101 (a)), and the guide portion 8773 (first) of the connecting second member 8770 is drawn downward. The inner wall surface of the groove 8737a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 guides the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8737a. Guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 100 (a)). Relative displacement (relative rotation) is performed (rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (Α1 <α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the connecting first member is similarly driven as described above. When the 760 is rotated in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extension direction (FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. ) Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pulled downward (lower right side in FIG. 101 (b)), and the guide portion 8737 of the connecting second member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8737a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a guides the guide portion 8737 in the direction of arrow L1 along the first groove 8737a. Further guidance (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 100 (b)). Further relative displacement (relative rotation) is performed (rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (Α1 <α2 <α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 101 (b), the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement is performed. A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided by the guide portion 8773 in the direction of the arrow L1 along the first groove 8773a, passes through the first step 8773h (jumps off), and then abuts on the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , Located at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1 <α2 <α3). <Α4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracting position will be described.

102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 104 and 105 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return route. 98 (a) is the same as FIG. 103 (b), and FIG. 99 (b) is the same as FIG. 102 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b). ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a), in the overhanging position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at the position P2 (starting end of the second groove 8773b) of the guide portion 8737 (the start end of the second groove 8737b). (See FIG. 97), the connecting second member 8770 is in a state of being pulled to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 104 (a)).

Contrary to the above case (outward route shown in FIGS. 98 to 101), the transmission member 754 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a). When it is rotationally driven to rotate), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (upright) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. The 8773 is guided along the second groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2 (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8737b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 8770, and the relative displacement of the connecting second member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal of each other. It is a linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8737b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member 730. Relative displacement (relative rotation) centered on the rotation axis 741 of 740 is not formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), the first connection is carried out in the same manner as described above. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clock 104 (b)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a clockwise direction, and is further rotated (standing) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a seconds the guide portion 8773. It is further guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the groove 8773b, passes through (jumps off) the second step 8773i, and then abuts on the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c to be located at the position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, a relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the crossing angle α4. Will be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 105 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8737c in the direction of arrow L3 and passes through the third step 8773j. After jumping down), it is positioned (returned) to the position P1 by hitting the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) Can be the same, but the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, in the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (rotation amount), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. While doing so, it is possible to form an embodiment in which the displacement is made toward the retracted position and the intersection angle α4 is reduced to the intersection angle α1 in a short time immediately before being placed at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, the transmission member 754a is rotationally driven (displaced). It is possible to suppress the rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730.

<9th embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which the concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section are continuous in an endless manner has been described, but the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment has the connecting pin 744a. It is formed as an opening to be loosely fitted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. Note that FIGS. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, the guide portion 9773 is formed with an opening at one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770. As will be described later, the form of the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is different between the outward path and the return path due to the displacement of the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773. can do.

The guide portion 9773 is connected to the first inner wall 9737a extending substantially linearly in the front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) of the connecting second member 9770, and the end of the first inner wall 9773a. A second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in front view along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 9770 (vertical direction in FIG. 106) and an arc shape connected to the end of the second inner wall 9773b. (In the present embodiment, the arc shape is convex in the direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b) and is extended while being curved, and the end thereof is connected to the start end of the first inner wall 9773a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening to be the inner wall surface.

Next, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member Where the 9770 and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 110 and 111 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 110 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged in front of the front base 720.

In this case, it passes through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741), the virtual line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741). The angle formed by the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the crossing angle β1. Further, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is located at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9737a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the connecting second member 9770 is the uppermost (FIG. It is in a state of being pushed up to 110 (a) upper side).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the axial view of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the figure). In the state of 110 (a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 110 (a)) passing through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and sandwiching the vertical line Z parallel to the gravity direction. ) Is located.

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation. With the rotation of the second displacement member 740 due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a is abutted (pressed) on the first inner wall 9773a of the guide portion 9773.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is extended in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation. By being rotated in the clockwise direction), the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 110 (a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9737 of the connecting second member 9770 is drawn downward. (1st inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a directs the guide portion 9773 toward the second inner wall 9773b along the first inner wall 9773a. You will be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 110 (a)). Relative displacement (relative rotation) is performed (rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (Β1 <β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the connecting first member is similarly driven as described above. The 760 is rotated in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 extends in the extension direction (FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. ) Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pulled downward (lower right side in FIG. 110 (b)), and the guide portion 9737 of the connecting second member 9770 is further drawn. The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a guides the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be further guided in the direction of.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a), the second displacement member 740 has the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clock 110 (b)). Further relative displacement (relative rotation) is performed (rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (Β1 <β2 <β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 109 (b) and 111 (b), the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement is performed. A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided by the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b is abutted. It is located at the beginning of 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1 <β2 <β3). <Β4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracting position will be described.

112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return route. Note that FIG. 112 (a) is the same as FIG. 109 (b), and FIG. 113 (b) is the same as FIG. 108 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b). ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a), at the overhanging position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 connects the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 (the first). 2 Positioned at the starting end of the inner wall 9773b), the connecting second member 9770 is in a state of being pulled to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 114 (a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is aligned with the connecting pin 744a with respect to the vertical line Z in the axial direction view of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state of FIG. 114 (a)). It is located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114 (a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation. With the rotation of the second displacement member 740 due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a is abutted (pressed) on the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773.

From this state, the transmission member 754 is in the opposite direction (FIG. 114 (FIG. 114)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a), contrary to the above-mentioned case (outward route shown in FIGS. 108 to 111). a) When it is rotationally driven (counterclockwise), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (upright) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114A). As described above, since the connecting pin 744a is in a state of being abutted (pressed) against the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 due to the rotation of the second displacement member 740 due to its own weight, the guide portion 9773 is moved. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

In this case, as described above, the second inner wall 9737b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 9770, and the relative displacement of the connecting second member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal of each other. It is a linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. No relative displacement (relative rotation) is formed around the center of rotation. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), the first connection is carried out in the same manner as described above. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) with the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, so that the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clock 114 (b)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a clockwise direction, and is further rotated (standing) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114 (b)), so that the connecting pin 744a seconds the guide portion 9773. Further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b and abutting against the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, the connection portion between the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c (the starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) is reached. Be positioned.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, a relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the crossing angle β4. Will be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement is as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 115 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c toward the first inner wall 9773a, and the connecting pin 744a is guided toward the first inner wall 9773a. By abutting against the inner wall surface of the above, it is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

In the present embodiment, when the state shown in FIG. 115 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 115 (b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z, so that the second displacement member 740 is used. , Can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770.

Specifically, in a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (on the right side in FIG. 115 (a)) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 is Since the connecting pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115 (a) as the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (synchronously). On the other hand, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (on the left side in FIG. 115 (a)) beyond the vertical line Z due to this rotation, the second displacement member 740 is formed. Is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it is rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the embodiments can be the same, not only can the relative displacements of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 be different, but on the return path, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement can be made different. The angle formed by the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersection angle β4, and immediately before being placed at the retracted position, the intersection angle β4 is changed to the intersection angle β1 at high speed (short time). A mode to reduce can be formed.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment is different from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it includes a cage 10746, and the other parts have the same configuration, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, and shows a state in which the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, a cage 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Here, the cage 10746 will be described with reference to FIG. 117.

117 (a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 in the CXVIIb-CXVIIb line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 117 (c) is a cross-sectional view. It is sectional drawing of the cage 10746 in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line of FIG. 117 (a).

As shown in FIG. 117, the cage 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space having a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy object is displaceably stored in the internal space. In this embodiment, a predetermined heavy object is a liquid LQ, and about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side (right side or left side of FIG. 117C) in the longitudinal direction of the cage 10746 according to the inclination of the cage 10746 (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

It will be described back to FIG. 116. The cage 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z in the axial direction view (that is, the state of FIG. 116) of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732). It is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740.

Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the cage 10746 in the horizontal posture is in an inclined posture in which the one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , The contained heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated around the rotation shaft 741 as the center of gravity, the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 are integrated as a member as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not arranged. It is possible to increase the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G') when it is regarded as.

Next, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating the return route toward.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member thereof is rotated. When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the 730, the cage 10746 is tilted according to the rotation position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is applied. The cage 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G'of the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 can be arranged at a position farther from the vertical line Z as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not arranged.

Therefore, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the rotation of the second displacement member 740 using the center of gravity G'is ensured by its own weight, and the connecting pin 744a is Can be easily maintained in a state of being in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 and stabilize the relative displacement (rotation) thereof.

On the other hand, in the section where the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770, the center of gravity G'can be used to ensure the advance of the second displacement member 740. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (short time) immediately before being placed in the retracted position.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case where a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the outward path, not in the return path. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 shows a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (rear base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the connecting second member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as will be described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear motion of the connecting second member 11770 is converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740 on the outward path, while the connecting second member is converted on the return path. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only on the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. The rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 is fastened and fixed to the inner ring, and the rack gear 11774 is attached to the outer periphery of the outer ring. A gear to be meshed with is engraved. In this case, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connecting member 11770, and is meshed with the pinion gear 11747. The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the meshing with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the connecting second member 11770 is pulled to the maximum downward (see FIGS. 126 (b) and 129). ).

An urging spring SP formed as a metal torsion spring is interposed between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. In the urging spring SP, the arm extending from one end of the coil portion is locked to the first displacement member 730 in a state where the coil portion is externally fitted to the rotating shaft 741 and elastically twisted and deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is locked to the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is applied to the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). It acts in the direction of maintaining the angle formed by the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides (presses the inner wall surface) the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member Where the 11770 and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced respectively, the mode of displacement between the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 11770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position will be described.

123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the outbound route.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 125 (a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is an intersection angle. It is set to γ1. In this case, the connecting second member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up to the uppermost position (upper side in FIG. 125 (a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 125 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is extended in the extension direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 125 (a)) with the rotation axis 761 as the center of rotation. By being rotated in the clockwise direction), the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation axis 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a) through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b).

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the overhanging direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 125 (a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the connecting second member 11770 is a pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125 (a). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is defined as the rotation in the direction of transmitting the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, after going through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b), as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a), the second displacement member 740 is the urging spring SP (see FIG. 122). ) Is further elastically deformed in the torsional direction and is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is determined. It is changed (increased) from the crossing angle γ1 to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1 <γ2 <γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is projected to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), and the first displacement member The 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged in the overhang position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), when the connecting second member 11770 is pulled to the lowermost position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP (see FIG. 122) and is returned to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracting position will be described.

127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the evacuation position, and FIGS. 129 and 130 are from the overhang position to the evacuation position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return route. Note that FIG. 127 (a) is the same as FIG. 124 (b), and FIG. 128 (b) is the same as FIG. 123 (a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b). ..

Contrary to the above case (outward route shown in FIGS. 123 to 126), the transmission member 754 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 129 (a). When it is rotationally driven to rotate), the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 goes through the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 128 (a) and FIGS. 129 (b) and 130 (a), and then the states shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). ), It is placed (standing) in the retracted position.

Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129 (a)), so that FIG. 127 (b) and FIG. 129 (b) show. As shown, the rack gear 11774 is meshed with the pinion gear 11747, and the second connecting member 11770 is pushed further upward, so that the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (b). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is defined as the rotation in the direction of cutting the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b), through the states shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). In the section until the second displacement member 740 is arranged in, the second displacement member 740 is not rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) are used. The angle formed by is maintained at the crossing angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the outward path, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member 730 is tilted. 2 The displacement members 740 are gradually displaced relative to each other, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3. At the overhang position, a displacement mode that changes to the crossing angle γ1 is formed, but on the return path, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line). While maintaining the angle formed by the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) at the crossing angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the retracting direction. It is possible to form a displacement mode.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is the front base 12720. It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment. 132 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 in line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment, the base side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 are housed in the internal space of the front base 12720, and the second displacement member is accommodated. An insertion member 12745 is arranged on the back surface of the 12740.

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a slide portion that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 132 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface, FIG. 132 (b) vertical direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. A base 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of FIG. 132 (a) and the lower surface of FIG. 132 (b)).

In the base side engaging member 12726, the slide portion 12726c is slid and displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), so that the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b are displaced from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (paper surface of FIG. 132 (a)). The slide portion 12726c slides toward the back side (the back side of the paper surface and the upper side of FIG. 132 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) while projecting to the front side and the lower side of FIG. 132c (b). By being displaced, the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b can be immersed in the receiving recess 727.

In this case, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is arranged between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the back surface of the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP1 is performed. The force keeps the base-side engaging member 12726 in an immersive state (the state shown in FIG. 132B). In this immersive state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the base side engaging member 12726.

The side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132 (b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the back surface side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. Be abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 132 (a) and left-right direction in FIG. 132 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720, and is arranged on one end side (FIG. 132 (FIG. 132). b) The right side) is exposed from the insertion slot 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side (left side of FIG. 132B) of the transmission member 12728, an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726 toward the front side is formed, and the inclined surface is formed. , The inclined surface of the base side engaging member 12726 is abutted.

Therefore, by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728, the transmission member 12728 is slid and displaced in a direction close to the base side engaging member 12726, whereby the base side engaging member 12726 is moved to the front side. The base side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the back side (inside the receiving recess 727) by sliding displacement (protruding) to the base side engaging member 12728 in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726. It can be displaced (immersed).

A urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is arranged between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the transmission member is provided by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP2. The 12728 is maintained at a position separated from the base-side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132 (b), that is, the position where the base-side engaging member 12726 is immersed).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 12740 and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the height of the base of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720. At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745b is set to be the same direction (parallel) as the extending direction of the bending portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action by the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 133 (c), and the second displacement member 12740 is in the state shown in FIG. 133 (d). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720, first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 The tip abuts on one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion slot 12720a of the front base 12720.

When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720 from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a), the insertion portion 12745 b of the pressing member 12745 is displaced. By being inserted into the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the urging force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction close to the base side engaging member 12726 (slide displacement). Will be).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the base-side engaging member 12726 is gradually projected toward the front surface of the front base 12720 and displaced toward the base-side engaging member 12726. The side engaging members 742 are brought close to each other, and the bent portions 726b and 742b of each other enter the inner surface side of the bent portions 726b and 742b of the other. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 12720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the overhanging position, the elastic recovery force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2 causes the base-side engaging member 12726 to receive the receiving recess 727. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 12720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base side engaging member 12726 can be made difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the thirteenth embodiment has been described. The displacement side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the embodiment is engaged with the front wall surface of the front base 13720. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 135 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line in FIG. 135 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment has a front side (FIG. 135 (a) front side of the paper surface, FIG. 135 (b) lower side) and a side surface side thereof on the front base 13720. An opening 13720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 135A and 135B) is formed, and the rotating member 13726 is rotatably arranged in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a cross-sectional view from the side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front base 13720 and the front surface portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a. One side (opposite side of the front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is arranged at the initial position (position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) that closes the opening 13720a by being rotated to one side around the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a. By being rotated to the other side around the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a, it is immersed in the front base 13720.

In this case, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is arranged between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3 causes the urging spring SP3 to be elastically twisted and deformed. The rotating member 13726 is maintained in the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface and the side surface portion 13726a of the front surface portion 13726b and the front surface and the side surface of the front surface base 13720 are arranged flush with each other, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 13742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state of is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the second displacement member 13740 is in the state shown in FIG. 136 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is displaced. The tip of the is abutted against the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726.

When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720 from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member 13742 The 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction against the urging force of the urging spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 gradually enters the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, and is shown in FIG. 136 (c). As described above, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 can be engagedably faced with the back surface of the front base 13720. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 13720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the overhanging position, the rotating member 13726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic restoring force of the urging spring SP3. Can be made to. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface and the side surface of the front surface base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 can be made difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 14726 in the 14th embodiment is the front base 14720. It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 14700 according to the 14th embodiment. 138 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 138 (b) is a line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in the above. Further, FIG. 139 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the overhanging position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 139 (a). -It is a partially enlarged sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in the CXXXIXb line.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the left rotation unit 14700 according to the 14th embodiment, the base side engaging member 14726 is housed in the internal space of the front base 14720, and the rack member 14752 is located on one end side in the longitudinal direction ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the left surface of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)).

In the base side engaging member 14726, the slide portion 14726c is slid and displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), so that the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b are displaced from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (left side in FIG. 138 (b)). ) (See FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slidably displaced toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown) to accept the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be immersed in the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is arranged between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the back surface base 710 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP4 is performed. The force keeps the base-side engaging member 14726 in an immersive state (the state shown in FIG. 139 (b)). In this immersive state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the base side engaging member 14726.

The back surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 toward the upper side (upper side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

On the front surface (left side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the transmission portion 14752b, the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion) is directed downward (lower side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). An inclined surface inclined in a direction away from 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

Therefore, the base-side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (direction protruding from the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base-side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b. As well as being displaced, the base side engaging member 14726 can be slid and displaced toward the back surface side (direction of immersion in the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced downward and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are displaced from each other. It can be engaged, and it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 14720.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the overhanging position, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP4 causes the base side to engage. The member 14726 can be immersed in the receiving recess 727. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 14720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is less likely to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<15th Embodiment>
Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of being projected from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engaging member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is the front base 15720. It is arranged so that it can be slidably displaced in front of. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment. 141 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134 (b) is a sectional view of the front base 15720 in the CXLIb-CXLIb line in FIG. 141 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment has a front side (FIG. 141 (a) front side of the paper surface, FIG. 141 (b) lower side) and a side surface side thereof on the front base 15720. An opening 15720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b)) is formed, and the front side (lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a. A base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged in the portion so as to be slidable.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a in the front view), and is formed on the front base 15720. 1 Guide groove 15720b1 and 2nd guide groove 15720b2 are arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed so as to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the top view shown in FIG. 141 (b). The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have an inclination angle (second inclination angle) smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720. To. In this embodiment, the second inclination angle is set to 0 °. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. 141 (b), so that the rear side diagonally rearward of the front base 15720 (FIG. 141 (b)). It is slid and displaced toward the upper left side), and then, by being guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, it is slid and displaced toward the side of the front base 15720 (left side in FIG. 141 (b)), and the front surface. Immerse yourself in the interior of the base 15720.

In this case, an urging spring (not shown) made of a coil spring is arranged between the front base 15720 and the base-side engaging member 15726 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the urging spring is arranged. The elastic recovery force keeps the base-side engaging member 15726 in its initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base side engaging member 15726 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 141 (a) and the lower surface in FIG. 141 (b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the side engaging member 15726.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action by the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 142 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), and the second displacement member 740 is in the state shown in FIG. 142 (d). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (a)) with respect to the front base 15720, the displacement side engagement occurs. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted into the inside of the front base 15720 from the opening 15720a, and the base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base side engaging member 15726.

When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (b)) with respect to the front base 15720 from the state shown in FIG. 142 (b), as shown in FIG. 142 (c). The base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 pushes (slide-displaces) the base-side engaging member 15726 along the first guide groove 15720b1 in the immersion direction against the urging force of the urging spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction from the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), the base-side engaging member 15726 is pushed in the immersion direction along the second guide groove 15720b2 (slide displacement). Will be).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is placed on the back surface of the base side engaging member 15726. , Can be engaged and face-to-face. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 15720 (lower side in FIG. 142 (c)).

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the overhanging position, the base side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring. ) Can be done. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with respect to the front surface of the front base 15720. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are less likely to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<16th Embodiment>
Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the embodiment is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 according to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 144 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 in the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in FIG. 144 (a).

Further, FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 is moved to the retracted position. The transition state when displaced toward is schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 145 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), and the second displacement member 16740 is in the state shown in FIG. 145 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, in the left rotation unit 16700 according to the 16th embodiment, an opening 16720a is formed on the side surface of the front base 16720 (the surface on the right side of FIGS. 135A and 135B). ..

The displacement-side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is displaced to the front base via the opening 16720a in accordance with the displacement. When the second displacement member 16740 is gradually entered into the internal space of 16720 and the second displacement member 16740 is arranged in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. It can be face-to-face as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 16720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the opening 16720a may be opened in the front base 16720, and it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visually recognized by the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the overhanging direction and the front surface of the front base 16720 is exposed. It can be made difficult and the appearance can be improved.

<17th Embodiment>
Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 projecting from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the embodiment is engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 according to the 17th embodiment. Further, FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the rear base 710 and the displacement side engaging member 17742, and the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the time is schematically illustrated.

The second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 147 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b), and the second displacement member 17740 is in the state shown in FIG. 147 (c). Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 according to the 17th embodiment, the entire front surface and side surface of the front base 17720 on one end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side of FIG. 146) are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. The height of the base portion 17742a is set so that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the back surface of the back surface base 710 at a predetermined interval.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the back surface side of the rear surface base 710 with the displacement. When the second displacement member 17740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 can be engagedably faced with the back surface of the back surface base 710. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 17720.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member on the front base 17720, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, it is possible to improve the appearance of the front base 17720 by avoiding the player from seeing the functional part unrelated to the decoration. Can be done. In other words, since it is not necessary to make the side surface of the front base 17720 difficult to see from the player by the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhang position, the overhang amount of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the effect. be able to.

<18th Embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right-handed rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacementing (standing up) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (standing operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the standing operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right-handed rotating unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment utilizes the action of the inertial force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. It is done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right-handed rotating unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is a front view when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of.

In addition, in FIG. 149 (a) and FIG. 150 (a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged at the overhanging positions (that is, FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c)). Corresponds to. Further, FIGS. 149 (b) and 150 (b) correspond to FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), and FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (c) are shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (b). Corresponds to 36 (a).

Further, FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, with FIGS. 151 (a), 151 (b) and FIGS. 151 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 150 (a), 150 (b) and 150 (c), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right-handed rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment, the contacted portion 18629 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape from the front surface of the front base 18620 has a decorative portion 642b in the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. A substantially columnar contact portion 18644 is projected from the back surface. The contact portion 18644 is arranged at an end portion opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 18642.

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are in the middle of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (the upper surface of FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 149 (a), 150 (a) and 151 (a), as shown in FIGS. 149 (b), 150 (b) and 151 (b), The connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in a direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c) and 151 (c). ), When the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation, the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c), rotation (standing) of the first displacement member 630 toward the retracted position centered on the rotation axis 631 is started. (See FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b)), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629, and the contacted portions 18629 and the contacted portion 18644 are separated from each other. The contact is released.

In this case, in the section until the contact portion 18644 comes into contact with the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 149, 150 and 151), the drive motor 650 uses only the second displacement member 18640. It may be driven by rotation, and the drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. It is considered to be the load of. Further, since the displacement direction of the connected displacement member 18642 is the direction of descending downward in the direction of gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is also reduced from that point.

On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the first displacement member 630 is operated to stand up against gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is sharply increased from that point as well.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 18642, and the connection displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When rotated about the center, the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151 (c)).

That is, the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 around the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the contact between the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 can be stopped suddenly. , The inertial force of the connected displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is displaced (that is, upright) in the retracting direction with the first displacement member 630 as the rotation center with the rotation shaft 631 as the center of rotation (arrow in FIG. 151 (c)). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 630.

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and not only by the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also by the weight of the first displacement member 630. Also, when added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be exerted as a force for assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sudden change (large) of the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the sex.

<19th Embodiment>
Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the right-handed rotation unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment, the case where the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described, but the connection displacement member 19642 in the 19th embodiment has been described. The contact portion 19644 of the above is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment, the connected portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 of the second displacement member 19640 is the first. It is set at a position different from that in the case of one embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side of FIGS. 152 and 153) is extended while being curved in an arc shape, and the curved portion thereof. A connecting groove 641c is arranged on the extending tip side of the. By this curved portion, the interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the connecting displacement member 1964 is avoided. The connecting displacement member 1964 is formed by projecting a plate-shaped overhanging portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 is projected on the front side of the overhanging portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered, and the shaft of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portions (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are located inside (center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the imaginary center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. A connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is located on the outside of the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connected displacement member 1964 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the case of the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

154 and 155 are front views of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 show the operation between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear schematic diagram of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state at the time of doing.

Note that FIGS. 154 (a), 154 (b) and 154 (c) are in the same state as FIGS. 156 (a), 156 (b) and 156 (c), respectively, and are in the same state as in FIG. 155 (a). ), FIGS. 155 (b) and 155 (c) are in the same state as FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b) and 157 (c), respectively. Further, FIG. 154 (c) is the same as FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is the same as FIG. 157 (a).

Here, the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in the 19th embodiment rotates relative to the first displacement member 19630 of the connection displacement member 19642 due to the difference in the positions of the connection portions (connection groove 641c and connection pin 643) described above. Since the other operation modes are formed substantially the same except that the direction of the above is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the description of the same portion will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, in the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 156 (a)), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is driven by the first groove 635 (action). By pushing down the inner wall surface of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the overhanging direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the overhanging direction in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member 19640.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (a), the drive pin 654b is moved to the first displacement member 19630. While passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157 (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), the driven member 19641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 157 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. It is rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108 (b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connected displacement portion 19642 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the case of the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is the non-interference section 635b and the second displacement member 19640 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. By reaching the end of the two grooves 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

It will be described back to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153. In the present embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 is projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 is projected from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. .. The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

The contacted portion 19639 and the contacted portion 19644 are provided in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 153). Here, the action of the contacted portion 19639 and the abutted portion 19644 due to the contact will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is a front view when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of.

In addition, in FIG. 158 (a) and FIG. 159 (a), the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged in the overhanging position (that is, FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c)). Corresponds to. Further, FIGS. 158 (b) and 159 (b) correspond to FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), and FIGS. 158 (c) and 159 (c) correspond to FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (b). Corresponds to 157 (a).

Further, FIG. 160 is a schematic rear view of the right-handed rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhang position to the retracted position, with FIGS. 160 (a), 160 (b) and FIGS. 160 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 159 (a), 159 (b) and 159 (c), respectively.

From the overhanging positions shown in FIGS. 158 (a), 159 (a) and 160 (a), as shown in FIGS. 158 (b), 159 (b) and 160 (b), the connecting displacement member 19642. Is rotated around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in a direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c), 159 (c) and 160 (c). When the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation, the contact portion 19644 comes into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19369.

In this case, in the section until the contact portion 19644 comes into contact with the contacted portion 19369 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160), the drive motor 650 uses only the second displacement member 19640. It may be driven by rotation, and the drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. It is considered to be the load of.

On the other hand, in the state where the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19369, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the operation is such that the first displacement member 19630 stands up against gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connection displacement member 1964, the connection displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642. The contact portion 19644 lifted upward in accordance with the above is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19638 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160 (c)).

That is, the rotation of the connection displacement member 1964 around the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the contact between the contacted portion 19638 and the contact portion 19644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 can be stopped suddenly. , The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is displaced (that is, upright) in the retracting direction with the first displacement member 19630 as the rotation center with the rotation shaft 631 as the center of rotation (arrow in FIG. 160 (c)). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 19630.

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and not only by the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also by the weight of the first displacement member 19630. Also, when added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be exerted as a force for assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sudden change (large) of the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the sex.

<20th Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) is performed regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either in the first state or the second state). However, in the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (reception surface 844) is restricted by the winning device 20065 in the 20th embodiment. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment. Further, FIG. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162 (b) shows a winning in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. It is sectional drawing of the apparatus 20066. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161 of the winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment, a regulation portion 20748 is formed on the seesaw member 20840. The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that is erected upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 is formed in the first state, the regulating portion 20848 is located outside the opening region of the delivery port 821c, whereby the opening width of the delivery port 821c is widened. (FIG. 162 (a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is permissible to send the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state, the regulating portion 20848 is brought closer to the delivery port 821c side as the seesaw member 20840 rotates, and the regulating portion 20848 A portion is located within the opening region of the outlet 821c (ie, a portion of the restricting unit 20848 overlaps the opening region of the outlet 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2, which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2 <W1). Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowable) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. Or can be regulated).

That is, in the first state, the seesaw member 20840 is rotated by sending the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and rolling the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846. , The second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 started to rotate toward the second state, when the game balls were further continuously sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (received by the receiving surface 844). ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 is started to rotate toward the second state, the regulating unit 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface from the delivery port 821c It is possible to regulate (prohibit) the delivery of the game ball to the 844 and secure the time for discharging the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until the discharge of the game ball from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d is completed and the game ball on the seesaw member 20840 is exhausted, the game ball is waited to be sent from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Can be made to. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, since the opening width of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the regulating unit 20848, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through, and the time required for sending the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is increased accordingly. It can be made to (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

<21st Embodiment>
Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 has been described. The winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game ball and discharging it to the discharge port 821d. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

163 (a) and 163 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment and correspond to FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. It should be noted that the rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and comes into contact with the game ball on the seesaw member 840 regardless of whether the seesaw member 840 forms the first state or the second state. Placed at a possible height position.

The rotating member 21870 has a shaft support portion 21871 rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted, and a shaft support portion 21871 that protrudes to one side and a delivery port 821c. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and an extrusion plate facing the discharge port 821d while projecting from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872. It is equipped with 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is arranged in a posture in which the axial center direction is along the gravity direction (that is, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)) (that is, orthogonal to the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the extruded plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial view of the shaft support portion 21871 (gravity).

In this case, in the rotating member 21870, the receiving plate 21872 is the seesaw member 840 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the receiving plate 21872 is rotated along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 in a posture protruding above the receiving surface 844 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)). The extruded plate 21873 is in a position of protruding upward from the inclined surface 845 and / or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

That is, in the rotating member 21870, at the rotational position where the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163 (a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), at the rotational position where the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163 (b)) in the posture of being advanced toward the side close to 821c. The extruded plate 21873 is in a position of being advanced toward the side close to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the playing ball sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 is the extrusion plate 21873. Is rotated in a direction that projects above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

The game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, the posture). , The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 163 (b)) is retracted from the extruded plate 21873 even when it is arranged in the posture shown in FIG. 163 (b). Since it is rolled along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 is projected upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163 (a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 utilizes the rolling of the game ball to be in an initial position (a position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 and pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873, that is, FIG. 163. It is possible to return to the position shown in (a). Therefore, it is not necessary to drive by the drive means or detect by the sensor device, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<22nd Embodiment>
Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

164 (a) and 164 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 according to the 22nd embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065, and correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 22065 in the 22nd embodiment has an opening 22894 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870 with respect to the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment. Further, only the points to be provided are different, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 is provided with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the side surface of the lower side (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side of FIG. 165) of the extrusion plate 21873. Will be set up. On the other hand, a plurality of openings 22894 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed (at three places in the present embodiment) in the plate-shaped portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The protrusion 22874 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 in the front view (direction view of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, that is, the state shown in FIG. 165). To. On the other hand, the opening 22489 is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 in the front view (direction view of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the center of rotation, and the rotating member 22870 is rotated about its movable range with the shaft support portion 21871 as the center of rotation. In any case, it is possible to prevent the projecting piece 22874 from being interfered with the inner edge of the opening 22894. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and can be smoothly rotated.

Here, as in the case of the 21st embodiment described above, when the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a protrusion, the seesaw member 840 forms the second state (or a state close to it). When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is to be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the extrusion plate 21873, the distance between the extrusion plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846. Because of the large size, the lower portion of the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the portion on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)). Therefore, it takes a long time for the extruded plate 21873 to come into contact with the upper portion of the game ball, and it becomes difficult to quickly discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the rotational energy of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 is projected downward (seesaw member 22840) from the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (b). In the state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the protrusion 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion (lower portion of FIG. 164 (a)) of the game ball. Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, the rotational energy of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the game ball via the protrusion 22874.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

<23rd Embodiment>
Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the 21st embodiment, the case where the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported by the shaft) on the front base 810 has been described, but the rotating member 23870 of the 23rd embodiment is arranged (rotatably) on the seesaw member 840. (Axis support). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the 23rd embodiment. 167 (a) and 167 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, which correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, and correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 23065 in the 23rd embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence / absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, the rotating member 23870 according to the 23rd embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871. In this case, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, and is arranged below the extrusion plate 21873. The side surfaces face substantially parallel to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b). Regardless of which of the two states is formed, the extrusion plate 21873 can be made to face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

Therefore, unlike the case of the 21st embodiment described above (that is, the lower portion of the extrusion plate 21873 is in contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the portion on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a))), the extrusion plate 21873 Can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 167 (a)). Therefore, the time until the extruded plate 21873 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (extruded) to the discharge port 821d by that amount. Further, the energy of rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, in the rotating member 23870 of the present embodiment, the stopper portion 23875 is projected from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side where the game ball is extruded), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to contact. In the state where the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)), the extruded plate 21873 of the rotating member 23870 is in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (in the left-right direction of FIG. 167 (a)). It is placed at the rotation position along it.

Therefore, the stopper portion 23875 is omitted, and the extrusion plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 as compared with the case where the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it abuts on the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to make the 21873 stand by and shorten the time until the extruded plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (b)). The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 while retracting the extruded plate 21873, thereby causing the receiving plate 21872. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving surface 844 is projected upward (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (a)).

In this case, in this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the extruded plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the game ball may roll in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by projecting the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the extruded plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) is placed on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. It is possible to prevent the extrusion plate 21873 from being excessively retracted toward the back surface side of the front base 810 when rolled along the same line (see FIG. 167 (a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unnecessarily rolling in the direction away from the discharge port 821d, so that the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stopper portion is not formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167 (b). )reference). That is, the rotation when the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and the rotating member 23870 is rotated by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed because the seesaw member 840 is arranged. The rotation angle of the member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the energy of rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game balls by the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they can be increased. By extruding a plurality of game balls from the extrusion plate 21873, it is possible to easily discharge the plurality of game balls to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are set. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining the rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but in the seesaw member 840 in the 24th embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the winning device 24065 according to the 24th embodiment, bearing portions 24816, 24826 are projected from the back surface of the front base 24810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816, 24826 are portions whose inner peripheral surfaces rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877, respectively, and have a substantially U-shaped protrusion with an open upper portion (upper side of FIGS. 169 and 170). Formed as a part.

In the present embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger radius of the inner peripheral surface with respect to the bearing portion 24827 of the intermediate base 24820. As a result, as will be described later, rotation of one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the end on the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is allowed.

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820. Here, the rotation shaft 24877 will be described with reference to FIG. 171.

171 (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at the axial end portion of the main body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axial center of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b is changed according to the rotation angle. ) Formed as a so-called disc cam.

It will be described back to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171. The rotary shaft 24877 is set so that the axial length of the main body portion 24877a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a protruding from both ends in the axial direction of the bearing 841 are the bearing portion 24816 and the intermediate base of the front base 24810. It is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24826 of 24820 (see FIG. 173). The rotary shaft 24877 is positioned on the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 in a predetermined phase (rotational position) and then fixed.

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 172 (b) shows a winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. It is a cross-sectional view of. Further, FIG. 173 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 173 (b) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 in the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173 (a)) of the rotating shaft 24877. Both ends in the axial direction are axially supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward at the first tilt angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 as the rotation angle increases. However, by gradually acting on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position on one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the forming side of the cam portion 24877b) becomes the maximum. The axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 to the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820, and the tilt angle is increased to a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). (Case), if the tilt angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is strong (large), the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 earlier, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is high. If is loose (small), the ejection of the game ball from the ejection surface 846 will be delayed, and the residence time thereof will be long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state will not be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively gentle (small) in the initial stage. Since it can be kept, it is possible to suppress the early discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to keep the game ball on the discharge surface 846) and to make it easy to surely form the second state. can.

On the other hand, at the final stage, the tilt angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is made relatively strong (large) so that the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so that the game can be played on the discharge surface 846. The time on which the sphere is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened so that the first state and the second state can be switched smoothly.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining the rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but in the seesaw member 840 in the 25th embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the winning device 25065 according to the 25th embodiment, bearing portions 25816, 24826 are projected from the back surface of the front base 25810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816, 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotary shaft 25877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotary shaft 25877 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and the axial length thereof is the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. It is set to a dimension larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both ends in the axial direction of the bearing 841 are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24820 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See Fig. 177).

Further, on the back surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is projected from the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is located on the movement locus of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts on the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. By this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the tilt angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 176 (b) shows a winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. It is a cross-sectional view of.

Further, FIG. 177 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176 (a). 177 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 177 (d) is a CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus 25065 in. Note that FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a) and 177 (b), in the first state, since the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817 are spaced apart from each other, the rotating shaft 25877. Both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24820 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively, in a posture in which the axis of the rotating shaft is parallel to the horizontal direction (FIG. 177 (a) left-right direction). Ru. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward at the first tilt angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a) and 177 (b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. The lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 has a rotating shaft 25877. Is rotated while lifting one end side in the axial direction (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177 (a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right back side in FIG. 174). , FIG. 177 (b) right side) is lowered.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b), 27 (c) and 177 (d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 25877 is the inner circumference of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820, and the tilt angle is increased to a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is brought into contact with the push-up portion 25817. Section), while maintaining the tilt angle of the downward slope of the discharge surface 846 at the first tilt angle (that is, without changing the tilt angle of the downward slope of the discharge surface 846), the final stage (discharge surface 846 forming portion). In the section after the lower surface of the seesaw is brought into contact with the push-up portion 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be sharply increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the early discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, it is possible to make it easy for the game ball to stay on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. .. On the other hand, in the final stage, since the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed). It is possible to shorten the time) so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the concave groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the concave groove 971 protrudes from the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910. In addition to being provided, a ridge may be provided that extends in the shape of a saw blade in front view. In this case, as in the case of the concave groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge and meandered to the left and right. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be changed. A ridge can also be used as a lens that diffuses or collects light.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the second state has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 coincides with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the height direction or is located below the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. It may be formed so as to do.

In the third embodiment, the case where the third displacement member 3660 is relatively slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by using the expansion / contraction operation of the slide rail 3662 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin for the groove is provided. The third displacement member 3660 may be relatively slid-displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the sliding of the above.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730 in either one direction or the other direction. You may be urged to. As a result, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the liquid LQ is used as a predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Other heavy objects may be any one that can displace (for example, roll or slide) the internal space of the cage 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the cage 10746 changes, and for example, iron or lead. Examples include a sphere and a columnar body made of iron. In that case, the internal space of the cage 10746 does not need to be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy object is held in the internal space of the cage 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined heavy object is held at the center of gravity via a string or a link. It may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G to the second displacement member 740. Also with this, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, a predetermined heavy object can be displaced to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the cage 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is preferable to position the center of the cage 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the intersection angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP has been described, but this is not always the case. The method is not limited to the above, and may be performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740 by omitting the urging spring SP.

In the 24th and 25th embodiments, the case where the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction (FIG. 173 (a) left-right direction) in the first state has been described. In the first state, the height position of one end in the axial direction (the formation side of the cam portion 24877b) of the rotating shaft 24877 is higher (or lower) than the other end side in the axial direction. It may be set to the position. That is, the above-mentioned first inclination angle (inclination angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is downwardly inclined toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-mentioned second inclination angle (second inclination angle). It suffices if the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed so as to be able to be increased to an inclination angle larger than the inclination angle (inclination angle in which the discharge surface 846 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, the case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870 and 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the extruded plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. As a result, the same effect as in the case of the 23rd embodiment can be obtained.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 257. In the first control example, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), and the latent state (the latent state (the time saving state of the normal symbol)). Three gaming states (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) are provided. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. More specifically, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed based on the ball entering the second entry port 1640 is made shorter than in other gaming states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds) configuration. In addition, the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state) and the time saving state of the normal symbol (high probability state) are configured so that the hit probability of the normal symbol is almost the same (231/240 → 232/240). The opening period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol is common (1 second x 2 times). As a result, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second entrance 1640 rather than the ball is launched at the first entrance 64 (so-called left-handed). By launching (so-called right-handed), the lottery of special symbols can be executed more efficiently. Hereinafter, the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. The lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball is called the second special symbol lottery.

In the first control example, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the second special symbol lottery, the specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period (1.648 seconds x 1 time, 0.06 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times) in a part of the loss. ) It will be released. For this reason, even if the lottery of the second special symbol does not result in a big hit, there are many opportunities to get the prize ball by entering the ball into the specific winning opening 65a, which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol. It becomes. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the result of the lottery in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small hit".

In addition to the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the prize ball is increased in the latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short by opening the specific winning opening 65a even if it becomes a small hit. You can keep it going. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state and the probable change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, so that the frequency at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened due to a big hit or a small hit is a latent state. It is significantly reduced compared to. Therefore, in the normal state or the probable change state, even if the player hits right, the number of balls used for the game is larger than that of the prize ball. Therefore, in the normal state and the probable change state, it is more advantageous to hit left. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this control example, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

In this first control example, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

First, the details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. FIG. 178 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 178, a second through gate 67 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 86, and a variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. The ball may reach these second through gates 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player strikes right. In FIG. 178, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided on the front side of the front view of the variable winning device 65 is shown by deleting the portion other than the outer peripheral portion. (CLXXIX part in FIG. 178).

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b). FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX unit in FIG. 178. As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detection opening 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of the game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is distributed to either the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or the special discharge flow path 65e2 provided on the downstream side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can enter by the opening / closing plate 65f1 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). It is variable to. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the ball can flow down on the right side of the opening / closing plate 65f1. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to open the opening of the specific winning opening 65a by tilting toward the right side in the front view.

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable winning device 65 and moves to the second entrance 1640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, the game ball is allowed to enter the second entry opening 1640 to draw a lottery for the second special symbol, and the specific winning opening 65a is used when a small hit or a big hit occurs. It is possible to get a prize ball by putting a ball in the ball and simply continuing to hit right. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily in the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game ball winning the specific winning opening 65a is distributed into the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later. The configuration to be used will be described.

First, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (a). In FIG. 179 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the switching member 65h is in a state of protruding to the left side of the front view (the flow path side where the ball flows down), so that the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 It is a figure which shows the state which the opening surface is closed.

When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and as a result of the switching member 65h preventing the special discharge flow path 65e2 from flowing down, the normal discharge flow path is normal. It is guided to 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls from the normal discharge flow path 65e1.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 179 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened by operating the flow path solenoid 65k and immersing the switching member 65h to the right in the front view. ..

As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a V-passage switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 and composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is detected as an out ball. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 are discharged can be determined by the total of the out balls detected by the V-passing switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball jam occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected at an early stage.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit game, the game state after the big hit is a probable change state of a special symbol ( It is set to the probabilistic state or the latent state). That is, the V-passing switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probable change state of a special symbol. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low probability state or a probabilistic change state of the special symbol.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the longest. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 180, but in this control example, the switching member 65h is operated for 4 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow continuing to the V-passing switch 65e3. The game ball can pass through the road 65e2.

In this way, based on the fact that the game ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected by the detection opening 65a1 in the variable winning device 65, the prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (for one ball winning in this control example). You can pay out 15 prize balls). Further, by using the game ball after being detected by the detection port 65a1 and configuring it so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V-passing switch 65e3, whether or not to give a probable change state of the special symbol. You can also run a lottery. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving a probable change state of the special symbol separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k at the jackpot of 1 and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. In this control example, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the big hit is changed according to the big hit type, so that the ease of flowing the ball to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is changed. In this control example, two types of patterns (a pattern in which it is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 180 is a diagram schematically showing the timed change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 180 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the start of one round of jackpot. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 179 (a)). This off state continues until the start of one round. Then, when the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for only 4 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 179 (a)). When the 4-second on state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again (normally set to the state where the ball can flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1), and thereafter it is in the off state until the jackpot ends. It is kept in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), in the case of a jackpot C, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. This open state lasts only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept in the closed state until the elapsed time from the start of one round is 2.9 seconds. Then, when 2.9 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again. This open state lasts for only 0.1 seconds, after which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept in the closed state until one round ends and two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. The 1st round in this control example ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 1st round. It is very difficult to get the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds and the opening period of 0.1 seconds, so if you get a big hit C, basically , The big hit ends because the ball cannot flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player as compared with other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3. Can be transferred to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is jackpot C, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the probability variation state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), when any of the jackpots A, B, D to G is obtained, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started. That is, an opening / closing pattern is set in which it is easy to allow the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Therefore, by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 3 seconds, which is longer than that of the jackpot C, the V-passing switch 65e3 can be easily passed. Therefore, in the case of jackpots A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol.

The on period of the flow path solenoid 65k is longer than the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for 1 second because the ball reaches the special discharge flow path 65e2 after entering the specific winning opening 65a. This is because it takes a maximum of 1 second. That is, even if a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the first round of the jackpot flows down in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V passage switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot, a probable change state of the special symbol can be given after the jackpot regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

As described above, in this control example, the ease of transition to the probabilistic state is different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an opening / closing pattern that makes it easy to shift to the probable change state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed, so that the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. This is because when a left-handed hit is made, it becomes easier to enter the first ball entry port 64. As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is held endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It will be in a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit occurs. As the jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, four types of jackpots A to D are provided. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 (a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 181, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), after the jackpot ends, FIG. It shifts to the probability change game state ST2 (probability change state) shown in the center of. Further, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when the jackpot is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot is determined at a rate of 58% in total, the jackpot B or D is determined, and after the jackpot is completed, FIG. It shifts to the latent probability change game state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

As described above, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the game efficiency when right-handed is increased, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long, so that the game efficiency when right-handed is performed is extremely lowered, and the game state is disadvantageous compared to the latent state. .. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the jackpots B and D will be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous latent state.

In the normal state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. Or, as a result of a part of the ball hit to the left entering the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that a big hit will be obtained in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, it is common to all jackpot types (big hits E to G), and after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the probabilistic game state ST2 (probability change state). If a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hits B and D), while the second in the normal state. If a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Further, as described above, even when the jackpots are A, B, D to G, if the ball cannot be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot. , The game state after the big hit is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (loop the normal state). On the other hand, even in the case of the most unfavorable jackpot C, if the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous latent state.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probabilistic state will be described. As described above, in the probabilistic state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed as in the normal state, so the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. Will be. In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, so that it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. In the probabilistic game state ST2 (probable change state), if it becomes a big hit or if it is continuously out of the lottery for a specified number of times (120 times) after the probable change state, it will move to another game state. Transition.

Specifically, as shown in the central part of FIG. 181, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the left side of FIG. 181 after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) shown in. On the other hand, if either the jackpot B or D, which is determined at a total rate of 58% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability change game state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. It shifts to (latent state). On the other hand, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability change state is set again after the end of the jackpot (loops the probability change state). .. Further, in the probable change state, if the lottery of the special symbol of the specified number of times (120 times) is continuously lost, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times elapses.

In the probabilistic state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting the left as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the second special There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery of symbols. In this case, the probability change game state ST2 (probability change state) is looped after the end of the jackpot, which is common to all jackpot types (big hits E to G). If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable state, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hits B, D) as in the normal state. If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, the possibility of shifting to the advantageous latent probable state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability change state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game by hitting right. .. Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed. In the latent probability change game state ST3 (latent probability state), if the player is continuously out of the lottery for a specified number of times (120 times) after the latent probability state is reached, the game shifts to another game state. do.

Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 181. It shifts to the game state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit is achieved in the latent state where the game is played by right-handed (the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), after the big hit, it is basically specified (during the big hit). (If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 65a), the latent probability changing game state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the big hit is completed. For this reason, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before it loses 120 times in a row, the advantageous latent state and the jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls are repeated. It will be a very advantageous gaming state for the player. Although the details will be described later, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. Since the probability of losing 120 times in a row in the 1/80 jackpot lottery is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), the percentage of jackpots within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Therefore, once the latent state is reached, the jackpot and the latent state loop at about 78%, which is an extremely advantageous state.

In addition, since it is normal to play the game by hitting right in the latent state, basically, the ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed. , If the player makes a mistake in the launching direction, or if the player shifts to the latent state with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining in the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed even in the latent state. A lottery may be run. If it becomes a big hit in this case, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot C (distribution 10%) is reached in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the normal state is entered after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the big hits A, B, and D are obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent state is set again even after the big hit.

In addition, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the latent state is set even after the end of the jackpot A because of the reserved ball of the first special symbol accumulated before the transition to the latent state. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous probabilistic state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and a big hit is obtained. Immediately after shifting to the latent state, the reserved 1st special symbol lottery is performed and it becomes a big hit, and if it shifts to the probabilistic state, it will be in a disadvantageous state without benefiting from the latent state. Since it falls, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered. On the other hand, in this first control example, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous latent state, the ratio of looping the latent probability state after the big hit is higher than that in the normal state or the probable change state. Is set. As a result, even if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the advantageous latent state, the latent state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 189. FIG. 182 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 182 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbols that imitate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is completed. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variablely displayed, and the rest. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling in the left-right direction with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward-sloping diagonal line and the upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol in this control example) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 1640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed (see FIG. 186). ). It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 1640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the ball corresponds to the new ball entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. In this control example, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 while the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol was performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently suspended. In this control example, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored on hold. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probable change state. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, variation display of three third symbols having a simple aspect composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. It should be noted that the display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in a simpler manner than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically displayed in the normal state and the probable change state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed. Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed, to be displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the variable display of the first special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a main variation, and in each game state. The variable display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the variable display of the second special symbol is applicable) is called a sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved ball, the reserved symbol is executed to enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 may be configured to be holdable. Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 (a) and 183 (b), the variation display effect (variation pattern effect) of the third symbol in this control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are changing in the variable display effect. When each symbol row is changing, each symbol row is scrolled from the right side to the left side of the screen (variable display). By executing the variable display, the player can easily recognize that the lottery of the special symbol has been newly executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the stop symbol of the jackpot will be obtained after the end of the variable display effect (the main symbols with the same numbers are aligned with any of the effective lines V1 to V5).

FIG. 183 (b) shows an example of the display content when a reach effect that suggests to the player that the stop symbol of the jackpot is likely to be stopped and displayed occurs in the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is a figure.

Here, the reach means that the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variablely displayed, and on any of the effective lines V1 to V5. It is an embodiment which indicates a state in which the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed, and suggests that the main symbols with the same number are a chance to be aligned on the effective line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 183 (b), two main symbols with the number "1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line V4, and the number "2" is attached on the effective line V5. It shows a state in which two main symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, the main symbol with the number "1" or "2" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle symbol row L2, so that it becomes a big hit stop symbol. You can expect it to be.

When the upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed and reach occurs, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the changing middle symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 183 (b). .. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it can be expected that the stop symbol of the jackpot will be stopped and displayed at the end of the variation effect in which the reach has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, a special reach effect, which is a kind of reach effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, will be described. In this special reach effect, after all the symbol columns L1 to L3 are once executed as if they were stopped and displayed with a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the detachment (temporary stop effect), what are the symbol columns L1 to L3? Reach in a special mode in which a different symbol string is newly displayed, and a reach occurs between the newly displayed symbol sequence and a part (two) of the stopped displayed symbol rows L1 to L3. It is a production. This special reach effect is selected as part of the reach effect, and is set so that the expectation that it will be a big hit is higher than the normal reach effect (it will be difficult to select if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order). There is.

As shown in FIG. 184 (a), when the special reach effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with a stop symbol that is out of reach without being accompanied by reach. In this case, when another symbol row exists above the upper symbol row L1, the stop symbol of the combination that reaches the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed. To. In the example of FIG. 184 (a), the main symbol with the number "1" is displayed in the middle row of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. That is, if there is a symbol row further above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol "1" on the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number "1" is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are aligned in a straight line. In addition, as the mode of temporary stop in the special reach effect, there are a plurality of modes other than the mode in which the main symbols having the same number are arranged in the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and in the middle row of the middle symbol row L2. Is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols having the same numbers on the left side, the middle row, and the right side are arranged in the vertical direction, or the middle row and the middle symbol of the upper symbol row L1. There is also a mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers on the right side of the column L2 are lined up in an upward-sloping manner.

In the special reach effect, after the third symbol of each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), each third symbol displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2. Of the symbols, the main symbol changes to look up. By changing the aspect, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the current variable display effect has not been completed.

After each main symbol is changed to look up, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted toward the upward direction (upward) of each main symbol. Is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of this screen is performed, a new symbol sequence L4 that is changing is displayed at the shifted destination (a new symbol sequence L4 is framed in). Along with this, the lower symbol string L4 is framed out from the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when a new symbol row L4 appears (frames in), the new symbol row L4 and the "1" displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are displayed. The reach state is composed of the main symbol with a number and the main symbol with the number "1" displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol with reach (the main symbol with the number "1") has been changed to a mode that wears an aura, and the letters "reach!" Is displayed. As a result, if the main symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed on the right side when the fluctuation of the new symbol string L4 is stopped, the main symbol with the same number is attached on the new effective line V6. Since there are three (it becomes a stop symbol of the jackpot), it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that it is a chance to become a jackpot.

As described above, in the first control example, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of being off. ing. This makes it possible to confirm the combination of stop symbols in the hope that it will develop into a special reach effect even when the stop display is displayed due to a combination that is out of alignment. That is, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols by paying attention to whether the combination of the stop symbols that can develop into the special reach effect (the combination that becomes the reach when the new symbol sequence L4 is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to expect the development of a special reach effect each time the variable display is stopped and displayed in a combination of deviations, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, when the special reach effect is executed, the new symbol string L4 is displayed on the upper side of the upper symbol string L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. Further, for example, a new symbol string L4 may be displayed between the symbol rows. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4 form a reach. May be good. Further, in the first control example, when a new symbol string L4 is displayed, the lower symbol string L3 is deleted, so that the number of symbol strings displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Since the type of the displayed symbol string is changed, the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach effect and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach effect can be unified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol sequence L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in the normal state or the probable change state. If there is no hold of the first special symbol (when the number of reserved balls is 0), the combination of the third symbol at the time of suspension of fluctuation is 30 seconds unless the ball enters the first entry port 64. Continues to be displayed across. Then, after 30 seconds have elapsed, the screen switches to the customer waiting demo screen shown in FIG. 186 (b). In the example of FIG. 186 (b), a movie in which the sun sets on the mountain is displayed as a customer waiting demo screen. In this movie, the display content changes with the passage of time, and for example, the display content is such that three birds pass in front of the mountain as shown in FIG. 186 (c) according to the elapsed time. By switching to this customer waiting demo screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not the game is vacant. When the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is simplified and displayed (only with numbers) in the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), in the normal state or the probable change state, the variation display (sub-variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. Is started, or the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the customer waiting demo screen is displayed even when 30 seconds have passed with only the sub-variation being executed. It is configured to be done. As described above, in the normal state and the probable change state, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to be extremely long (600 seconds), it is configured that the game efficiency is improved by hitting the left side rather than hitting the right side. .. For this reason, when the player accidentally hits the right in the normal state or the probable change state, and the player quits the game immediately after the change display (secondary change) of the second special symbol is started. Will continue to execute the sub-variation for about 600 seconds. Under this circumstance, if the specification is such that the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed during the execution of the sub-variation, the third symbol display device 81 is used even though no one is playing for a maximum of about 600 seconds. There is a risk that the displayed content will appear as if the game is in progress. Therefore, other players may hesitate to start the game on the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-variation is completed, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

On the other hand, in the first control example, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the main fluctuation, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen regardless of whether or not the sub-variation is being executed. Then, this customer waiting demo screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main variation is started) regardless of whether or not the sub-variation is being executed. There is. With this configuration, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the fluctuation display for 600 seconds is started, it takes about 30 seconds. Later, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty stand, the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. In this first control example, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the demo display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed. The stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in substantially the same size, but for example, the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the sub-variation. It may be displayed. Further, in the display screen shown in FIG. 186 (b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the center. The special symbol of the above may be stopped and displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side of the sub-variation may be stopped and displayed at the center of the display screen. As a result, regardless of the game state, the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation can be easily grasped only by checking the specific portion of the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the first control example, the latent probability state is set as the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect different from the normal variable display (an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the latent state, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Then, the variation display (secondary variation in the latent state) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed in the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (main fluctuation in the latent state) is displayed in the upper right of the screen. As described above, in the latent state, it is a regular game method to aim at the second entrance 1640 by hitting right, so the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. Is displayed in a larger display area than the variable display (sub-variable) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that becomes the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that becomes the sub-variation is the second special. Even if the symbol is changed to the first special symbol, the area where the sub-variation is displayed is configured so as not to be changed from the center of the upper part of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, at least a part of the data for executing the display (variation display or demo display) related to the sub-variation can be shared and used.

In addition, the character "right-handed" is displayed below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. By displaying this character, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that right-handed is a regular game method.

Further, in the remaining number display area D1 displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm, a guideline for the remaining number of times in the latent state (a guideline for the number of lottery until the transition to the normal state) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 187 (a), "40 times remaining" is displayed, and if the lottery of the special symbol is missed 40 times in a row, the player may shift to the normal state. Suggests to. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of continuations of the latent state when the other gaming state (normal state or probable change state) is first transitioned to the latent state. It is displayed, and the value is subtracted and displayed by 1 in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this control example, even if a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the number of times before the big hit is continuously displayed even after the big hit is completed without resetting the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. That is, when it becomes a big hit, the number of times displayed and the actual number of remaining times deviate from each other). If the player keeps hitting right according to the displayed instruction (character of "right hit"), the ball can be passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it can be done, 120 new latent states are set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a big hit occurs during the latent probability state, the number of times the latent probability state actually continues is larger than the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. The details will be described later, but the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is the remaining number of times on the display when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0. Is added (added) to (see FIG. 189). As a result, even if the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0.

As mentioned above, it is easy to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, so even if the opening / closing plate 65f1 is movable (variable) in the open state, it may be possible to move by winning the big hit. It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won and moved. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the same regardless of whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit. Specifically, even if a big hit or a small hit occurs, the character 811 remains in the display mode in which the character 811 runs during the big hit or the small hit, so that the third symbol display device 81 becomes a big hit from the appearance. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or a small hit. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of times on the display is set to 0. If this happens, it can be difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be added and displayed. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the remaining number of times will be added and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

As described above, the variable winning device 65 and the second ball opening 1640 are both arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter by hitting right, so that the jackpot and the small hit are displayed. Even if the mode is the same as that during the change of the third symbol or the stop display of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from acquiring and missing the prize ball of the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0 without causing a loss to the player, it is possible to more strongly expect that the number of times is added and displayed.

FIG. 187 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is completed within 30 seconds. In this case, the same display mode as during the change (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs) is displayed except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in this first control example, the function of holding the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not provided, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (0.5 seconds) in the latent state. Therefore, the frequency of the fluctuation stop state becomes extremely high. Under this circumstance, if the display mode is configured to be different (switched) between when the symbol is changing and when the movement is stopped, the display mode is frequently switched, which may confuse the player. Further, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 may increase.

Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the main display area Dm is standardized between the variable display of the symbol and the stop display. As a result, it is possible to suppress frequent switching of the display mode, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused. In addition, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when 30 seconds have elapsed in the latent probability state, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is switched to the display mode (demonstration display for latent probability) in which the character 811 is stopped. By switching the display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation stop state has continued for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the variable stop state was reached in the latent probability state, a screen different from the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 186 (b)) (demo display for latent probability) is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize that the current gaming state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing a game in a latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, the trouble that another player starts the game on the pachinko machine 10 is prevented (suppressed). can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and it is unlikely that the player will quit the game during the latent state. Therefore, the player who is playing the game is only temporarily away from his / her seat. This is because it can be recognized by other players.

Further, in the latent state in the first control example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short. Therefore, when the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187 (b)) is displayed, the second input is performed thereafter. When the ball enters the ball opening 1640 and it takes time to switch the screen, there is a possibility that the fluctuation time ends before the effect accompanying the entry is displayed. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may feel distrust that the effect is not executed even though the ball has entered the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, in this control example, instead of the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187 (b)) in the latent state, the same character 811 as during the fluctuation is continuously displayed for the latent probability demo display (FIG. 187 (c)). Since it is configured to perform (see), the display mode (effect mode) can be smoothly switched when a ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is detected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (a), the latent state end screen displayed when the latent state ends will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state end screen is displayed when the number of remaining lottery in the latent state becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit switches to the mode of falling to the ground, and on the upper side of the character 811, "Return to end left-handed." The display area 812 in which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the advantageous latent state has ended. Further, on the right side of the character 811, the characters "return to left-handed" are displayed. With this display, it is possible to make the player more surely return to the left-handed strike. It should be noted that this latent state end screen detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 and the fluctuation display is started, or the first special symbol is changed and stopped after the latent state is completed. It will continue to be displayed until 30 seconds have passed. Then, when any of these two conditions is satisfied, the prize ball acquired during the latent state and the result screen showing the total number of times the latent state has continued are displayed. The details of this result screen will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b).

FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is first detected and the variation display of the first special symbol is started after the latent state is completed, the variation thereof. A result screen showing the result of the latent state is displayed using time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), the character "456GAME" is displayed as the number of times the latent state has continued (the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the latent state), and the number of times the latent state has continued. Below the character indicating, the character "10030 points earned!" Is displayed, which indicates the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the normal state without questioning the finished latent state. In addition, by displaying the result screen after the end of each latent state, the player can be made to play the game aiming at a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the result (result) of the latent state during the latent state, it is configured to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display that is executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for an extremely short time. On the other hand, in this first control example, after the end of the latent state, the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first, so that the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to make the player more surely confirm the result of the latent probability state, two special symbols are drawn after the latent probability state is completed. A fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the result display can be performed each time within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can more reliably confirm the result display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the latent state was completed, no entry into the first entry port 64 was detected (the variation display of the first special symbol was not started). , The result is displayed instead of the customer waiting demo screen. The result display in this case continues to be displayed until the variation display of the first special symbol, which is executed when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is first detected, is completed. As a result, even a player who has left the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like immediately after the latent state is completed can surely confirm the result of the latent state.

In this first control example, the result is not displayed until the variation display of the first special symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. Then, the display may be continued until the variable display of the first first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the finished latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entry port 64 after the player returns to the left-handed strike, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

Further, when displaying the result of the latent state immediately after the latent state ends, a measuring means for measuring the period after the latent state ends is provided, and the measuring means provides a predetermined period (for example, 12). The result may be displayed until the elapse of seconds). In this case, if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started by the lapse of the predetermined period, the result is continuously displayed until the fluctuation is completed, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. In that case, it may be configured to execute a normal display other than a result display in the fluctuation.

Further, when the change of the first special symbol for displaying the result in the latent state is won, the display mode of the result may be changed. For example, it is preferable to display "10030 points or more !!" as a suggestion display suggesting that the user has won the normal result display screen displayed in FIG. 188 (b). In this way, by displaying the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol using the result content of the latent state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display of the latent state and the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol without discomfort. .. Also, if you win a big hit during the period when the result display of the latent state is executed and you move to the latent state again, you can configure it so that the result contents in the previous latent state are inherited and updated. good. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game during the period in which the result display in the latent state is being executed.

In addition, as an effect during the latent state, a display similar to the display screen of the result of the latent state displayed after the end of the latent state is used by using the period of one special symbol change or multiple special symbol changes. An effect in which the screen is displayed (pseudo-end effect) may be used. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and even when the latent state is actually terminated and the result display of the latent state is executed, the latent state is continued for the player. You will be able to expect that.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a revival effect, which is a kind of effect executed during the latent state, will be described. This revival effect is an effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lottery times in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes 0. More specifically, when the remaining number of times in the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining number of lottery on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number is added to the remaining number on the display. It is a production to be displayed.

When this revival effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes 0 times, as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 188 (a)) is displayed. , The effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the character 811 that has once fallen to the ground stands up, and the characters "Resurrection" are displayed around the character 811. By executing the effect of this aspect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advantageous latent state continues, so that the player can be pleased. Further, as the effect of raising the character 811 is performed, the actual number of remaining latent states is displayed in addition to the remaining number of times display area D1. FIG. 189 illustrates a case where the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to the content of "remaining 10 times" because the actual number of remaining latent states remains 10 times.

As described above, in this first control example, when the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the latent state and the remaining number of times (actual remaining number) of the latent state is updated to 120 times, the remaining number is left. The configuration is such that the display content of the big hit is inherited without resetting the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area D1 (the remaining number of times on the display). Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, and the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the difference from the actual remaining number of times is added and notified. It is configured to execute the production. With this configuration, even when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the revival effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the latent state.

In this control example, the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent state and the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed in the revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the revival effect to be executed first, a value smaller than the difference may be added and displayed, and once the revival effect is executed, the revival effect may be executed a plurality of times. As a result, if the resurrection effect is first executed in the latent state of 1, it is confirmed that the resurrection effect will be executed even if the remaining number of times added by the resurrection effect ends, so that the resurrection effect is executed next. You can play the game with confidence until the production is performed. In addition, it is possible to have the game performed looking forward to how many times the revival production will be performed. Further, when this resurrection effect is executed, it is preferable to execute the result display displayed when the latent state is completed, and then execute the resurrection effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 207, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 190) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 227). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter value is stored for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second entrance 1640 for winning the prize for the first entrance 64. A second special symbol execution area 203b to be stored is provided. In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls are provided in the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value becomes the second. 1 It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins in the second entry slot 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64. When the number of reserved balls in the first ball entry port 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this control example) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize ball (5 pieces in this embodiment) is not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, when the ball wins the second entrance 1640 during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In, only the prize balls (five prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for the first ball entry port 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3). It may be more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used. Further, in this control example, the ball entering the second ball opening 1640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but the holding storage is possible as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 190. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 192 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is defined by the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 192 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (a). The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "0 to 5". If it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), the lottery for the first special symbol does not specify a random number value as a small hit. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the gaming state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 8" is the first hit as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 2, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 5" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 190. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 (a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 193 (b)). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 (b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 227) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 194 to 196). A plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the variation pattern selection tables according to the winning / failing determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and the ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 192 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (c).

FIG. 192 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 231 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 230". .. Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 231. Therefore, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "231/240".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random value values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 232, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/240". As described above, in this control example, since the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol differs only by one between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probabilities are almost the same. There is. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entry port 1640 when the normal symbol hits are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entry port 1640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the probabilistic state is extremely longer (to 600 seconds) than the fluctuation time in the latent state. As a result, in the normal state or the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes more difficult to be executed than in the latent probable state. Can be done.

When the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 230", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. (See FIG. 197) is specified in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 197.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 208). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 197. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal map variation pattern selection table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (a). The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 31". .. This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 32 counter values are "big hit A", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 32% (32/100).

In addition, when it becomes "big hit A", whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given depends on the game state at the time when "big hit A" is won and whether the V passing switch 65e3 is passed during the big hit. It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), if the "big hit A" is obtained in the normal state and the probable change state, and the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, at the end of the big hit. The number of time reductions of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V-passing switch e3 is not passed during the jackpot, or when the jackpot is hit in the latent state and the V-passing switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot), the time reduction number is not set. (Set to 0 times). Therefore, when the "big hit A" is reached in the normal state or the probable change state, in many cases, the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change number of 120 times and the time reduction number of 120 times are set. The game state after the big hit becomes a probable change state. On the other hand, when the hit is "big hit A" in the latent state, the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change number of 120 times (and the time reduction number of 0 times) is set, and the game state after the big hit. Becomes a latent state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 because the player did not launch the ball during the jackpot, the normal state most disadvantageous to the player is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. To.

"Big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Is set (a favorable latent state is not given), which is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big hit. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit A" in the latent state, it basically loops in the latent state even after the big hit ends, so that it is one of the most advantageous big hit types for the player in the latent state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "32 to 80", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" has 7 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. In addition, after the end of "big hit B", the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of "big hit B", the latent probability state (probability change number 120 times, time reduction number 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit B" is 48, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 48% (48/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the fewest number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but if the balls are launched toward the variable winning device 65 during the big hit (right-handed) ), It shifts to a latent state that is advantageous to the player regardless of the game state, which is advantageous in terms of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. ..

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "81 to 90", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has 7 rounds, and as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 180 (b)) that makes it difficult to pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 is set in the first round of the jackpot. To. Further, after the end of "big hit C", the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of "big hit C", the normal state (both the number of probability changes and the number of time reductions is 0) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit C" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Big hit C" is the most disadvantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the smallest and the normal state that is basically the most disadvantageous is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the game state at the time of winning. be. Although the possibility is low, if the ball can be won into the specific winning opening 65a within a short time when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3. In this case, the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Further, after the end of the "big hit D", the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "big hit D", the latent probability state (probability change number 120 times, time reduction number 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Big hit D" has the largest number of rounds, and basically the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so the most advantageous big hit type for the player. one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. ..

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79". This "big hit E" has 7 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easy) passing through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as "Big hit A". That is, it becomes "big hit E" in the normal state or the probable change state, and when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the time reduction number of 120 times is set, and the game state after the big hit becomes the probable change state. .. Also, if you win the "big hit E" in the latent state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so the game state after the big hit is the latent state. Becomes (loops the latent state). Further, when the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so that the gaming state after the big hit becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit E" is 80, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

This "big hit E" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and when it becomes "big hit E" in the latent state, it basically loops in the latent state even after the big hit, so it is a game state after the big hit. Is in the player's favor.

In addition, it is anomalous that it always hits right even in the normal state or the probable change state because it becomes "big hit E" in the normal state or the probable change state and shifts to the probable change state when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3. This is to suppress various game methods. That is, even if the "big hit E" is set in the normal state or the probability change state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the normal state is expected to shift to the advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player may perform an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (right-handed) even in the probabilistic state. Therefore, in this control example, the jackpot of the second special symbol (big hit E to G) is obtained in the normal state or the probable change state, and when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probable change state is set as the game state after the big hit. Is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the merit of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state or the probable change state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 95", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as "big hit A" and "big hit E". That is, when the "big hit F" is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 15 counter values are "big hit F", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

Although this "big hit F" has a large number of rounds, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other jackpot types. More specifically, in the 2nd to 15th rounds of the "big hit F", an opening / closing pattern (special opening / closing pattern) in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds is set. Since it is difficult to get the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in 0.06 seconds, it is difficult to win the prize ball in the 2nd to 15th rounds of "Big Hit F". In this way, when the "big hit F" is reached, the special opening / closing pattern is set by either a small hit or a "big hit F" when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state. This is to make it ambiguous. Although the details will be described later, the small hits in this control example are a small hit A in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened only once for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds) and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C that repeat the opening operation a plurality of times are provided. Therefore, by setting a special opening / closing pattern when the "big hit F" is obtained, the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be made similar to the case where the small hit B or the small hit C is obtained after the small hit A. can. As a result, it is difficult to identify whether the latent state has been reset 120 times by becoming a "big hit F" during the latent state, or whether the small hits have been won consecutively and the number of times has been subtracted. Can be done. Therefore, whether or not the number of remaining latent states on the display matches the actual number of remaining latent states (whether or not the latent state ends when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0). Since it can be difficult to distinguish from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0 times, the game is played with the expectation that the revival effect (see Fig. 189) will be performed and the remaining number of times on the display will be added and displayed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while the player is in a latent state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "95 to 99", "big hit G" is associated and defined. This "big hit G" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as "big hit A", "big hit E", and "big hit F". That is, when the "big hit G" is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, five counter values are "big hit G", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit G" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

This "big hit G" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and when it becomes "big hit G" in the latent state, it basically loops in the latent state even after the big hit, so it is a game state after the big hit. Is also advantageous to the player.

As described above, in this control example, when a left-handed player is hit in a normal state or a probable change state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a 58% ratio (big hit B, D) is an advantageous latent state. It is configured to move to. Then, when a right-handed hit is made in the latent state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, an advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits EG). Therefore, once the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set, the second special symbol lottery is performed by winning a prize in the second entrance 1640 by hitting right. It is easy to execute, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game for one purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 193 (b), "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state only for 1.648 seconds x 1 time during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 94 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "small hit A" Is determined at 94% (94/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "94 to 98", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 5% (5/100).

Further, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, one random value is "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

As described above, in this control example, the small hit game in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs the opening / closing operation once or a plurality of times is executed, triggered by the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol. This makes it difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is due to a big hit or a small hit when the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs an opening / closing operation in the latent state. Can be done. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol executed during the latent state has never been a big hit, the revival effect is performed when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display approaches 0. Can be expected. In this control example, the percentage of small hits when the second special symbol is drawn is about 46%. For this reason, in the 120 special symbol lottery set as the latent state, the small hit is won about 55 times. Therefore, since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened / closed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 194, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f includes the normal table A202f1 and the normal table B202f2 for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and the fluctuation pattern for determining the fluctuation pattern in the probability variation state. At least the probability variation table 202f3 and the latency table 202f4 for determining the fluctuation pattern in the latency state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table A202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 195. This normal table A is a table that is referred to when the game state is the normal state and the lottery of the special symbol other than twice is executed immediately after the end of the latent probability change state. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table A202f1. As shown in FIG. 195, the normal table A202f1 has a random number value (counter of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type of the special symbol. Value) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50". Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", and super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table A202f1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern is variable according to the number of reserved balls. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195, when the number of reserved balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 70" (10 seconds). The fluctuation pattern of is associated with the normal reach (20 seconds) out of the range of "71 to 150". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Has been done.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, a variation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation type. As the value of the counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of the long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 150", and the deviation normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". Has been done. The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A202f1 (see S307 of S210) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 210). It will be executed later. Therefore, the normal table A202f is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make the variable display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls because the fluctuation time is shortened. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table A202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the normal table B202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). The normal table B202f2 is a table that is referred to only when the gaming state is in the normal state and the number of lottery of the special symbol is within 2 times after the latent state is completed.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), when the normal table B202f2 is referred to, the same fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation after ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order ST change (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the first or second special symbol lottery after the latent state is completed is the first special symbol lottery, a variation time of 12 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. During this 12 seconds, the result display of the above-mentioned latent state (see FIG. 188 (b)) is performed. By selecting a fixed fluctuation time, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for displaying the result. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently confirm the result of the latent state to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), for the lottery of the second special symbol, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, as in the normal table A202f1. Since the contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned ordinary table A202f1 with reference to FIG. 195, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, after the end of the latent probability, not only the first special symbol lottery but also the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery, the variation time of 12 seconds is set. This is because there is a possibility that the ball will enter the second entry slot 1640 and the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed first between the end of the latent state and the return to the left strike. .. As in this control example, if the configuration is such that the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set even in the second special symbol lottery after the end of latency, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started first. Since the fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set by executing the lottery of the first special symbol after that, regardless of whether or not the lottery of the first special symbol is executed first, each time. The result can be displayed for the same time after the end of the latent state of. Further, in the latent state, it is conceivable that the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed twice in a row. However, as described above, when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the latent probability state ends (that is, when the main fluctuation is not started for 30 seconds), the result display is performed. It is composed. Therefore, even in this case, the result display can be performed for a sufficiently long time.

In addition, instead of displaying the result (result) of the latent state during the latent state, it is configured to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display that is executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for an extremely short time. On the other hand, in this first control example, after the end of the latent state, the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first, so that the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to make the player more surely confirm the result of the latent probability state, two special symbols are drawn after the latent probability state is completed. A fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the result display can be performed each time within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can more reliably confirm the result display.

In this control example, a fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display content of the result display to be executed is the first. It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, a display suggesting a win may be executed in addition to the display content of the result display. In addition, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol whose change is executed at the same time as the change of the first special symbol whose result display is executed based on the change of the first special symbol is won. In addition to the display content of the result display executed based on the change of the first special symbol, the display suggesting a hit may be executed. With this configuration, the game result in the latent state and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this control example, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed twice in succession after the latent probability state is completed, the result display is executed only for the first fluctuation. In the second variation, the variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game result in the latent state is excessively displayed and the variable display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

Further, since the probability variation table 202f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A202f1, it will be briefly described. However, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is the same as the normal table A202f1. Each fluctuation pattern (hit normal reach, hit super reach A to C) is selected by the selection ratio. Further, even when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the normal state. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time can be easily selected as compared with the normal state. This is because the jackpot probability increases in the probabilistic state, and if the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time frequently occurs despite the deviation, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the first control example, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed during the probability change state, the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time is easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time is set. The structure is such that the player is more strongly expected to be a big hit when selected.

Next, the details of the latency table 202f4 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). The latent probability table 202f4 is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b), the jackpot of the first special symbol is defined by associating the middle variation (60 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Has been done. Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation ultra-short fluctuation A (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the jackpot of the second special symbol is a super short variation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Is specified in association with each other, and the small hit ultra-short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 for the small hit of the second special symbol. The deviation of the second special symbol is defined by associating the deviation ultra-short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

In the latent state, the second special symbol is basically drawn, so the fluctuation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently (speedily) by hitting right in an advantageous latent state. Also, even if the lottery for the first special symbol is missed in the latent state, 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time, so for example, in a state where one or more hold of the first special symbol exists. When the player enters the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is the main fluctuation in the latent state, to play the game.

In addition, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, a relatively long fluctuation time (60 seconds) is set when the big hit of the first special symbol is made in the latent state. This is because there is a possibility that the latent state will end. Specifically, when the jackpot C is reached in the latent state, an opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 180 (b)) in which the ball does not easily pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 is set for the switching plate 65f1, so that the jackpot is basically a jackpot. The game state after the end becomes the normal state. When such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered. Therefore, in this control example, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, a relatively long fluctuation time is set, and a right-handed hit is performed during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the lottery of symbols can be executed multiple times. As mentioned above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won about once every two times (at about 46%), so the second special symbol is won before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. It is possible to end the small hit fluctuation of. As described above, in this control example, a simultaneous variation method capable of simultaneously executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol is adopted. In addition, if the fluctuation display of one special symbol is confirmed as a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit during simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. Regardless of the result, it will be forcibly stopped with the off symbol. Therefore, even during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot of the first special symbol can be discarded by first confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the small hit due to the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol, which may end the latent state, with a high probability, so that the player can enjoy the latent state more reliably. You can do it.

In this control example, 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent probability state, but the probability is small (for example, "1/199"). ) May be configured to select a long variation time (eg, 12 seconds). Further, when the long fluctuation time is selected, a result display showing the above-mentioned game result in the latent state (actually, the game result during the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player think that the latent state has ended during the latent state, and it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect, which is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern when a lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 197, in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are displayed for each game state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed. Is specified in association with.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time is 3 seconds with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2. Fluctuation patterns are associated. Further, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of "0 to 190", and the normal map fluctuation type counter. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second is associated with the range in which the value of CS2 is "191 to 198". When the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the time from the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol to the release of the electric accessory 1640a is predicted by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It can be difficult. Therefore, when a ball is launched one by one into the first through gate 66, the second through gate 66, or the second through gate 67, and the ball passes through any of the through gates, it is a normal symbol hit. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method of launching a ball by predicting the timing at which the electric accessory 1640a is released in the event that the electric accessory 1640a is released, and to continuously perform a right-handed strike during the latent state.

In the first control example, a plurality of variations of the fluctuation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probable change state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have variations.

Further, in this control example, when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, either 1 second or 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time is 2 types. However, it may be configured so that a larger fluctuation time can be selected. The more variation there is in the fluctuation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a continuous right-handed strike more reliably during the latent state.

Further, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. You may use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is set by a method in which the above-mentioned various configurations are combined. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and after that (51). (From times to 120 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In addition, while the lottery for the even number of special symbols is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number), It may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring to change the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make a continuous right-handed hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed) when the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, or the special symbol is configured to be longer. It may be configured so that the smaller the number of lottery pending and stored, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the easier it is to select. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is hard to be accumulated, and the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is easy to be accumulated. It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 198, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, V winning flag 203f, time saving counter 203g, winning counter 203h, special figure 1 standby flag 203i, special figure 2 standby flag 203j, probability variation counter 203k, jackpot flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small hit It has at least a flag 203o, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, a look-ahead hold storage area 203r, a special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s, a special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t, a big hit medium flag 203u, a small hit medium flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these is held. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second ball entry port 1640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (ordinary symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another hold area as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into a holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37,) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1504 in FIG. 222). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 210).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 of FIG. 210, FIG. 222). See S1505). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a reserved ball for variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts the number (waiting count) up to 4 times. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. Each time the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1605 in FIG. 223).

When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second The value of the winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly added to the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Not stored (see S1703: No in FIG. 224).

The V winning flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the big hit game to the probabilistic state. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179 (b)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203f is set to ON (see S2410 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, the V winning flag 203f is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230). The V winning flag 203f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the V winning flag 203f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the V passing switch has passed, the V winning flag has been passed. The flag 203f may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the V-passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passing counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the V winning flag 203f is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. The time saving counter 203g is set to 120 when one of the jackpots A and E to G is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the V winning flag 203f is turned on at the end of the jackpot game. Further, the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S607 in FIG. 213). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability time. (See S1610 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability time (see S1611 in FIG. 223).

The winning counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a in each round of big hits. When the value of the winning counter 203h becomes 5, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2406 in FIG. 231). In each round of big hits, even if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5, the round is ended when the round period set for each round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203h is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the valid period of the jackpot round. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

The special figure 1 standby flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in the variable stop state. If the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in the variable stop state, and if it is off, the first special symbol is changing or the first special symbol is on hold. It means that it is the state just before the start of the fluctuation display based on the sphere. The special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to on when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls is 0 (see S311 in FIG. 210). On the other hand, when the fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set, it is set to off (see S309 in FIG. 210).

The special figure 2 standby flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable stop state. If the special figure 1 standby flag 203j is on, it means that the second special symbol is in the variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is changing. This special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to on when the second special symbol is not changing and the start winning prize for the second ball entrance 1640 is not detected (see S809 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is set, it is set to off (see S807 in FIG. 215).

The probability variation counter 203k is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (special) of the special symbol. It indicates that it is a low probability state of the symbol).

The initial value of the probability variation counter 203k is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2304 in FIG. 230). Further, in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by 1 (FIG. 213). See S602). Further, the value of the probability variation counter 203k is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). The probability variation counter 203k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216). (See S402 in FIG. 211 and S902 in FIG. 216).

The jackpot flag 203m is determined to match the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 1640 to the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. In this case, it is a flag set to on (see S406 in FIG. 211 and S906 in FIG. 216). This jackpot flag 203m is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). A 2-bit storage area is allocated to the jackpot flag 203m, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bits and the information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is "10B", it means that the lottery of the first special symbol is a jackpot, and that the lottery result is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "01B", it means that the lottery of the second special symbol is a jackpot and the variable display indicating the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot fluctuation is not executed.

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the on is completed while the jackpot flag 203m is on, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the off symbol is executed (S705 in FIG. 214, FIG. 220). S1306). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the values of the time saving counter 203g and the probability variation counter 203k are both 0), the normal state is shown in the winning state storage area 203n. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic state (if the values of the time saving counter 203g and the probabilistic counter 203k are both 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203n is used as information indicating the probable change state. "01H" is stored. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more), the latent state is hidden in the winning state storage area 203n. "02H" is stored as information indicating a certain state.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203n is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the time-saving game after the jackpot ends (see S2301 in FIG. 230). As described above, when the jackpots are A, E to G and the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot differs depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state. I'm letting you. In this control example, information corresponding to the game state at the time of big hit winning is stored in the winning state storage area 203n, and by referring to it at the end of the big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type and the game state at the time of big hit winning. An appropriate gaming state can be set.

The small hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1002 in FIG. 217). The small hit flag 203o is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1405 in FIG. 220). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203o turned on, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 221). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even if there is a new entry to the second entry opening 1640. (See S801: Yes in FIG. 215). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S703 in FIG. 214), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If so, it is set to off (S811 in FIG. 215).

The look-ahead hold storage area 203r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted before the timing when the original special symbol lottery is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, immediately after the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired special symbols is drawn separately. From the counter value, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated). In this way, predicting various information obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead". In the look-ahead hold storage area 203r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning prize for the first ball opening 64, the look-ahead result based on the counter value (the result of winning / failing the lottery of the special symbol, in the case of a big hit). The jackpot type and fluctuation pattern) are stored. Further, in the look-ahead hold storage area 203r, the same number of look-ahead results as the number of hold balls (that is, a maximum of 4) can be stored.

The special figure 1 variable timer 203s and the special figure 2 variable timer 203t are timers for measuring the variable time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the timers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When a variation pattern is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 variable timer 203s and the special figure 2 variable timer 203t (see S701 in FIG. 214 and S1301 in FIG. 220).

The jackpot middle flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203u is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set (see S709 in FIG. 214 and S1310 in FIG. 220). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230).

The small hit medium flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203v is set to on when the start of small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 202 and the flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 181 can be realized.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200. FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a screen display selection table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) is shown. ), It is used to determine the content of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110. The mode of the special reach effect described above (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is also defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, and the fluctuation content indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is a hit super reach A or a missed super reach A. It is selected in some cases.

The screen display selection table 222b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have elapsed from the state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. As described above, in this control example, the simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted, and even if one special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state, the situation that the other special symbol is changing frequently occurs. Further, depending on the game state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, or the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol that should be noticed by the player is switched. The screen display selection table 222b is referred to in order to appropriately display the variation display of the main symbol in each gaming state and to set the demo display corresponding to the gaming state in the state where the main variation is stopped. The details of the screen display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 200.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the screen display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 200, the screen display selection table 222b is associated with the combination of the game state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, and the third symbol display device. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the 81 is specified. The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t indicate whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol were in the variable stop state, respectively. It is a flag to indicate. When each flag is on, it indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed, and when it is off, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is being displayed, or the fluctuation is stopped for a predetermined time ( 30 seconds) or less.

As shown in FIG. 200, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probable change state, the display content (screen display type) is displayed for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. ) Is specified as normal display. In this normal display, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in a normal mode (see FIG. 182 (b)). It is the display content. In the normal state, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation. Therefore, by setting the normal display, the main fluctuation can be surely displayed.

In the normal state or the probabilistic state, the demo display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. When this demo display is determined, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 186 (b) and (c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, is completed, the demo display (customer waiting demo screen) is switched to regardless of whether the sub change is being executed or not. Therefore, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the fluctuation display for 600 seconds is started, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, since it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty stand, the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

A demo display is also associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are off in the normal state or the probable change state. Therefore, in this case as well, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 186 (b) and (c)) is set. This makes it possible for other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the special display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. This special display means the above-mentioned latent probability demo display (see FIG. 187 (c)), and a demo display in a special mode in which the same character 811 as during fluctuation is continuously displayed is set. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be smoothly switched. The special display is also set when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both turned on. That is, regardless of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the latent state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main fluctuation was in the fluctuation stop state, the special display is displayed. Set.

In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. Therefore, in the latent state, even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special symbol was in the variable stop state, the variable display or the stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed as usual.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, state setting area 223i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, special figure 1 standby counter 223k, and sub special figure 2 Stand-by flag 223m, special figure 2 standby counter 223n, remaining probability variation number area 223o, effect probability variation number area 223p, remaining time reduction number area 223q, special figure 1 standby flag 223s, special figure 2 standby flag 223t. And other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball opening 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired in response to the starting winning prize, From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c sets the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. It is designed to be managed for each type of.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 238). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4304 and S4307 in FIG. 238) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4702 and S4706 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4401 in FIG. 239), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4710 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 236) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The state setting area 223i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received, the state setting area 223i is updated with information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command (S4011, FIG. 235, FIG. 240 S4506). More specifically, the state setting area 223i is allocated with a 2-bit storage area, and whether or not it is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and whether or not it is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol are determined in order from the high-order bit. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223i is "11B", it means that the special symbol is in the probable change state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, the probable change state), and if it is "10B", it is special. It means that the symbol is in a probable change state and is in a normal state (that is, a latent state) of a normal symbol. On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is in a normal state.

By updating the state setting area 223i in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j and the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in the variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that it is in the variable state. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j of the main control device 110.

The special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n are counters for counting the elapsed time since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. Of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol that is the main fluctuation in the current gaming state becomes the value corresponding to 30 seconds, the game is played. Demonstration effects are set according to the state (see S4211 in FIG. 237).

The remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining time reduction frequency area 223q are storage areas for storing the remaining number of times of the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, respectively. The remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining time reduction frequency area 223q are notified by the residual probability variation number command and the remaining time reduction count command output each time the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g are updated in the main control device 110, respectively. It is updated to the number of times (see S4652 and S4662 in FIG. 242). As a result, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining time reduction frequency area 223q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110, so that the voice lamp control device can be updated. The remaining number of probability changes and the number of time reductions grasped by 113 can be matched with the actual number of probability changes and the number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The effect probability variation number area 223p is a storage area for storing a guideline for the remaining number of times in the latent probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent probability state. In this effect probability variation number area 223p, 120 is set when shifting from another gaming state to the latent probability state (see S4505 in FIG. 240). Further, the value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is changed in the latent state (see S4657 in FIG. 242).

The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively, and if they are on, they are flags. It indicates that the fluctuation stop state of the corresponding special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is changing or is within 3 seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. These special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on when the count values of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n correspond to 30 seconds, respectively. It is set (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237).

The standby set flag 223u is demo-produced with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) as 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol was entered. (See FIGS. 186 (b), (c), and 187 (c)) This is a flag indicating whether or not the screen display is set. This standby set flag 223u is set to ON when the screen display is newly set by referring to the screen display selection table 223b in the customer waiting effect processing (see FIG. 237) (see S4212 in FIG. 237). ). Further, when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is newly set to ON (see S4204 and S4208 of FIG. 237), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 When the standby flag 223t is newly set to off, the standby set flag 223u is set to off.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power cutoff flag 223y receives the power cutoff command from the main controller 110 and is set to on before the power cutoff process is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 236). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 235), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 235). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, the NOR type ROM 234d is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 244).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 202. In FIG. 202, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 202 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 202 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 202 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, the player started the game while the main image when the power was turned on was displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball was detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 202 (b) and (c) are alternated. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be immediately displayed on the device 81.

Returning to FIG. 201, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the range of the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 203 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 203 (b) shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back side B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 204 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 203, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the back type change is determined based on the back type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 will display the corresponding back side. First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 204 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 204 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 204 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 204 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 204 (a) to 204 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 203 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 204 (a), and the image data corresponding to the rear image between FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) excluding FIG. 204 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 204 (a) to 204 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (a) and (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 204 (a) to 204 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, FIG. 204 (a) allows the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 204 (b) to (c) and 204 (c) to (a) to be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 204 (a) to 204 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 204 (b) to (c) and 204 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 204 (a) to 204 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 204 (b) to (c) and 204 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 201) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 201, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. It is a production to inform the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 205). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 206). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 206).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 206, in the example of FIG. 206). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 206, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 244) (see S6005 in FIG. 244). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 255 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 246 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 246 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S6309 in 246 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 255 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 255 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 207) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 246 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 252) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 207) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 207, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 246 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 252). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 256). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 256). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 257).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 246 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 251 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 256), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 256). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 251 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (see S7221 in FIG. 252), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248 (a), S6705 in FIG. 249 (a), S6805 in FIG. 249 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 250). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (S7214 in FIG. 252), and is set to other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248 (a), S6705 in FIG. 249 (a), S6805 in FIG. 249 (b), FIG. See S6905 of 250). With this definite display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the definite display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 234. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 479,99,232,99, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 209 to 222.

After the start winning process is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a process for performing a process associated with the passage of a sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed (normal symbol variation process). S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 223. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104) makes various determinations and decisions based on the counter values acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 1640, and determines the predetermined value. Control to enable the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to simultaneously control the variation display in the variation display mode determined by the control of the above, or to stop the display in the display mode showing the determination result. Is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203u is on) (S201), and the jackpot is in progress (big hit middle flag). When it is determined (S201: Yes), it is not necessary to set the lottery of special symbols, the stop of the variation display, and the like, so that the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot medium flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether or not the small hit medium flag 203v is on). (S202). If it is determined in the process of S202 that a small hit is in progress (the small hit medium flag 203v is on) (S202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (the small hit medium flag 203v is off) (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S203). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol being displayed in the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S205), and the process is shifted to S206. In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is forcibly set to the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation. The process of displaying the stop is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 214.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The first special symbol change start process for executing the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed (S204), and the process is transferred to S206. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213.

In the process of S206 executed after the first special symbol change start process (S204) or the first special symbol change stop process (S205) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display. (S206), if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed (S206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. Similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) is the second special symbol when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. This is a process for setting a stop display of a stop symbol indicating the lottery result of. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (S206: No), the second starting prize is detected on the condition that a new starting prize is detected in the second entrance 1640. A second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display by executing a special symbol lottery is executed (S207), and this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the first special symbol variation start processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S204).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 210, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired (S301). It is determined whether (N1) is a value larger than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S304 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306) will be described in detail later, but is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is next executed (FIGS. 212, S307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol winning / failing determination result and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S308). The details of this gaming state update process (FIG. 213, S308) will be described later, but the pachinko machine 10 can be updated by updating the values of various counters (probability variation counter 203k, time reduction counter 203g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. This is a process for updating the status. When the process of S308 is completed, the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to off, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating off is set (S309) to end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is on. If it is determined (S310) and it is determined that it is on (S310: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of S310, if it is determined to be off (that is, not on) (S310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to on (S311), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on is issued. After setting (S312), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (probability change state of a special symbol). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time It is determined whether or not the random number value is equal to the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S407). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203n (S409), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S405: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410), and then , End this process.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIGS. 211, S306), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first. 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 211).

When it was determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol was set (S501: Yes), it was acquired by the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203m for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 194 to 196) according to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the value of the probability variation counter 203k and the value of the time reduction counter 203g. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S505). S506).

When the processing of S506 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, a game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 210), will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S308).

When the game state update process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the processing of S602 to S605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203k is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability change counter is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the residual probability change number command indicating the value of the probability change counter is set (S601: Yes). S603).

The residual probability variation number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the residual probability variation number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203k from the residual probability variation number command, and stores the extracted value in the residual probability variation number area 223o of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the residual probability variation number area 223o according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the probability variation counter 203k of the main control device 110. However, the value can be updated. As a result, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state, and to execute the corresponding effect.

When the processing of S603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k after subtraction is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), S605. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S605), and the process proceeds to S606.

In the process of S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g is larger than 0 (S606), and if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S606, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203g is larger than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S607), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter is set. After (S608), this process is terminated.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the remaining time reduction number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the time reduction counter 203g from the remaining time reduction number command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining time reduction area 223q of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining time reduction frequency area 223q according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110. However, the value can be updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S701), and when it is determined that it is the end timing (S701). S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S702). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special Figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S703), and the special Figure 2 fluctuation stop is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p is turned on is set (S704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S705).

When the processing of S705 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S706), and the jackpot flag 203m, the probability variation counter 203k, and the time saving counter 203g are reset (S707). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON (S708), and the process proceeds to S709.

On the other hand, in the processing of S702, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to off for the first special symbol (S702: No), the processing of S703 to S708 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S709.

In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is fixed and stopped is set (S709). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S710), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S701: No). S711), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S205), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the variation display (S703 to S710) is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S702: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S703, S704) is executed.

In this first control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment. Further, in this control example, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may try to do it.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S207).

In the second special symbol change start processing (FIG. 215, S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to on (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off, and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is turned on in the processing of S801, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S802 to S810 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S801: No), the second entry port 1640 is used. It is determined whether or not the winning is detected (S802). If the winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected (S802: Yes), then the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value of is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is executed based on each stored counter value. (S804). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

When the processing of S804 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803. Execute (S805). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 218. After the processing of S805 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update processing (see FIG. 213) is executed (S806), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby command indicating off is issued. After setting (S807), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S801 that the winning of the second entrance 1640 is not detected (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is on (S808). ), If it is on (S808: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S808 that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to on (S809), and the second special symbol is in the variable stop state. A special figure 2 standby command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the fact is set (S810), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211) is executed. The differences from (see) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). Then, the processes of S902 to S904 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the value of the probability variation counter 203k. Each of these processes differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

When the processing of S903 or S904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S905), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processes of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot are executed, and this process is terminated. In each of these processes S906 to S909, the same process as each process of S406 to S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211), respectively. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S905, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S905: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. Special Figure 2 The out-of-bounds fluctuation process is executed (S910), and this process is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S909).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S903 or S904 of FIG. 216 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1001), and the lottery result is a small hit. If (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1003). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1001 that the lottery result is out of order (S1001: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005), and then. This process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S805), will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1102). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S906 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216).

When it is determined in the process of S1102 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S901 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216) described above, the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)). The type is determined (S1105).

When the processing of S1105 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1105), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1106). Then, the process proceeds to S1108.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process of S1108 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1109), and then ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1107).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 219, S1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is on (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 192 (b)) (S1203).

Next, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) is read (S1204), and the variation pattern of small hits corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1205). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1206), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1201 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S1201: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. (See 195 and FIG. 1196) is read (S1207), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1208). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S1209) based on the selected deviation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1305). The process proceeds to S1306.

Next, the processing after S1306 differs from the above-mentioned processing after S705 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 214 and S205) in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312 corresponding to the processing of S705 and S711, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S1311 corresponding to the processing of S710, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special drawing. 2 It differs in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1301 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1301: No). S1302), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1303, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to off for the second special symbol (S1303: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S1304), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, a special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S1304), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220, S208), will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 out-of-order stop processing (S1304).

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (FIG. 221, S1304), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1403).

When the processing of S1403 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1404). After that, the small hit flag 203o is set to off (S140, and the small hit medium flag 203v is set to on (S1406).

When the processing of S1406 is completed, the special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1407). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37, is stopped to fluctuate with a small hit symbol (S1408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the small hit flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1409). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37, is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S1410), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this control example, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display of a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 222, S105) determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64, and if a prize is won, the holding upper limit number (in the first start opening 64). Up to 4), this is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. , A process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting opening 64, which is the first starting opening (S1101). Here, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 64 (there was a start prize) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1504). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1505). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1506).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted winning / failing determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern is set (S1508), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the hit / fail determination result is based on the reserved storage information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold ball can be changed (for example, the color of the hold ball can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail determination result, or before the change starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing judgment result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 223, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hit by the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device (not shown) to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 1640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is in variable display (S1602). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618). ). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1617, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display mounting unit (not shown).

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S1011 (S1618: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1618, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the processing of S1619, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S1613, the "○" symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode at the time of out of order is set by the process of S1615, the second symbol display device (not shown) has an "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to stop display (lighting display). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1613 and the process of S1615. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1620). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1620: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 1640a is set (S1621). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1620: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1603).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1604), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, normal symbol hold 2nd area → normal symbol hold 1st area, normal symbol hold 3rd area → normal symbol hold 2nd area, normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1607).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time reduction state is in effect. In the process of S1608, when it is determined that the state is not in the time saving state (S1608: No), the hit / fail determination is made based on the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see FIG. 192 (c)). Get the result (S1611). On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1609). In the process of S1609, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609: Yes), the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1609: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability (see FIG. 192 (c)). The hit / fail determination result is acquired based on (S1610).

Next, when it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a hit (S1612) and the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a miss). (S1612: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of disconnection, is set (S1615), and the process proceeds to S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a hit (that is, a hit) (S1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is "○". (S1613).

Next, the opening period of the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1614). Then, in the process of S1616 executed after executing the process of S1614 or S1615, the normal map variation pattern table 202 g (see FIG. 197) is read (S1616), and the normal map variation type counter CS2 is read from the read normal map variation pattern table 202 g. The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of is set (S1617), and this process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 224, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S1703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S1704).

When the processing of S1704 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the area (4th area on hold) (S1705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the second entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state.

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using such a preliminary determination result of the ordinary figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination of the ordinary figure but also the electric accessory 1640a when the ordinary figure is determined to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second entry port 1640 (the entry port to which the electric accessory 1640a is attached) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 1640a opens, and it is in a normal game state. Also has the effect of increasing the possibility that the ball will enter the second entry port 1640.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 226), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3132) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process shifts to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905), and if it is not stored (S1905). : No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1910 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3132). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), the power cutoff occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1913). After that, the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g are read out (S1914), and the status command is set based on the read counter values (S1915). When the processing of S1915 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S1916), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the main process (S2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing this main process (S2000). In this main process (S2000), the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (FIG. 227, S2000), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each of the sub-sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). The jackpot control process is executed (S2004). The jackpot control process (S2004) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 228, but a process for setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 1640a is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is in the winning state, the electric accessory 1640a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2010). If a predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process is shifted to S2001, and each process after S2001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S2009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 225 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S2013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (FIG. 226, S1901). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control process (S2004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 227), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is awarded. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2101: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103). ). More specifically, in the processing of S2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

If it is determined in the process of S2103 that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S2104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario is not (S2103: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

If it is determined in the process of S2105 that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2106), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229.

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2105: No). S2107). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed by the processing of S2108 (opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a). Set the solenoid off so that 65f1 is in the closed state), and this process ends. The discrimination process from S2105 to S2107 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S2109: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S2110), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2112), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the big hit (S211: No), the first winning process is executed (S2113), and this process is terminated. The details of this first winning process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

Next, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 229, S2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 179) is set based on the data read by S2201 (S2202), and then the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 179) attached to the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 179). The release operation is set by the data read in the process of S2201 (S2203), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

In this control example, in the case of the small hit game, the operation of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the jackpot end process (S2112), which is one of the jackpot control processes (FIG. 228, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2112).

In the jackpot end process (FIG. 230, S2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203n (S2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state (S2302: No), it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is on (S2303). When it is determined that the V winning flag 203f is on in the processing of S2303 (S2303: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V passing switch 65e3 during the current jackpot, so the value of the probability variation counter 203k. Is set to 120 (S2304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot B to D (S2305). If it is not a jackpot B to D (S2305: No), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 120 (S2306), and the process proceeds to S2307.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2302: Yes), or in the processing of S2303, the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on). If it is determined (S2303: No), or if it is not a jackpot B to D in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), the process proceeds to S307. As a result, if the gaming state at the time of winning is not a latent state, or if the gaming ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 and the hit type is the jackpot B to D, the probability change state of 120 times is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 and the hit type is the jackpot A, the probability change state of 120 times and the time saving state of 100 times are set after the jackpot.

In the process of S2307, both the jackpot middle flag 203u and the V winning flag 203f are set to off, and the winning state storage area 203n is cleared (S2207). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2308), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the V-pass switch 65e3 and set the high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so that during the jackpot game Also, the game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the V-pass switch 65e3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the details of the first winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first winning process (S2113). This first winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. be.

In this first winning process (FIG. 231 and S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S2401). Here, the round validity period is the period in which the round game is set, that is, the period from the setting of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). Is. In the process of S2401, if the round is not valid (S2401: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2402), and the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the current round valid period is (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is detected (S2403). If the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not detected (S2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected in the process of S2403 (S2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h to update (S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2405), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) ( S2405: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit value (5 in this control example) or more (S2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to the opening opening) is set. (S2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408). If the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on) (S2408: No), it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 is on (S2409). In the process of S2409, if the V-passing switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (S2409: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2409, when the V passing switch 65e3 is on (S2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on. Then, the V winning command is set, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, a small hit control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 232, S2005), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1404 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 221) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (S2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505).

If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the processing of S2507 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2108 (first). The solenoid is set to be off so that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203v is set to off (S2512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is terminated. The details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the small hit operation setting process (S2506), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 232, S2005), will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit operation setting process (S2506). In the small hit operation setting process (FIG. 233, S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 179) attached thereto) is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the details of the second winning process (S2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 232), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second prize processing (FIG. 234, S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the setting of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2401, if the round is not valid (S2701: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701 if it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a prize has been detected in the specific winning opening 65a (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the process of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h to update (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit value (5 in this control example) or more (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit value (5 in this control example) or less ( S2705: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit value (5 in this control example) or more (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to the winning opening 65f1) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 243, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 236). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 236 and S4113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4116. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see FIGS. 236 and S4115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state. The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the command determination process (S4111) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 238.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 243.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the customer waiting effect process (S4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect processing (S4105). This customer waiting effect processing (S4105) is a sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j, which is set to be turned on when a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110 is received. FIG. 2 A process of setting a standby display screen is executed based on the setting status of the standby flag 223m. Hereinafter, the details of the customer waiting effect processing (S4105) will be described.

In the customer waiting effect processing (FIG. 237, S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4201). When it is determined that the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is updated (S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203). Here, in this control example, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k. That is, the special figure 1 standby flag is set to on when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k reaches the upper limit value). Has been done.

If the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is less than the upper limit value (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4203, when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, and the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, Then, the standby set flag 223u is set to off (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205. By setting the standby set flag 223u to off in the processing of S4204, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the fact that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t described later is set to on. , Special figure 1 When the standby flag 223s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Further, in the processing of S4201, when it is determined that the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S4201: No), the processing of S4202 to S4204 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S4205.

In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205). When it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is updated (S4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (30000) (S4207). If the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is less than the upper limit value (S4207: No), the process proceeds to S4209.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4207, when the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON, and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m, Then, the standby set flag 223u is set to off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. By setting the standby set flag 223u to off in the processing of S4208, for example, the standby display command for display is set based on the fact that the standby flag 223s in FIG. 1 is set to on. FIG. 2 When the standby flag 223t is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Further, in the process of S4205, when it is determined that the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (that is, it is not set to on), (S4205: No), S4206, and S4207. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S4209.

In the process of S4209, it is determined whether or not the standby setting flag 223u is set to ON (S4209). When it is determined that the standby set flag 223u is set to ON (S4209: Yes), the processing of S4211 to S4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped and the present processing is terminated. That is, the state in which the standby set flag 223u is set to ON is a state in which the change status (standby flag setting status) of each special figure has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the process for setting the standby display type by configuring so that the process for setting the standby display type is not executed when it is determined that the state is such.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241. In this control example, a new special figure change occurs when the standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to ON. Even when a command indicating that the command has been started (a special figure standby command indicating off) is received, the process of setting the standby set flag 223u to off is executed. Therefore, each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can always reset the standby display type every time the fluctuation status of special figure 1 or special figure 2 (standby flag setting status) is changed. It is possible to more appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby set flag 223u is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t Determines whether or not is set to on (S4210).

When it is determined in the process of S4210 that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4210: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210: Yes), the gaming state set in the state setting area 223i is read out (S4211). .. Then, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) based on the read game state and the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t (S4212).

Next, a display standby display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the standby display type is set based on the determined standby display type (S4213). After that, the standby set flag 223u is set to ON (S4214), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S2111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4302), and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 239.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4301 (S4301: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received. Determine (S4303). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4303 (S4303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4304) and received. Special Figure 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4305), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). If you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4306). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4306 (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4307) and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4308), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4306: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the first). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol) ( S4310), this process is terminated. Since the present control example does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set in the processing of S4310. Only the update process is executed.

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, the process of S4310 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the hold ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol hold ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4309, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4311). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4311 (S4311: Yes), the received winning information command information (winning / failing of the special symbol lottery, winning type, and variation pattern) corresponds to the winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4312), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4311 when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4313: Yes), the status command process (S4314) is executed. The details of this state command processing (S4314) will be described with reference to FIG. 240, but the gaming state (normal state, probable change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the state) to the state setting area 223i is executed.

When it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S4313 (S4313: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4315). .. If it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command has been received in the processing of S4315 (S4315: Yes), the customer waiting command processing (S4316) is executed. The details of this customer wait command processing (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 241. However, the special figure 1 is based on the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command output from the main control unit 110. The process for setting the standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is executed.

If it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received in the processing of S4315 (S4315: No), the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4317). If it is determined in the process of S4315 that either the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4318) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 242, but the third symbol display device 81 is based on the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the content of the effect display for display in is executed.

If it is determined that neither the remaining probability change number command nor the remaining time reduction command has been received in the processing of S4317 (S4317: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (S4319), and this processing is terminated. do. In the processing of S4319, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4302). This stop type command reception process (S4302) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4302) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 239, S4302), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on. (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402). End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the state command process (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4314). This state command process (S4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4314) will be described.

In the state command processing (FIG. 240, S4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (S4501). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4503). In the process of S4503, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4503: Yes), the latent notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (S4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4502, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502: Yes), or in the processing of 4503, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4506.

In the process of S4506, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the state command process (S4314) in this control example is based on the game state set in the state setting area 223i and the game state indicated by the state command output from the main control device 110. , It is determined that the game state other than the latent state has changed to the latent state, and when the game state other than the latent state has changed to the latent state, the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A process of controlling "120" as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)). On the other hand, if the jackpot is won during the latent probability state and the latent probability state is set again after the jackpot game is completed, it is determined that the latent probability state is set in the state setting area 223i in the processing of S4502 (S4502). : Yes), in order to skip the processing of S4504 and S4505, the effect probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). Never. As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the latent state and the actual probability variation number is reset (set to 120 times), the value displayed before the jackpot is won will continue to be displayed. It will be displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of actual probability changes (number of remaining probability changes) and the remaining number of effect probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 (number of remaining probability changes). And can be made different, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent state ends.

In the above-mentioned state command processing (S4314 in FIG. 240), when the latent probability state is newly entered, the same number of times (120 times) as the actual probability change number (120 times) is set in the third symbol display device 81. Although it is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used, and for example, a number smaller than the actual probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

Next, the standby command processing (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this standby command processing (S4316). This state command process (S4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110 is executed. Based on (special figure 1 standby command, special figure 2 standby command), a process of setting the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to on or off is executed. The setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is referred to in the above-mentioned customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237).

When the standby command process (S4316) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command has been received (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the special figure 1 standby command has been received (S4601: Yes), the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4602), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is turned off has been received. (S4603). In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is off has been received (S4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (S4604). ), Reset the special figure 1 standby counter 223k (S4605). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606).

If it is determined in the process of S4606 that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S4606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to on (S4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off. (S4607), this process is terminated.

That is, in the state where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to on (the state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without changing the special figure 1), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to off. When a special figure 1 standby command indicating (the change in special figure 1 has been executed) is received, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off and the standby set flag 223u is set to off. In the customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off is set. Therefore, the standby display type can be appropriately set according to the fluctuation status of each special figure (standby flag setting status).

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is off has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby command has been received. (S4608). If it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command has been received in the process of S4608 (S4608: Yes), the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command has not been received (S4608: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is turned off has been received. (S4610). In the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off has been received (S4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (S4611). ), The special figure 2 standby counter 223n is reset (S4612). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613).

If it is determined in the process of S4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S4613: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4613, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on (S4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off. (S4614), this process is terminated.

That is, in the state where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on (the state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 2 fluctuating), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to off. When a special figure 2 standby command indicating (the change in special figure 2 has been executed) is received, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off and the standby set flag 223u is set to off. In the customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off is set. Therefore, the standby display type can be appropriately set according to the fluctuation status of each special figure (standby flag setting status).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4610 that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off has not been received (S4610: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the remaining number of times update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4318). This remaining number update process (S4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a residual probability variation number command from the main control device 110. Or based on receiving a command for the number of remaining hours. The process of updating the contents set in the remaining probability change number area 223o, the effect probability change floor number area 223p, and the remaining time short floor number area 223q is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4318), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4651). When it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has been received in the process of S4651 (S4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o (S4652). Next, it is determined whether or not the data indicating the latent probability state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4653).

That is, in the process of S4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent state or the probable change state, and if it is determined to be the latent state, the effect display dedicated to the latent state, which will be described later, is displayed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes the same effect display in the probabilistic state and the normal state, so that this process ends without executing the dedicated effect display. do.

In the process of S4653, when it is determined that the data indicating the latent probability state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4653: Yes), the number of residual probability changes notified (received) by the main control device 110. Is 0 times (S4654). In the process of S4654, when it is determined that the number of residual probability changes notified (received) by the main control device 110 is 0 (S4654: Yes), the end effect of the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (S4657). Then, the data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 223i, and the process proceeds to S4661.

On the other hand, in the process of S4654, when it is determined that the number of residual probability variations notified (received) by the main control device 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (S4654: No), the effect probability variation number area. The number of impressions stored in 223p is subtracted by 1 (S4657). Then, it is determined whether the number of production probability changes after the subtraction is 0 (S4658). In the process of S4658, when it is determined that the number of effect probability changes after subtraction is 0 (S4658: Yes), the number of residual probability variation number areas 223o is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4569). After that, a revival effect for notifying the number of times set in the effect probability variation number area 223p is set (S4660), and the process proceeds to S4661.

That is, when the actual number of residual probability changes (actual residual probability change number) stored (set) in the residual probability change number area is 1 or more and the effect probability change number (effect residual probability change number) becomes 0. , In order to notify the player that the latent probability state continues, the value of the effect residual probability variation number is updated to the value of the actual residual probability variation number, and the value is the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect (revival effect) displayed on D1 is executed.

By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent state ends, and to increase the number of residual probability changes again after making the player think that the latent state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

In this control example, the timing at which this revival effect is executed is assumed to be the case where the effect probability variation number (effect residual probability variation number) is 0, but other configurations may be used, for example, the effect probability variation number. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the revival effect on condition that the (number of remaining probability changes) is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, 5), and the revival effect is executed based on the lottery result. You may. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while predicting at what timing (special figure fluctuation) the revival effect will occur, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the revival effect may not be executed based on the special figure variation, but may be executed using, for example, the ending period of the small hit game. In this case, on condition that the number of production probability changes (number of production residual probability changes) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent probability state is not determined to continue is displayed). It is desirable to perform a resurrection production. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to set a long fluctuation time in which the revival effect can be executed as the special figure fluctuation time in the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be smoothly provided.

Further, a long fluctuation time in which the revival effect can be executed may be set as the special figure fluctuation time only in the final stage of the latent probability state (for example, the actual number of residual probability changes is 10 or less). As a result, the display state in which the revival effect can be executed (the number of effect probability changes (the number of effect residual probability changes) is 0 (or the display mode indicating that the latent probability state is not determined to continue is displayed) is displayed. In the early stage of the latent state where it is difficult to execute)), it is not necessary to set a long fluctuation time during which the revival effect can be executed, and the game in the latent state can be smoothly provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4701). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S4701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of S4705 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S4702).

Next, in the process of S4703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4303 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111) is used in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Acquired from 223z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S4703). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variable pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variable corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the display setting) (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4705). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S4706). In the process of S4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the first 2 Set a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol (S4707).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S4708).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set on (that is, off) (S4709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S4710).

In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4711), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. .. The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is wrong. Will be done. When the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 244 to 257, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls to the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 244) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 245, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. However, all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the process of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 244. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 255 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 255 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 246 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246 (a). FIG. 246 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246 (b). FIG. 246 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 207 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251 the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 247, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 247. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (b). FIG. 248 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in reality, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disconnected. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (a). FIG. 249 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (b). FIG. 249 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 247. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 247. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (b). FIG. 251 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 247. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 248 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 248 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 252, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 252. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 252. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image expanded earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 255 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 255 (b). FIG. 255 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 is described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 246 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) (see S7501: No in FIG. 255 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 207) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the three gaming states of the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent probable state are configured to go back and forth with a big hit or the like as an opportunity. Then, the latent state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, the percentage of small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol is increased (0% → about 46%), and in the latent state, other games. The structure is such that the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the state. As a result, in the latent state, if the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the probability of becoming a small hit and the probability of becoming a big hit will increase. You can have more chances to win than other playing states. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the state will shift to the latent state.

Further, in the first control example, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is switched (switches between the main variation and the sub variation) according to the game state. Specifically, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main variation, and in the latent probability state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation. Then, in each game state, when the elapsed time from the stop of the main fluctuation is a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, a demo display according to the game state is displayed even if the sub-variation is being executed. (Demo screen for waiting for customers, demo display for latency) is displayed. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a certain period of time has elapsed from the state of suspension of fluctuation, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demo display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being played depending on the presence or absence of a demo display, so that a game in which a demo display is performed for a player who is looking for a vacant platform. You can start the game with the machine. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine having specifications in which a plurality of symbols fluctuate at the same time, even if some of the symbols are in a variable stop state, as long as the other symbols are fluctuating. , Could not run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player searching for a vacant table to determine whether or not the table is vacant from the displayed contents.

On the other hand, in this first control example, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demo screen (regardless of the sub-variation status) only according to the main fluctuation status in the normal state or the probabilistic state. .. As a result, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the fluctuation display for 600 seconds is started, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, since it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty stand, the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

Further, in this control example, when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main fluctuation was stopped in the latent state, the same character 811 as during the fluctuation is continuously displayed as a demo display (special display) in a special mode. It is configured to be set. That is, the display contents of the same system are set for the normal display and the demo display. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is detected thereafter, the display mode (effect mode) can be smoothly switched, so that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. ..

Further, in the first control example, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of being off. .. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, while one symbol is changing and another symbol is stopped and displayed, a reach state in which the stopped and displayed symbols form a part of a predetermined combination is generated and becomes a hit. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the reach state does not occur, even if all the symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility that the hit state will be reached at that time, and the player's game will be dealt with. There was a risk of spoiling the interest. On the other hand, in this control example, after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of being out of alignment, a special reach effect is provided in which a new symbol sequence is framed in and develops into a reach effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the combination of being off, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect. That is, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols by paying attention to whether the combination of the stop symbols that can develop into the special reach effect (the combination that becomes the reach when the new symbol sequence L4 is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to expect the development of a special reach effect each time the variable display is stopped and displayed in a combination of deviations, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probabilistic state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the probabilistic state, the ball is configured to easily enter the second entry port 1640, and in the normal state or the latent state, the ball goes to the first entry port 64 rather than the second entry opening 1640. May be configured to facilitate the entry of the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state or the latent state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and in the probability change state. , The variation pattern with a very short variation time (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the defined contents of the probability variation table 202f3 and the latent probability table 202f4 in the first control example may be exchanged. In addition, when the second special symbol is a big hit (big hit E to F) in the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the time reduction number of times is set to 120 times, and in the normal state or the latent state, It may be configured to set the number of time reductions to 0. As a result, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit in the probable change state, the gaming state after the big hit can be easily set to the probable change state again (it becomes easy to loop the probable change state), so that the superiority of the probable change state is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the normal state may be set to the most advantageous state instead of the latent state or the probable change state. Specifically, for example, the specified contents of the normal table A202f1 and the latent probability table 202f4 in the first control example are exchanged, and the normal state is easily looped in the jackpot in the normal state (the V-passing switch 65e3 is sphered). It is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type (which is difficult to pass through), and in the latent state or the probability change state, the V-passing switch 65e3 is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type of the opening / closing pattern in which the ball easily passes. May be good.

In the first control example, among the opening / closing patterns set for the opening / closing plate 65f1, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round as a pattern in which the ball does not easily pass through the V-passing switch 65e3. Although the opening / closing pattern to be set is provided, the opening period may be shortened to surely prevent the ball from entering the specific winning opening 65.

In this first control example, when a special reach effect is executed and each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. The configuration is such that the row L4 faces the direction, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, only the main symbol (in the example of FIG. 185 (a), the main symbol with the number "1") that is reached by the appearance (frame-in) of the new symbol string L4 is the new symbol string L4. It may be configured to look up in the direction of. Further, for example, among the main symbols other than the main symbols to which the reach is applied, the configuration may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the number of the main symbols in the mode of looking up at the new symbol row L4. That is, the larger the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big hit in the special reach effect. In this case, when all the main symbols look up at the new symbol sequence L4, the jackpot may be fixed (for example, it may be selected only in the case of hit super reach). With this configuration, when the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of deviations, it is possible to draw more attention to the mode of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

In the first control example, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbol but also the reserved symbol may be configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4 may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach effect. That is, the larger the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit in the special reach effect by the number of reserved symbols, a configuration may be made to suggest the degree of expectation that the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol will be a big hit. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the fluctuation pattern of each reserved ball is pre-read, and the fluctuation pattern (off super reach or winning super reach) that develops into a super reach effect is held in the reserved ball. When it is determined that a sphere is included, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved sphere that develops in the super reach effect executes an effect that faces the direction of the new symbol row L4 at the time of temporary stop in the special reach effect. It may be configured. As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the reserved symbol at the time of temporary stop in the special super reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the new symbol string L4 displayed when the special reach effect is executed is scrolled and displayed in parallel with the respective symbol columns L1 to L3, but the new symbol string L4 is configured. , It is not always necessary to scroll and display in parallel with each symbol column L1 to L3. For example, the new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right side or the left side of each symbol row L1 to L3, and may be scrolled in the vertical direction (vertical to each symbol row L1 to L3). As a result, the degree of freedom of the effect when the special reach effect is selected can be further increased. Further, the number of new symbol rows is not limited to one, and a plurality of symbol rows may be newly displayed when a special reach effect is executed. By displaying a plurality of symbol columns, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop, which can develop into a special reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop symbol that may develop into a special reach when the stop symbol corresponds to the disengagement, so that the player can further develop the special reach effect. You can expect it with high frequency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this first control example, a result display (see FIG. 188 (b)) showing the result of the latent probability state is performed from the end of the latent probability state to the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. It was configured not to be, but it is not limited to this. For example, the result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. Then, the display may be continued until the variable display of the first first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the finished latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entry port 64 after the player returns to the left-handed strike, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

In this first control example, after the latent state is completed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds over two lottery of special symbols, but the variation time is not limited to 12 seconds and is a result. The display may be arbitrarily set (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) within a range that can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

In this first control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In addition, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won as a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit until the stop display of the big hit or the small hit is displayed. A compulsory lottery that does not win may be executed so that the lottery result is always out of order. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a big hit or a small hit. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery is executed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a fair game to the player.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 289. In the first control example described above, the first ball entry port 64 in which the ball can easily enter by hitting the left side and the second entry port 1640 in which the ball can easily enter the ball by hitting the right side are provided, and the left-handed game is performed. In the normal state and the probable change state to be executed, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is mainly executed (special figure 1). In the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed (substantially variable game), the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is mainly performed. It was configured so that the game to be executed (Special Figure 2 Substantially Fluctuating Game) was executed. Then, in the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is used for a predetermined period (for example, in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640. , About 1.65 seconds) A small hit that is open is set (lottery probability is about 1/2), and it is configured so that it can be expected to get a ball out by the small hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed by right-handed, and the fluctuation of each special figure in the latent state. By setting the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, the lottery of the special figure 2 is more easily executed than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the latent state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol and time reduction state of normal symbol) is shorter than the number of times when the high probability state of special symbol is set (for example, 120 times). It is set to (for example, 100 times), and when the number of lottery of the special figure (the number of fluctuations of the special figure) exceeds 100 times in the probability change state, the probability change state is changed to the latent state. ..

Furthermore, long fluctuation (180 seconds) and short fluctuation (3 seconds) are set for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol at the timing of transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state. It is configured so that the degree of occurrence of small hits in the latent state differs depending on the situation. Specifically, when the second special symbol starts a long fluctuation (180 seconds) and immediately shifts to the latent state, the fluctuation due to the first special symbol until the second special symbol starts the fluctuation next time. Is executed, the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state is reduced, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of small hits can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol shifts to the latent state during the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special immediately after the transition to the latent state. Since the fluctuation of the symbol is started, the degree of occurrence of small hits can be increased as a result. In addition, although the details will be described later, a mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b in the area where the ball is launched by right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting area). Is provided so that the ball cannot enter only one of the entry ports (for example, the second entry port 1640a) (so that it becomes difficult).

With this configuration, as in the first control example described above, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and improve the motivation of the player for the game. can. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage (degree of small hit occurrence) when shifting from the probable change state to the latent probable state can be made different depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide the player with more complicated playability, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored early. In addition, the ball alternates between the right first ball opening 64b, which executes the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball, and the second ball opening 1640b, which executes the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Since the structure for entering the ball is provided in the right-handed area, it is possible to suppress that only the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, is executed, which is excessively advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the granting.

Further, in the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the lottery (execute the variation) at the same time, and the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. Is a hit (big hit or small hit), and at the timing when the symbol indicating the lottery result of that win is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the hit is confirmed), the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is removed. It was configured to be forcibly stopped by a symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) becomes a win (big hit or small hit), and the lottery result showing the winning result is shown. At the timing when is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the hit is confirmed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed. At the timing when the winning game based on the game is completed (the timing when the special symbol can be changed), the measurement (counting) of the fluctuation time for the change of the other special symbol that has been interrupted is restarted.

As a result, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the lottery at the same time (execute the fluctuation), the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can play the game. On the other hand, you can avoid feeling dissatisfied.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that in the game board 13, the position of the variable winning device 65 is left-hit from the right-handed area. And the point where the ball hit to the right moved to the lower center area, which is the area where the ball can enter, the point where the distribution unit 660 was provided instead of the second entry port 1640, and the point where the ball to the second entry port 1640 The contents of ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 have been partially changed in that the electric accessory 660f that regulates the entry of balls into the distribution unit 660 is provided in place of the electric accessory 1640a that regulates entry of balls. The contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The points, the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 258, in the second control example, the distribution unit 660 is located at the position where the variable winning device 65 is arranged (the right side (right-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80) in the first control example. The point where it is arranged, the point where the electric accessory 660f is arranged above the distribution unit 660, and the second input arranged on the downstream side of the right-handed region (lower right side of the board surface 13) in the first control example. The difference is that the ball opening 1640 is deleted and the variable winning device 65 is arranged below the central region of the board (below the first ball opening 64). Although the details will be described later, the distribution unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage port provided above the distribution unit 660. Inside the distribution unit 660, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the right first entry slot 64b. A second ball entry port 1640b is provided, and a ball that has entered the inside of the distribution unit 660 through the passage port is distributed to one of these entry ports. Therefore, by launching a ball aiming at the distribution unit 660 by right-handed striking, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed.

Further, above the distribution unit 660, an electric accessory 660f that can be changed to a permissible position that allows the ball to flow into the passage port provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 660 and a regulated position that regulates the ball is arranged. There is. This electric accessory 660f is used for a predetermined period when the result of a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 67, which is the same as the electric accessory 640a of the first control example described above, is successful. (1 second x 2 times) It is controlled to change to the allowable position. As a result, it is better to aim at the first entrance 64 by the game of executing left-handed in the normal state (hereinafter referred to as left-handed game), and by the game of executing right-handed (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game). It is configured so that the first special symbol can be changed more efficiently than aiming at the entry port 64b.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIGS. 259 (a) and 259 (b) are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 660. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side thereof, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

As shown in FIGS. 259 (a) and 259 (b), a passage port through which the ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 660, and transmission that can detect that the ball has passed through the passage port is provided. A mold entry sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage port, a distribution member 900 for distributing the ball to the right first ball entry port 64b or the second ball entry port 1640b is provided. The right first ball entry port 64b is disposed in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution member 900, and the second ball entry port 1640b is disposed in the lower right direction of the front view of the distribution member 900. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed to the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b by the distribution member 900.

The distribution member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the entire distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is in a state of being tilted downward in the lower left direction (see FIG. 89 (b)), and the first right ball entering ball arranged in the lower left direction in the front view with respect to the distribution member 900. The ball falls toward the mouth 64b (the ball is guided to the right first entry port 64b).

Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b. ing. On the other hand, in the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 660, the distribution member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom surface constituting the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c is horizontal). The base side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the back surface side (on the center line of the passing port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged.

The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip portion thereof faces the distribution member 900 side. Similar to the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet at the position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c comes directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passing port can enter about one ball). The position where the 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It will be maintained at the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line (upper position) of the passage port, the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c faces the side that receives the ball entering the distribution unit 660 (the passage port side of the distribution unit 660). Therefore, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 can be reliably distributed to the right first entry port 64b and the second entry port 1640b.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball, rotates about 30 degrees to the left, guides the ball to the right first entry port 64b, and then shakes. It is possible to prevent the component member 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the ball to the right first entry port 64b, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the accommodating portion 900c receives and receives the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660. Due to the weight of the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is rotated clockwise by about 30 degrees, and the accommodating portion 900c is tilted in a direction in which it is inclined in the lower right direction in the front view, so that the ball falls from the accommodating portion 900c. , The ball enters the second entry port 1640b (the ball is guided to the second entry port 1640b). In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the distribution unit 660 to the right first entry port 64b and the second entry port 1640b, so that the right first entry port 1640b can be guided alternately. Balls can be evenly distributed between 64b and the second entrance 1640b to win a prize. As a result, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time.

A guide plate 900z1 for guiding the ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a to the right first entry port 64b is provided between the distribution member 900 and the right first entry port 64b for distribution. A guide plate 900Z2 for guiding the ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a to the second entry port 1640b is provided between the member 900 and the second entry port 1640b. As a result, the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to each entry port.

Further, on the upper end side (distribution member 900 side) of each of the guide plates 900z1 and 900z2, a regulation member (not shown) that regulates the rotation range of the distribution member 900 is provided, and is regulated by the distribution member 900. The rotation range is regulated by the contact with the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from excessively rotating (rotating further counterclockwise than the state shown in FIG. 259 (b)) due to the weight of the ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a. The balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to each entry port.

<Game description of the second control example>
Next, the contents of the game in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268. In the second control example, the transition ratio to each gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability state) was changed with respect to the first control example described above, and the number of time reductions given in the probability change state was changed. When the point, the point where the fluctuation time of each special symbol in the probabilistic state and the latent state is changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time, one special symbol stops at the hit symbol. At the displayed timing (time when the hit is confirmed), the measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted (temporary stop), and the interrupted fluctuation time after the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is completed. The difference is that the configuration for resuming the measurement of is used.

First, with reference to FIG. 260, the flow of the game state transition in the second control example will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state transition in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 260, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example shifts to three gaming states (normal state, probable change state, latent state) like the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. It is configured.

Of the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Has been done. Therefore, the normal state is a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (substantial special figure 1 variation). Further, in this control example, since the small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the small hit game is not executed.

Next, in the probabilistic change state (probability change game state), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than that of the first control example described above, and the right side area of the board surface 13 (the right side area of the variable display device unit 80). ) (Hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed, and a game in which a ball is made to flow into the distribution unit 660 and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time is executed. The details of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 (b). Short-term fluctuations (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time in Fig. 1) and long-term fluctuations (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time in Special Figure 1 are set, and the probable change state is set according to the selected fluctuation time. The ratio of lottery (variation) executed in is set to be different.

Further, in this control example, the number of times (100 times) is set to be smaller than the number of times (120 times) in which the probability change state is set as the number of time reductions in the probability change state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state (20 times). There is. As a result, for example, even if after the end of the jackpot game won in the normal state, the player shifts to the probabilistic state instead of the latent probable state which is most advantageous to the player, without going through the jackpot of the special symbol. Since it is possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the player.

As described above, in this control example, short-term fluctuation (3 seconds) and long-term fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, so that it is special during the probabilistic state. Depending on the change status of the second special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the symbol exceeds 100 times and the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the latent state (20 times), a small hit is made during the latent state (20 times). You can make a difference in the number of times you win. Specifically, for example, when the time saving state ends when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate for a long time (180 seconds) and the gaming state shifts from the probable change state to the latent state, the second special symbol The timing at which the next fluctuation is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds in the probabilistic state (see FIG. 270 (b)) and 5 seconds in the latent state (see FIG. 271), the next fluctuation of the second special symbol is set. The first special symbol is set to be variable 20 times by the time 180 seconds have elapsed until is executed.

Further, in this control example, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the distribution unit 660 and is configured to alternately enter the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily make a difference depending on the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent state (20 times).

In the latent probability state (latent probability game state), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than that of the first control example described above, and the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. The lottery (variation) is configured to be executed together (Special Figure 1 Special Figure 2 Substantial Change). Since the other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this second control example, the player's willingness to play is provided because an opportunity is provided to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, without winning the jackpot of the special symbol. Has the effect of being able to continue to increase. Furthermore, if the transition to the latent state is performed without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the degree of advantage in the latent state can be different depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the latent state, the change of the second special symbol in which the small hit is set in the lottery result (lottery) and the change of the first special symbol in which the small hit is not set in the lottery result (lottery) are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessively small hit game occurs.

In addition, in the game state (probability change state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the fluctuation ratio between the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery) is the fluctuation ratio of each special symbol. It is set to differ depending on the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the variation time of each set special symbol, so that the player can play the game while expecting that many variations of the second special symbol advantageous to the player are executed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In this control example, a small hit is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small hit is won with a winning probability lower than the small hit winning probability of the second special symbol. In addition, the small hit winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is higher than the case where the small hit is won with the first special symbol. It is also possible to provide a small hit game in which it is easier to enter the ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game by winning the small hit with the second special symbol. In this case, when a plurality of small hit games having different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set and the small hit is won by the second special symbol rather than the small hit by the first special symbol. It is preferable to make the opening period of the variable winning device 65 longer, or to select an opening pattern in which the ball is easy to enter.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in a state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating at the same time, either one (special figure 2) is hit (big hit or The flow of each special figure change and the effect display (effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81) in the case of a small hit) will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure change, and the effect display based on the change of the special figure 1 (effect display using the third symbol) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. In the probabilistic state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 wins a small hit is shown.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed (lottery) at the same time, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the change of each special figure. Some of the effects are displayed. In this control example, of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the variation display (main variation) corresponding to one of the special map fluctuations and the variation display (sub) corresponding to the other special map variation. (Variation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 182).

The main variation and the sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure variation is switched according to the gaming state. For example, the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 which is a substantial variation in the normal state becomes the main variation. The fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to be a sub-variation. In this way, the player can display the third symbol by displaying the special figure variation substantially executed in the set gaming state as the main variation among the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation. The result of the game can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner on the device 81.

In this second control example, an example is shown in which the variation display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched between the main variation and the sub variation according to the gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. The variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation and the variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation may be configured to randomly switch between the main variation and the sub variation, or may be configured according to a predetermined rule (for example, alternating). ) May be used. Further, the configuration may be selectable by the player. Even with such a configuration, the same problem occurs when a winner is won by the special symbol variation on the side that does not correspond to the main variation executed by the third symbol display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 261. First, the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are started at the same time, and the special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of the special figure 1. Then, 3 seconds after the fluctuation of each special figure is started (after the fluctuation time of special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the small hit is won, and the change of special figure 1 is displayed. The measurement of the fluctuation time for is interrupted. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, but during the period during which the measurement of the fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is suspended (interruption period of FIG. 261), the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. 1 The symbol display device 37 is configured so that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped when the small hit game is executed.

On the other hand, in the second control example, since the same processing as the variation display setting processing (see S4112 in FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol, which is executed in the above-mentioned manner, corresponds to a predetermined period (variation time of the special figure variation) even if the special figure variation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure variation time is interrupted). It is configured to be executed continuously (for 8 seconds). As a result, when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special symbol fluctuation time is interrupted), the variation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the interruption of the special symbol variation ( Alternatively, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect display) is interrupted and the player feels uncomfortable.

Here, when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special symbol fluctuation time is interrupted) as described above, the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. In the case of continuous execution, the interrupted special figure change is restarted, the timing at which the restarted special figure change ends, and the variation display (or effect) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81. There is a problem that an error occurs between the timing at which the display) ends and the predetermined period (suspension period of the special map fluctuation).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the fluctuation pattern (variation display of the third symbol) set by the fluctuation display setting process (see S412 in FIG. 243) From the end of the execution of the effect display) to the reception of the symbol confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed. , It is configured so that a shaking effect that slightly swings each symbol is executed. Therefore, a predetermined period (interruption period of the special symbol variation) that occurs between the timing at which the above-mentioned special symbol variation ends and the timing at which the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. ) Minute error period, the shaking effect is continued for the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and the player's motivation to play is reduced by making the pachinko machine 10 think that a problem has occurred. There was a problem of letting them do it.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the above-mentioned problem is solved by configuring the additional effect to be executable by using the above-mentioned error period. That is, as shown in FIG. 261, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example is a small hit at the timing when the normal effect for 8 seconds is completed as the special figure 1 effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81. If the gaming state has not ended, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is shaken by the third symbol display device 81 during the period (1 second) until the small hit gaming state ends. Is executed, and then, when the small hit game state ends and the special figure 1 change is restarted, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure 1 change period after the restart is executed. With this configuration, the interrupted special figure variation is restarted, the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends, and the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81. ) Ends and the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 261), the situation in which the third symbol is continuously oscillated and displayed can be suppressed, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation where the error occurs.

Although the details will be described later, in the second control example, the length of the error period described above is calculated, and the content of the additional effect executed according to the error period is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to execute a more suitable effect display for the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the type of the additional effect to be executed is different depending on the length of the period during which the additional effect is executed. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) that is executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main change is continuously executed regardless of the lottery result of the sub-variation. Can be suppressed.

FIG. 262 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the additional effect is not executed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). .. This is intentionally because if the additional effect is executed in a short period of time when the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable. This is to prevent additional effects from being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), until the stop command from the main control device 110 is received (see points D to E in FIG. 261), the shaking is completed in a state corresponding to the main fluctuation. Stop is displayed.

Next, FIG. 262 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the additional effect A is configured to be executed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). There is. As shown in FIG. 262 (b), in this additional effect A, the number (identification information) displayed attached to each symbol is changed to "?" When the effect corresponding to the main variation is completed. The shaking stop is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses.

In this control example, a display mode is used in which only the numbers attached to each symbol are hidden, but for example, a display mode in which the character (“animal” or the like) of each symbol is also hidden may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses. Further, since this additional effect A is an effect in which only a part of the display mode (design display mode) of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation is changed, even if the additional effect A is executed when the remaining period is short. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect B is executed as a type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the additional effect B is configured to be executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263 (a), in the additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. 262 (a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds is changed for the player. A telop for notifying the presence is displayed in the small area Ds5. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the main fluctuation is changing even if the state in which the main fluctuation is stopped and displayed is continuing.

In this control example, as the additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm is configured to be the same as that of FIG. 262 (a), that is, the effect is not added to the display of the main display area Dm, and the additional effect is added. However, the control load is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as an additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be the same as that of FIG. 262 (b). .. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 263 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect C is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the additional effect C is configured to be executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in this additional effect C, the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the front view of the main display area Dm, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 The game description is displayed. In this way, by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main fluctuation during the remaining period after the main fluctuation production is completed, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to digest the remaining period of the main fluctuation without. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, as in FIG. 263 (a), a telop for notifying the player that the variation is being executed in the small area Ds5 is displayed. This makes it easy for the player to know that the game is changing.

FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the additional effect D is configured to be executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period or more (6 seconds or more). As shown in FIG. 264, in the additional effect D, similarly to the additional effect C shown in FIG. 263 (b), the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the front view of the main display area Dm, and the main display is displayed. In the central part of the area Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). In this way, when the period (residual period) in which the additional effect is executed is longer than a predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect dedicated to the additional effect (replay display effect) is executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of using the remaining period.

As described above, in the second control example, in the configuration in which the fluctuations of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are executed at the same time, one of the special figures stops at a symbol indicating a hit. When it is displayed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special map is stopped, and after the winning game is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special map is restarted. As described above, it is possible to execute the game without forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

Further, the variation display (for example, the main variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is preset even when the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is stopped. Since it is continuously executed during the period (the period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special map), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the special map from being interrupted due to the lottery result of one special map. can. As a result, for example, when a story-like effect is executed as a variation display corresponding to the variation of the other special figure, the winning game is started by winning the variation of one special map. However, it is possible to execute the production with a story that corresponds to the fluctuation of the other special figure without interruption. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of producing the game can be enhanced.

Further, when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the change of the other special figure is completed and the change of the other special figure executed by the third symbol display device 81 are added. The period during which the corresponding variation display is completed will be different, but since it is configured to execute the additional effect using the different period (remainder period), the variation of the special figure for the player. It is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness due to the difference between the period and the period of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

Further, in the second control example, the additional effect executed when the fluctuation period of the special figure and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the special map fluctuation are different is set to the length of the different period (remainder period). Since it is configured to be changed according to the situation, it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, when the remainder period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional effect to be executed. , It is configured to execute an additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation has ended is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort even when there is a surplus period in which it is difficult to provide the additional effect to the player. In this second control example, as an additional effect in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special map variation is completed is changed, among the variation displays corresponding to the special map variation, the special map It is configured to execute an additional effect in which the display mode showing the lottery result is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the special map variation by the variation display corresponding to the special map variation before the end of the special map variation period.

If the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is being executed (the variation display of the special map variation has ended, but the variation of the special map has not been completed. During the period), the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order because the new special figure change is not executed. Therefore, in this control example, when the remainder period is a predetermined period, the display for notifying the player that the special figure is changing on the third symbol display device 81 (“changing display)) is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which the new special figure change is not executed is a normal state. In the control example of the main subject 2, the remainder period is a predetermined period. The above-mentioned "changing display" is displayed at the same time as the additional effect to be executed is started. For example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the additional effect was executed. It may be configured so that the "changing display" is executed later. With this configuration, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, 2 seconds from the start), the same effect as the short-term additional effect described above is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the additional effect is set as a game. It is possible to suppress being grasped by a person.

Further, in the second control example, when a remainder period of a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) is set, information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content) is provided. The additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of information about the game by effectively utilizing the period in which the new special figure change is not started in the display on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by displaying the information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the extra period. In the second control example, the information explaining the game content is displayed as the information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure, but other information may be displayed. Often, for example, past game history may be displayed, or information (fortune-telling, games, etc.) unrelated to the game itself may be displayed.

In addition, in the second control example, of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation in which the fluctuation is executed at the same time, the special figure fluctuation in which the player expects the lottery result more is the main fluctuation, and the other fluctuations are the sub-variations. It is set so that the area where the main variation is executed is larger than the area where the sub-variation is executed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily grasp the content of the main variation. There is. As a result, the player can easily grasp the fluctuation content of the main fluctuation.

Further, in the second control example, the special figure (special figure that is the target of the substantial change) that the player expects from the lottery result is switched according to the game state, but the special figure that is the target of the actual change is switched. Is executed as the main variation, so that the game content can be displayed (notified) to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the flow of fluctuation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the gaming state in the second control example shifts from the latent state to the normal state will be described. do. FIG. 265 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the latent state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 2, and FIG. 265 (b). Is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the latent probability state (121st exhibition after the end of the previous big hit) is the special figure 1.

As shown in FIGS. 265 (a) and 265 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figures 1 and 2 can be changed at the same time, the advantageous state (latent state) in which the player is advantageous is a predetermined number of times (for example, the latent state). When it is set only to 120 times), the number of times the advantageous state is set (that is, the number of probable changes) when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed during the advantageous state. ) Is subtracted. In this case, when the special figure variation executed in the first rotation (the number of fluctuations “121” in FIG. 265) after the end of the advantageous state becomes the special figure 1 variation (see FIG. 265 (b)), the special figure 2 variation (See FIG. 265 (a)).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, a short fluctuation time is set as the special figure fluctuation time during the latent state in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game in the latent state. (See FIG. 270 (b)), the game result displayed when the latent state ends (see FIG. 188 (b)) is configured to be displayed during the special figure change executed after the latent state ends. is doing. Specifically, the player is made to grasp the game result (FIG. 188 (b)) of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation (main variation in the normal state) that is executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state. It is set to be a sufficient time (12 seconds in this control example).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation that is executed first after shifting from the latent state to the normal state is the special figure of the first rotation after the latent state ends. Since it changes depending on the game situation during the latent state, whether it becomes a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation of the second rotation is latent by simply setting the special figure fluctuation time of the first rotation to 12 seconds after the latent state ends. There was a problem that the player could not grasp the game result of the state.

Therefore, in the second control example, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the end of the latent state is set to a sufficient time (12 seconds in the present control example) for the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 188 (b)). It is set so that when the change of the special figure 1 is executed in any of the special figure changes, the game result is notified using the change time. By this, the player is surely latent. It is possible to notify the game result of the state.

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the special figure fluctuation of the second rotation (variation number “122”) after the end of the latent probability state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. In the case shown in FIG. 265 (b), the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation (variation number “121”) after the end of the latent probability state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the game result is obtained by using the period from the transition from the latent state to the normal state to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation which is the main fluctuation in the normal state. It may be configured to notify.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t will be described. FIG. 266 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display A, FIG. 266 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display B, and FIG. 267 (a) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special display A, and FIG. 267 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special display B.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 271. In the ROM 202 of the second control example, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d are partially changed and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first control example described above. It differs in that it is.

First, with reference to FIG. 268 (a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the second control example will be described. FIG. 268 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the second control example is a first hit type counter in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193) used in the first control example described above. When the value of C2 is changed, the jackpot H is specified instead of the jackpot G which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 2, and the V prize is won in some jackpot types. The difference is that the number of time reductions given is specified as 100 times instead of 120 times. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type and the first hit. When the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 79", the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type.

When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 44", the jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is ". In the case of "45 to 49", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

Here, the jackpot H, which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the second control example, will be described. This jackpot H is a jackpot in which a jackpot game of two rounds (R) is executed, and the same opening pattern as the small hit game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. .. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a big hit game and a small hit game having the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by grasping the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of the winning game (big hit game or small hit). It can be difficult to identify the game).

Therefore, for example, when a hit game is executed during the latent probability state, is the hit game a hit game (that is, a big hit game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game (that is, a small hit game) in which the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not changed, the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and it is possible to play a game while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

Further, in the second control example, the number of time reductions set when the state shifts to the probabilistic change state (high probability / time saving state) is set to 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probabilistic change state continues (120 times). When the special figure fluctuation exceeds 100 times without winning a big hit in the probabilistic state, the gaming state is changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. With this configuration, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a big hit in the special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and the interest of the game can be set. Can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202f of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (b). FIG. 268 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), in the second control example, the period in which the normal table A202f1 is referred to is set to the latent state with respect to the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 194) of the first control example described above. The point that the latent probability state is changed to the 9th rotation or later after the end of the 3rd rotation after the end, the point that the normal table Bb202fb2 is provided instead of the normal table B202f2, and the probability change table instead of the probability change table 202f3. A point where b202fb3 is provided, a point where a latent probability table b202fb4 is provided instead of the latent probability table 202f4, and a normal table Cb202fb5 referred to in the period from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the end of the latent probability state are provided. It differs from the above point.

Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game playability of the second control example (the game playability different from that of the first control example described above) will be described. As described above, the second control example is configured to be capable of holding and storing up to four lottery drawings of the special figure 2. Therefore, for example, when a right-handed game is executed during the latent state and the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state while four lottery of Special Figure 2 are held and stored, the hold storage is performed. The lottery of the special figure 2 that has been performed will be executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state.

Further, also in the second control example, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 from being frequently executed in the normal state as in the first control example described above). , The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 10 minutes) is set to be selected, so that there is a problem that the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state is executed in the normal state. ..

Therefore, in the second control example, even if the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state is executed during the normal state, in order to suppress the execution of the special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time, During the predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special figure lottery is executed eight times), the fluctuation time for the special figure 2 lottery is set to be short. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time even though the player is performing an appropriate game.

Further, in the second control example, when one of the special figures stops at a symbol indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) as described above, until the hit game based on the hit ends (the hit game ends). However, since the configuration is such that the other special figure fluctuation is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is temporarily stopped) (until the special figure fluctuation becomes feasible), the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed. If it is done, even if the big hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 and the game state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the lottery of special figure 2 will be held until the long-term fluctuation ends. It was not executed, and there was a risk that it would not be possible to provide a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Even for such problems, the predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is the subsequent period in the normal state. The above-mentioned problem can be solved by configuring the variation pattern of the short variation time to be selected for (the period after the special drawing lottery is executed eight times).

Here, the normal table Bb202fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 269 (a). FIG. 269 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal table Bb202fb2. The normal table Bb202fb2 is different from the normal table B202f2 of the first control example described above in that the fluctuation time specified in some fluctuation patterns is changed, and is otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

To specifically explain the difference from the first control example described above, in the normal table Bb202fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)". The fluctuation time is specified. That is, from the transition of the gaming state from the latent state to the normal state until the special figure lottery is executed twice, the fluctuation of "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" regardless of the symbol type and the winning / failing judgment result. The time will be set.

With this configuration, any one of the two fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state can be regarded as the fluctuation shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent state is notified in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, there is an effect that the period for notifying the game result can be surely secured.

In the second control example, the normal table Bb202fb2 is referred to only for a predetermined period after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special figure change is executed twice). , It is stipulated that the same fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the symbol type and the result of the pass / fail judgment, but it is not necessary to set all the fluctuation times the same, and other fluctuation times are set. It may be configured to be set. In this case, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the change of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the change of the special figure 2 won by the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the big hit game is started. It can be suppressed, and it is possible to easily display the effect display executed in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

In the second control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, an effect display (for example, a game in a latent state) executed in response to the change of the special figure 1 is performed. In order to execute the result display (result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (special figure 1) is used in the period of two special figure fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. Alternatively, by configuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), the special figure 1 is changed for 12 seconds regardless of the timing at which the fluctuation between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. A predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing a game result in a latent state) is executed in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, for example. When the special figure 1 continuously fluctuates after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, a predetermined effect display (for example, during the latent state) corresponds to the first change in the special figure 1. (Result display showing the game result) may be executed, and the normal effect display suggesting the corresponding lottery result to the player may be executed for the second special figure 1 change.

Next, the normal table Cb202fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 269 (b). FIG. 269 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb202fb5. The normal table Cb202fb5 is a table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the latent probability state ends.

The normal table Cb202fb5 is set so that the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation pattern selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is shorter than that of the above-mentioned normal table Bb202fb2. Specifically, the fluctuation time selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the result of the hit / miss determination. With this configuration, all the lottery of special figure 2 stored on hold during the latent state is digested within a predetermined period after the game state shifts to the normal state (within 8 rotations of special figure fluctuation). It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being lowered due to long-term fluctuations when the game state shifts even though the proper game is being executed.

In this control example, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 stored in the latent state from being executed for a long time fluctuation (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved storages in the special figure 1 is obtained. The special variation pattern is selected during the period when the special figure lottery for 8 pieces, which is the sum of (4 pieces) and the maximum number of reserved storages (4 pieces) of special figure 2, is executed. It suffices if it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 stored on hold during the latent state from being executed with a long-term fluctuation (about 10 minutes). By configuring the shortest fluctuation time to be four times or more longer than the longest fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb202fb2, the fluctuation pattern was set with reference to the normal table Bb202fb2. By the time the change (lottery) of the special figure 1 is completed, all the lottery of the special figure 2 stored on hold may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to digest the lottery of the special figure 2 which has been held and stored in a shorter period of time.

In addition, the special production period for displaying the result of the latent state is the period from the transition of the gaming state from the latent state to the normal state until all the lottery stored on hold in Special Figure 2 is exhausted (the lottery is executed). The third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the lottery result is a big hit is stored on hold during the latent state, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big hit is stopped and displayed during the special production period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, the effect display in the normal state is executed by configuring the effect display in the normal state to be executed after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memories of the special figure 2 are exhausted). It is advisable to prevent the lottery of Special Figure 2 from being executed (variation is executed) in the meantime. As a result, the state in which the special figure 2 is variablely displayed while the effect display in the normal state is being executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the state in which the proper game is not executed and the hall clerk. Can be determined. Therefore, the hall clerk can take appropriate measures for the player.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 270 (a). FIG. 270 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3. The probability change table b202fb3 is a table referred to when the gaming state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 270 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the same fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the probable change state regardless of the number of reserved balls and the hit / fail determination result. is doing. Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is a hit (big hit), the hit probability variation variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified, and when the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is wrong, it is specified. , Off-probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, a long fluctuation longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a short fluctuation shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 are set for each hit / fail judgment result. ing. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a hit (big hit), it hits the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)). Is associated with each other, and the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of "160 to 198".

When the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the small hit probability variation long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. A small hit probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of "160 to 198". Further, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is out of alignment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 159", and the probability variation long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with it. Out-of-probability short fluctuations (variation time 3 seconds) are associated with the range of "160 to 198".

Here, the relationship between the game content in the probabilistic state in the second control example and the fluctuation time set in each of the above-mentioned special figures (special figure 1 or special figure 2) will be described. In this second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 260, in the high probability state (120 times), the probability variation state in which the time reduction is given to the first 100 times is set, and in the high probability state. If the number of special drawing lottery exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot, the probability state is set so that the time reduction is not given.

Further, in the second control example, the distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing the right-handed game, balls are alternately generated at the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b. It is configured to enter the ball (see FIG. 258). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, since the fluctuation time is set so that the lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be executed together during the probable change state as described above, the first described above is performed. Unlike the control example, the right-handed game can be executed during the probability change state.

That is, in the second control example, a right-handed game is executed during the probability change state, and a game in which the ball is alternately entered into the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b is executed. Since the lottery between 1 and the special figure 2 is executed based on the set fluctuation time, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in which the fluctuation time is 3 seconds is continuously set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. It is possible to execute more lottery (variations) based on the special figure 2 than in FIG. 1, and on the other hand, by setting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 minutes as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is set. However, many lottery (variations) based on Special Figure 1 will be executed.

In this way, the game that gives the player a sense of tension is created by making the ratio of the special figure fluctuation (variation of the special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player different depending on the set fluctuation time. It will be possible to execute. In this control example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is composed of one type (10 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is composed of two types (3 seconds, 3 minutes), which is advantageous for the player. The shortest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of the special figure 2) is shorter than the shortest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of the special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player, and is advantageous to the player. It suffices if the maximum fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 2) is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player. A plurality of types of fluctuation times may be set for the figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2).

Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 1) on the side that is disadvantageous to the player, the player has a low probability (for example, only in the range of "1" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1). A variation time (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the maximum variation time of the special figure variation (variation of the special figure 2) on the advantageous side may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a probabilistic state in which a large number of special figure fluctuations (variations in special figure 2) that are advantageous to the player are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the second control example, the fluctuation time of each special figure in the probable change state is set regardless of the number of reserved balls, but the fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the number of reserved balls. However, for example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player may be lengthened as the number of reserved balls decreases. As a result, in order to execute many lottery of the special figure 2, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of reserved balls is always the upper limit.

In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the special figure stored in hold is determined, and the notification (look-ahead) suggesting the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the state of being stored in hold. It may be configured to execute (variable time notification). In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is small (for example, when the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1) as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the specific fluctuation type counter CS1 (for example, "10 to 30"). A long fluctuation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected, and a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set when the number of reserved balls is large (for example, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more). In this way, the player may be notified by the look-ahead fluctuation time notification that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 30" is reserved and stored. As a result, the player can more actively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

The contents described above are executed for the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) that is advantageous to the player, but the same technical idea is applied to the special figure variation that is disadvantageous to the player (special figure 1 variation). It may be configured to execute against (variation). Further, the reserved storage number referred to when the fluctuation time is changed according to the reserved storage number may refer to the total value of the reserved storage numbers in the special figures 1 and 2, and the fluctuation is executed. Only the number of reserved storages corresponding to the symbol type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) may be referred to.

In addition, in the probable change state, the number of special drawing lottery (number of fluctuations in special figure), which is the sum of the number of lottery in special figure 1 (number of fluctuations) and the number of lottery in special figure 2 (number of fluctuations), is 100 without winning a big hit. By exceeding the number of times, the gaming state is changed from the probable change state to the latent state. The advantage in the latent state can be different depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the latent state.

Next, the contents of the latency table b202fb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 270 (b). FIG. 270 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency table b202fb4. In the latent probability table b202fb4, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set shorter than that of the latent probability table 202f4 of the first control example described above, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set according to the number of reserved balls. There is a difference between the point of change and the point of changing the fluctuation time in Special Figure 2.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is a hit (big hit), the hit short variation (variation time 5 seconds) is specified, and when the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is wrong, it is specified. , Off-short fluctuation (variation time 5 seconds) is specified.

Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, when the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 is a hit (big hit), the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". The short variation A (variation time 1 second) is associated with the short variation A (variation time 1 second), and the short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 198" when the number of reserved balls is 0,2,3. .. Further, when the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the number of reserved balls is 1, and the small hit short variation A (variation time 1 second) is in the range of "0 to 198" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Is associated, the number of reserved balls is 0, 2, and 3, and the small hit short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 198". Further, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is out of the range, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198" regardless of the number of reserved balls, and the short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds. It is attached.

In this way, in the latent probability table b202fb4 referred to during the latent probability state, the timing at which the small hit is executed by setting a plurality of types of fluctuation times in the special figure 2 when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit. It is possible to suppress the game of firing a ball aiming at (so-called stop hitting).

Further, when the number of reserved balls is large (the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3), the set fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1). This is because when the number of reserved balls is large, a large number of balls have entered the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b, so that the balls enter each entry opening. It is in a state where a sufficient prize ball is paid out to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1), the number of balls entering the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b is small, so that the prize balls are sufficient for the player. Has not been paid out.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls is large (the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3), the variable time set is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1). It is possible to equalize the total number of prize balls, which is the sum of the number of prize balls paid out by entering the ball and the number of prize balls paid out by the small hit game. As a result, even if adjustments that are disadvantageous to the player (adjustment that makes it difficult for the ball to enter each entrance) are made to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to easily obtain a prize ball by a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being lowered.

Further, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0, the same fluctuation time as when the number of reserved balls is large (the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3) is set. .. This is for the player to shoot the ball at intervals and suppress the game aiming at a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a player who executes a malicious game with a game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by a small hit.

Further, in this control example, by executing the right-handed game, the second entrance 1640b in which the lottery of the special figure 2 advantageous to the player is executed and the right second lottery in which the lottery of the special figure 1 disadvantageous is executed. Since the balls are configured to enter the ball alternately into one entry port 64b, it is more suppressed that the game intentionally aiming only at the lottery of the special figure 2 in which a short fluctuation time is set is executed. can do.

In this second control example, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, two types of fluctuation times can be set according to the number of reserved balls, but there are various types of fluctuation times without limitation. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, different fluctuation times may be set for each number of reserved balls, or the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be divided and varied so that different fluctuation times are set even for the same number of reserved balls. You may set the time. Further, a different variable time may be set only for a predetermined number of special drawing lottery executed after the small hit game is completed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, the variable time set when the small hit is won may be long until the special drawing lottery is executed three times. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive prize balls from being paid out when the lottery for winning small hits is biased.

Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game (for example, the period until the lottery of the special figure is executed three times), a short variation is made when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more). It is preferable to set the time (for example, 0.5 second). By configuring in this way, the player can continuously execute the game. Further, the fluctuation time set in this case may be the same as the time of the interval between rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, when the small hits are continuously won, the variable winning device 65 can be changed as if the big hits were won, and the fun of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the second control example, the frequency at which the small hit game is executed in the latent probability state can be set based on the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2, so that the latent probability state can be set. We are trying to equalize the number of prize balls paid out inside (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small hit game), but as another configuration, the general drawing lottery It may be configured to set the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery based on the number of reserved storages. For example, if the number of reserved memories of the regular drawing lottery is large, it is easy for the ball to enter the distribution unit 660 (because it is easy for the ball to enter each entry opening), so that the fluctuation time of the regular drawing lottery is lengthened. If the number of reserved memories of the regular drawing lottery is small, it is better to set it so that the fluctuation time of the regular drawing lottery is shorter than when it is large. As a result, the degree of ball entry into the distribution unit 660 can be made uniform, and as a result, the number of prize balls paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the entry into each entry port). And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second control example.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the RAM 203 in the second control example, the second special symbol execution area 203b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p are deleted with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). At the same time, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 1640b. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 up to. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203bb has one execution area and four reservation areas, similarly to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203bb, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry opening 1640b (starting winning) is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a big hit is stopped (S1332 in FIG. 281), and the special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 275) (see S232 in FIG. 275). As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change (S233 in FIG. 275). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203bc of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 277) (S2801: Yes in FIG. 277), it is set to off (S2803 in FIG. 277). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is the same processing as the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit. Is executed and set to on.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to be turned on when the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit is stopped (S732 in FIG. 278), and the special symbol change processing 2 (FIG. 275) (see S232 in FIG. 275). Since the content referred to in this process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 280) that it is set to on (S2901: Yes in FIG. 280), it is set to off (S2903 in FIG. 280).

Next, with reference to FIG. 272 (a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 272 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the second control example.

As shown in FIG. 272 (a), the ROM 222 in the second control example partially includes the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 199 (a)). The difference is that the change is made and the additional effect selection table 222ba is added.

Here, the screen display selection 2 table 222b in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 272 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b. The screen display selection 2 table 222b is configured to select a screen display type in which the gaming state differs between the normal state and the probabilistic state with respect to the screen display selection table 222b of the first control example described above. The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been changed. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 272 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display content (screen display type) for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. The normal display is specified as. In this normal display, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in a normal mode (see FIG. 182 (b)). It is the display content. In the normal state, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation. Therefore, by setting the normal display, the main fluctuation can be surely displayed.

In the normal state, the demo display A is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. When the demo display A is determined, the demo display A screen (see FIG. 266 (a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the change of the special figure 1 which is the main change is completed, the demo display A screen (customer waiting demo screen) is switched to regardless of whether the sub change is being executed or not. By doing so, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640b and the long-time fluctuation display is started, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Later, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty stand, it is possible to start the game with the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. Further, since the special figure 2 is actually displayed in a variable manner on the demo display A screen, in order to make the player easily understand that the table is vacant, the small area Ds5 of the sub-display area Ds is set to ". "You can play" is displayed. As a result, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

In the normal state, the demo display B (see FIG. 266 (b)) is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both off. This makes it possible for other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine.

Next, for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off, or the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. Each is associated with a normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, since the game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed is executed in the probable change state, the special figure standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s) is executed for either special figure. , Special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to off, and the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the change of the special figure is stopped) for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the determination result of each is determined. And by setting the screen display type based on the currently set game state, the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure) in which the player expects the lottery result according to the game state as in the second control example. 2) For the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of changing the game property (the game property of changing the symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) which substantially changes according to the game state), the game is played in the current game state. It is possible to easily notify whether or not the fluctuation (main fluctuation) of the symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) expected by the person is executed.

In the probabilistic state, the special display A (see FIG. 267 (a)) is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both off. This makes it possible to suggest the current game status to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demo screen.

In the latent state, the display content is displayed for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on, or the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both on. A special display B (FIG. 267 (b)) is defined as a screen display type). This special display B is displayed in a state in which the special figure 2 which is a substantial fluctuation in the latent probability state has not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to on).

Next, the additional effect selection table 222ba in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222ba. In this additional effect selection table 222ba, the additional effect period (extracted) that occurs when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 db is set to on and the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure is stopped. It is a table referred to when selecting the type (additional effect type) of the additional effect to be executed in FIG. 261), and the length of the period (remaining fluctuation time) in which the additional effect can be executed and the acquired effect. An additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 223h.

Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (the period during which the additional effect can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect is added. "None" is selected as the type (see FIG. 262 (a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect A" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 262 (b)).

When the remaining fluctuation time (the period during which the additional effect can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is ". "Additional effect B" is selected (see FIG. 263 (a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect C" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 263 (b)).

When the remaining fluctuation time (the period during which the additional effect can be executed) is 15 seconds or more (period C) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is "additional effect". "C" is selected (see FIG. 263 (b)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect D" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 264).

As described above, in this control example, the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period (remaining fluctuation time) in which the additional effect can be executed. Therefore, for example, the remaining effect. If the fluctuation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the effect executed by the additional effect), the additional effect (for example, additional effect A) in which a part of the normal effect is changed is executed, and the remaining effect is executed. When the remaining fluctuation time is long so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the production performed during the fluctuation time (when the player can sufficiently grasp the content of the production performed by the additional production). In, an additional effect (for example, additional effect D) having a content different from that of the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example.

As shown in FIG. 274, the RAM 223 in the second control example has a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba and residual fluctuation time information with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 199 (b)). A storage area 223bb and an additional effect information storage area 223bc have been added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba is a counter updated based on the reserved ball number command regarding the second special symbol output from the main control device 110, and is the first special described above in the first control example. The only difference is that the counter is replaced with the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203d instead of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d with respect to the symbol reserved ball counter 223c, and the other elements are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb stores information on the remaining period (remaining fluctuation time) of the currently set fluctuation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110. It is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after the fluctuation is resumed.

When the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received in the temporary stop-related processing (see FIG. 286), the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb has a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (S4901: Yes in FIG. 286). The residual variation period is calculated (S4903 in FIG. 286), and the residual variation period information is set based on the length of the residual variation period (see S4907 to S4908 in FIG. 286). Then, in the fluctuation restart processing (see FIG. 287), when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001: Yes in FIG. 287) and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed. (S5002: No in FIG. 287), which is used to determine an additional effect type (S5003 in FIG. 287), after which the set residual variation period information is cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

The additional effect information storage area 223bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and the additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. The additional effect information storage area 223bc is read out when the determined additional effect type is set (S5005, S5006 in FIG. 287) in the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 287) and the additional effect command for display is set. (S5007 in FIG. 287) and then cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 283, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second control example replaces the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 209) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above. (See FIG. 275), Game state update process 2 (see FIG. 276) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 213), Start winning process 2 (see FIG. 282) instead of the start winning place (see FIG. 222), The difference is that the jackpot end process 2 (FIG. 283) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230), and the same process is executed otherwise. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second control example, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure), in addition to the first control example described above, The lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) is also configured to be on hold and memorable, and when both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are performing fluctuations at the same time, either one of them. When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is restarted after the hit game based on the hit of one special figure is completed. There is a big difference in the composition.

It should be noted that the point that the lottery of the special figure 2 is configured to be hold-stored and the control process based on the same are the same as the configuration and the control process of holding and storing the lottery of the special figure 1 described in the first control example described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S104) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit, and (S231). When it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (S231: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON (S232). .. In the process of S232, since one special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, it is determined whether the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the change is interrupted. When it is determined in the process of S232 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON (S232: Yes), the first corresponding to the temporary stop is the first. The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (S233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is performed. To finish. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S231, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S2311: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S234), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is not larger than 0 (0) (S234: No), the above-mentioned first control example The process proceeds to S238, which executes the same process as the first special symbol variation start process (S204), and then executes the variation process related to the special figure 2.

In the process of S234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is larger than 0 (S234: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 277.

After finishing the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time timer 203s in the special figure 1 is 0) (S236), and the variation time is set. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S236: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S238. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S236 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S236: No), the processing of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S238.

In the processes of S238 to S242, the same processes as those of S234 to S237 executed for the special figure 1 are executed. When the processing of S238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S238), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time timer 203t is not larger than 0 (0) (S238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is executed, and then this process ends. The second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is the same as the above-mentioned second special symbol variation start process 2 (see S217 in FIG. 215), and the subtraction process of the reserved storage number is added. Will be described later with reference to FIG. 279.

On the other hand, in the process of S238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (S238: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed. The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) executes the process in the special figure 2 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 280.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process (S240), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time timer 203t in the special figure 2 is 0) (S241), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S241: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S241 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307) will be described with reference to FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307). In the game state update process 2 (S307), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 with respect to the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the first control example described above. The difference is that a configuration has been added to set a status command that indicates the latent status when there is none. This is configured so that in the second control example, the number of time reductions (100 times) set in the probabilistic state is smaller than the number of times the probabilistic state is set (120 times). This is because when the number of lottery (variation) exceeds 100 times, the game state can be changed from the probable change state to the latent state without winning a big hit.

When the game state update process 2 (S307) is executed, first, the same processes as those of S601 to S608 of the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 213) are executed, and when the process of S608 is completed, the time is shortened next. It is determined whether the value of the counter 203g is 0 (S631), if it is determined to be 0 (S631: Yes), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is not 0 (1 or more) (S632: No), it is a probability variation state (that is, a latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given, so that it is a latent probability state. The status command indicating the above is set (S633), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 in the processing of S631 (S631: No), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 in the processing of S632 (S632: Yes). ) Skips the process of S633 and ends the present process as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S235). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol change execution processing (S235) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203bc of FIG. 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to be turned on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. be. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 275) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 bc is set to ON), the process of S231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S231 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the big hit (or small hit) game is in the state where the first special symbol change executing process (S235) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been suspended.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2801 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S2802), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203bc is set. The stop flag 203bc is set to off (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2801 that the temporary stop flag 203bc in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S2801: No), the processing of S2802 and S2803 is skipped and S2804 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2804, the special figure 1 variable time timer (special figure 1 variable timer) 203s is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S237) executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S237). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S237) executes the processing for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the above-mentioned first control example. ), When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, the change of the special figure 2 is interrupted (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted) instead of the configuration of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2. It is different in that it is provided.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit (S731), and it is not a big hit (it is a miss). ) (S731: No), the same process as S709 and S710 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S731, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S731: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to on (S732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203b is turned on. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the setting is made is set (S733). Then, the same processing as S706 and S708 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 2 (S239). In the second special symbol change start processing 2 (S239), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed.

In the second special symbol change start processing 2 (S239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON (S831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S831). : Yes), that is, the second special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 2) within the same process as the process in which the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to on in the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S237 in FIG. 278). When S239) of 279 is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol change start process 2 (S239 of FIG. 279) are skipped and the present process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the special figure 2 from starting at the same time (within the same process) as the timing when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the hit.

If it is determined in the process of S831 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is not set to on (set to off) (S831: No), then the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba The value (N2) of (N2) is acquired (S832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is a value larger than 0 (S833). In the process of S833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is larger than 0 (S833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is set. 1 Subtract (S834), and set the hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203ba after the subtraction. (S835).

The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) as in the first control example described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203ba from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223ba. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223ba according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the second special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203ba.

When the processing of S835 is completed, the data of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203bb is then shifted to the previous data (S836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S836 is completed, the same process as S804 to S807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 of FIG. 215) of the first control example described above is then executed, and this process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in the process of S833 that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is 0 (S833: No), the second special symbol change start of the above-mentioned first control example. The same process as S808 to S810 of the process (see S207 in FIG. 215) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S240). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON (S2901). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203db of Special Figure 2 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203b is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (big hit) while the special figure 2 is changing. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 275) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON), the process of S231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game is completed and it is determined in the process of S231 that the jackpot is not in progress, the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed. With this configuration, the jackpot game ends and the variable time is changed when the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation was interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 280, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db is set to ON (S2901: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 2 provisional stop flag 203db is set. The stop flag 203bd is set to off (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the temporary stop flag 203db in FIG. 2 is not set to on (set to off) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 203t is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S242) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S242). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S242) executes the process for stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and is the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above. In contrast to (see), when the lottery result of Special Figure 2 is a big hit, the change of Special Figure 1 is interrupted (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted) instead of the configuration for forcibly stopping the change of Special Figure 1. The difference is that the configuration is provided and the processing executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (S1331), and it is not a big hit (it is a miss). ) (S1331: No), and then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (S1334). When it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in the process of S1334 (S1334: No), the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1334, if it is determined that the hit is a small hit (S1334: Yes), then the small hit stop process is executed (S1335). In this small hit stop process, the same process as S1402 to S1406 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see S1304 in FIG. 221) of the first control example described above is executed. When this small hit stop process (S1335) is completed, the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1331, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on (S1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on. The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (S1333). Then, the same process as S1307 to 1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (S105). This start winning process 2 (S105) is different from the start winning process (see FIG. 222) of the first control example described above when a ball wins (wins) in the second entry port 1640b. It differs in that. Specifically, since the second control example has a configuration in which the lottery of the special figure 2 can be held and stored, when the ball wins (wins) in the second entry opening 1640b, the second special symbol holding ball The process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 203ba is executed.

Regarding the processing when the ball enters the second entrance 1640b, the ball wins the first entrance (entry) in the start winning process (see FIG. 222) of the first control example described above. Since the processing to be executed is different only in that the target of the processing is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. 283. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S2112). This jackpot end process 2 (S2112) differs from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230) of the first control example described above only in that the value set in the time saving counter 203 g is changed from 120 to 100, and the others. Since the processes of are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. As a result, in the second control example, the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state is less than the number of times (120 times) in which the probabilistic state is set. When the lottery (variation) of the special figure exceeds 100 times, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state to the latent state.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. (S4111 in FIG. 284) is executed, and the same processing is executed otherwise. Specifically, a process to be executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the first control example is added.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. 284. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4111). This command determination process 2 (S4111) is a process executed when a residual probability variation number command or a residual time reduction number command is received with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above, and a temporary stop. The processing to be executed when a related command is received has been added.

When the command determination process 2 (S4111) is executed, first, the same process as S4301 to S4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above is executed. Then, in the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has been received (S4317: Yes), then the remaining number update process 2 (S4318) is executed.

Here, the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 285. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4318). When this remaining number update process 2 (S4318) is executed, the same process as S4651 and S4652 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above is executed, and when the process of S4652 is completed, The same process as S4661 and S4662 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above is executed. That is, only the process of updating the information of the residual probability variation number area 223o and the effect probability variation number area 223q to the information corresponding to the value of the residual probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command output from the main control device 110 is executed. In this second control example as well, the same remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) as in the first control example described above may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 284, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4317, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has not been received (S4317: No), then it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received (S4331). Here, as the temporary stop related commands, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db to be turned on. The special figure 2 temporary stop command output to, the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to off, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203db are set to off. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation restart command that is output when this is the case.

If it is determined in the process of S4331 that a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4331: Yes), then the temporary stop-related process is executed (S4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received in the process of S4331 (S4331: No), the same process as S4319 of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (S4332) will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332). In this temporary stop-related process (S4332), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or special figure. (2) When the fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4332) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4901). : No), move to S4902 and execute the fluctuation resumption process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received in the processing of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). ). Then, it is determined whether the residual variation period calculated by the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined to be less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual variation in the residual variation time information storage area 223bb. A period A indicating that the period is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then it is determined whether the residual fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds (S4904: No). S4906), if it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), a period B indicating that it is a normal residual fluctuation period is set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb (S4907), and the process of S4902 is performed. Transition.

When it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the residual fluctuation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S4906: No), the period C indicating that the residual fluctuation period is long is set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb. It is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation period without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This variation resumption process (S4902) executes a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation resumption command or the special figure 2 variation resumption command is received.

When the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S5001: No). ), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command has been received in the processing of S5001 (S5001), then it is determined whether the fluctuation effect is currently being executed (S5002). .. In the processing of S5002, the variation effect executed for the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation (for example, 30 seconds) in accordance with the execution of the special map variation interrupts the special map variation (interrupts the subtraction of the special map variation time). , When the special figure change is restarted after the winning game is completed, it is determined whether the state is not completed.

If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation effect is being executed (S5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation effect is not being executed (S5002: No), then the residual variation time information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223bb is read out (S5003). The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222ba (S5004) based on the read-out residual fluctuation time information and the effect counter 223h, and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc. (S5005).

Then, when the processing of S5005 or S5006 is completed, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc is read (S5007), and the corresponding additional effect command for display is set for each read additional effect week. (S5008), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb and the additional effect information storage area 223bc is cleared (S5009), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this second control example, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is performed after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that displays the third symbol in a swinging manner is executed during the period until It is configured to be executed, but other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide an effect display more suitable for the player. Further, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the second control example described above, the other special figure change (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (special figure 1) by displaying the stop display of one special figure change (for example, special figure 2) with a symbol indicating a hit. The case where the subtraction of the figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure variation has already been completed at the time when the other special figure variation is restarted has been described (Fig.). 261), for example, a case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure change is not completed at the time when the other special figure change is restarted will be described with reference to FIG. 288.

FIG. 288 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure variation, and the effect display based on the variation of the special figure 1 (effect display using the third symbol) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. In the probabilistic state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 wins a small hit is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 288, the case where the normal effect (normal effect period 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the variation in the special figure 1 is restarted is shown. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 is resumed, the additional effect will be executed before the normal effect is completed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. The problem of being executed occurs. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 288, the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed, instead of executing the additional effect at the timing when the variation in the special figure 1 is restarted. It is configured in. In this way, by setting the timing at which the additional effect is executed to the normal effect end timing instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed without discomfort, and the player's willingness to play. Can be suppressed.

In this case, a means for determining the remaining period for determining the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption when the fluctuation in the special figure 1 is interrupted, and a means for determining the interruption period for determining the period during which the fluctuation in the special figure 1 is interrupted. , Whether or not the normal effect is being executed when it is determined by the restart determination means for determining that the special figure 1 fluctuation has been restarted and the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted. If it is determined by the effect status determination means that the normal effect has not been executed (already finished), the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means is provided. When it is determined that the additional effect execution means for executing the additional effect corresponding to the above and the normal effect are being executed, the execution of the additional effect is waited until the effect status determination means determines that the normal effect is completed. It is advisable to provide an additional effect execution standby means. With this configuration, the timing to execute the additional effect based on the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted and the end timing of the normal effect of the special figure 1 change (when the special figure 1 change is restarted or the normal effect ends). It is possible to set an appropriate timing as time), and it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the second control example, by providing the distribution unit 660 in the right-handed area of the game board 13, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed during the right-handed game. Similarly, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in which the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed during the right-handed game, other configurations may be used, and for example, the configuration as shown in FIG. 289 may be used. good.

Here, another example of the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 289. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the second control example. In another example of the second control example, the second ball entry port 1640 and the second ball entry are made in place of the distribution unit 660 with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 258) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The difference is that the electric accessory 1640a attached to the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the area at the lower center of the game board to the lower part of the right-handed area, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 289, in the pachinko machine 10 of this alternative example, the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 is provided so that the ball launched by the right-handed game can enter the ball. There is. With this configuration, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed in the game state (probability change state or latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed. Further, as in the distribution unit 660 of the second control example described above, the lottery (variation) of the special figure 1 is executed and the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 is executed. Since there is no mechanism for distributing the ball alternately to the ball entry port (second ball entry port 1640b), the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. The rate of spheres can be random. As described above, in the second control example, the degree of advantage to the player is different between the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2. Therefore, in this another example, the ball fired by the right-handed game is the second. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether the ball enters the 1-entry port 64 or the 2nd entry-in 1640, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced. Further, the ratio of the balls launched in the right-handed game to flow down (roll) toward the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 1640 is determined by, for example, a nail planted in the game board 13. Since it can be changed by adjusting, the ratio of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation in the special figure variation executed during the right-handed game can be easily adjusted.

As described above, in the second control example, the number of times (100) in which the time saving state is set is smaller than the number of times (120 times) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the probabilistic state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Further, since the lottery based on the special figure 1 and the lottery based on the special figure 2 can be executed in the latent probability state, it is possible to suppress a state in which the player is excessively advantageous in the latent probability state.

In this second control example, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and the symbol showing the lottery result of that hit is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the winning is confirmed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the timing when the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol ends (for example). At the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol becomes possible), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted is restarted.

Here, when the special symbol variation is interrupted (measurement of the special symbol variation time is interrupted), the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously executed. If this is the case, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation ends, and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 are terminated. There is a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs between the timing of the operation.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the timing at which the restarted special symbol variation ends and the timing at which the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. In addition, when an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs, an additional effect (specific effect) can be executed using the error period. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 303. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state is different. Specifically, the point that the display control of the remaining number of productions displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 has been changed, and the winning (big hit or small hit) during the latency. There is a difference between the point that the effect display that is executed at the time of the operation is added and the point that the other effect display is changed so as to correspond to the contents of the above two points.

In the first control example described above, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the same number of times as the internally set probability variation number (120 times) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. However, the remaining number of probable changes internally set each time the special figure change is executed (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probable change number) and the remaining number of times for the effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability change number). Hereinafter, the configuration is such that (referred to as the number of residual probability changes in the production) is updated (subtracted). In addition, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping whether the player has won the big hit in which the actual residual probability variation number is set again or the small hit in which the actual residual probability variation number is not set in the latent probability state. If a hit (big hit or small hit) is won during the probability state, it is configured so that the effect of returning the production residual probability change number to the initial value (120 times) and the effect of not returning it can be executed, and the actual number of residual probability changes and the effect residual probability change. The number of times was different, and it was configured to give the player a sense of expectation until the end. When the number of production residual probability changes is "0" in a state where the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of production residual probability changes are different (for example, the number of production residual probability changes is "0" and the actual number of production residual probability changes is "10". In the case of "), the revival effect (see FIG. 189) is executed, and the number of times corresponding to the actual number of remaining probability changes ("10 times ") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to expect the player to continue the latent state even when the number of times display displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes "0".

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the number of times is less than the number of probability changes (120 times) set internally. (For example, "100 times") is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual residual probability variation number different from the effect residual probability variation number (display the production residual probability variation number less than the actual residual probability variation number). In the state, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect of adding the number of residual probability variations of the effect. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times It is configured to subtract the number of residual probability changes displayed in the display area D1, but for example, when the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is changed in the latent probability state. May be configured so that the number of residual probability changes is not subtracted. In this case, as in this control example, the number of residual probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing of starting the latent state (timing when the latent state is set) is displayed less than the actual number of residual probability changes. As a result, even if the number of production residual probability changes is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player, the number of production residual probability changes may be larger than the actual number of residual probability changes. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third control example, the jackpot game when the jackpot with the actual residual probability variation number set to the initial value (120 times) as the lottery result of the special figure is won, and the actual residual probability variation number as the lottery result of the special figure. Is not set to the initial value (120 times). When a small hit is won, an additional effect is executed in which the number of remaining probability changes of the effect is added a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured in. As a result, whether or not the actual probability variation number is reset to the initial value (120 times) when the winning game (the game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state (during the latent probability state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not he / she has won the special figure jackpot).

Further, in the third control example, the timing at which the latent probability state is started (the timing at which the latent probability state is set) and the actual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state. In order to fill the difference between the above and the case, an additional effect of adding the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is executed as a special figure variation effect during the latent probability state. As a result, the number of remaining production probability changes can be added at various timings during the latent probability state, so whether or not the actual probability change number is reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent probability state (latent probability state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not the special figure jackpot was won).

Further, in the third control example, the number of additions (the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1) displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, winning game execution timing). The value of (the number of times to be added to) is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual number of probability changes and the number of residual probability changes in the effect (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the number of remaining probability changes in the effect is greatly added by the additional effect, it makes the player think that he has won the special figure jackpot in which the actual number of probability changes is the initial (120 times) during the latent state. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the number of residual probability changes in the effect from becoming "0" in a state where the actual number of probability changes in the effect and the number of residual probability changes in the effect are largely different.

Further, in the first control example described above, a hit game (for example, a ball out of a big hit game) is played during the latent state so that the player does not know that the player has won the hit (big hit or small hit) during the latent state. Even if a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of hits is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to execute the effect display indicating the hit game, and the actual probability change number is initially set at any timing in the latent probability state. It was configured to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot set to the value (120 times) was won.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) executed when the player wins a hit (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of balls among the big hit games) during the latent state. As a winning effect executed during the winning game), the display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 293). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the hit game is executed during the latent state. The details of the winning effect performed during the winning game will be described later, but the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when the ball enters the variable winning device 65) is paid out. The ratio of the display mode for displaying the number of prize balls) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different between the case where the big hit game is executed and the case where the small hit game is executed. .. As a result, even if a big hit is won in which the number of balls that win the variable winning device 65 in one hit game is larger than that in the small hit game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It is possible to do the same as the hit-and-middle production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the hit game will be executed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to know (display) whether the hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game. The player can play the latent state while having expectations until the end.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, the actual residual probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is in the latent probability state and the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. The transition of the number of probable changes will be explained. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the flow in the latent state in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the jackpot game in which the jackpot B or the jackpot D is won is executed when the game state is the normal state, the actual remaining probability change number is "120 times" at the end timing (during the ending) of the jackpot game. Is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays an indication that the state shifts to the latent probability state, and "100 times" is displayed as the effect residual probability change number in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291). ..

Then, when the game in the latent probability state is started, the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of residual probability changes in the effect are subtracted "once" each time the special figure change is executed. In this control example, as in the first control example, the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of effect residual probability changes are subtracted at the timing when the special figure change starts, so that the first special figure change in the latent probability state is executed. During the period, "99 times" is displayed as the number of remaining probability changes in the effect in the remaining number display area D1.

After that, when the special figure change (lottery) is executed and the small hit is won in the 14th special figure change (the special figure change in which "86th" is displayed as the number of residual probability changes in the production) in the latent probability state, the actual balance remains. The small hit game is started while maintaining the probability variation number of "106 times". If the third symbol display device 81 executes an additional effect A (an effect of adding (adding) the value of the remaining probability variation number of effects "5 times") as an effect display during this small hit game, the remaining number of times is executed. The value of the number of residual probability changes displayed in the display area D1 is additionally displayed from the "86th time" to the "91st time" (see FIG. 291 (b)). In this way, during the winning game (small hit game) executed when the winning is won (when the small hit is won) when the actual residual probability change number is not changed (not reset), the value of the effect residual probability change number is set. By executing the effect of adding (additional effect), it is possible to make the player expect that the actual number of residual probability changes has been reset by this winning game.

Then, when the small hit game is completed, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (the special map variation corresponding to the actual residual probability variation number "105 times" and the effect residual probability variation number "90") is continuously started. Next, if a jackpot is won with a special figure variation in which the actual number of residual probability changes is "30" (a special figure variation in which the number of production residual probability changes is "15"), the timing at which the jackpot game starts. The actual number of residual probability changes is set to "0 times". The number of residual probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to "0 times", and the content indicating "15 times" is continuously displayed. When the game shifts to the latent state again after the jackpot game ends, "120 times" is reset as the actual residual probability variation number at the timing when the jackpot game ends. In addition, during the big hit game, the additional effect is executed as the effect display of the third symbol display device 81 as in the small hit game, and the additional effect C (the value of the remaining probability variation of the effect is set to "20". When the effect of adding (adding) the number of times is executed, the value of the remaining probability variation number of the effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "15 times" to "35 times".

Although details will be described later, in this control example, regardless of the type of hit (big hit or small hit), the addition is made based on the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number and the acquired effect counter 223f value. It is configured to determine the number of additions (number of additions) displayed in the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the hit game is a small hit game or a big hit game depending on the content of the additional effect executed during the hit game.

Next, when the jackpot game is completed, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (substantial residual probability variation number "119") is started. The additional effect D is executed during this special figure change, and the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is additionally displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". As described above, in the third control example, the effect of adding (adding) the value of the effect residual probability change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed even during the special figure change in the latent probability state. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to predict the actual number of residual probability changes, and to play a game while expecting how long the latent state will continue.

In addition, by making it possible to execute the additional effect even during the change of the special figure, the value of the remaining number of change of the effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the hit game and the change of the special figure during the latent probability state. Can be added (added). Therefore, since the number of times the additional effect is executed can be increased, even if the value between the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of residual probability changes of the effect greatly deviates (when the difference value is large), the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to make it easier to converge the value without giving it. Further, in the third control example, the number of additions (number of additions) displayed in the addition effect is determined based on the difference value between the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of effect residual probability changes. Since the configuration is such that the larger the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number, the larger the production residual probability variation number is added (added), the value can be increased without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It can be made easier to converge.

Then, the additional effect D is executed, and the additional effect (addition effect B) is executed again at the next fluctuation when the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes "74 times", which is substantially the same. The number of residual probability changes is "118 times" and the number of production residual probability changes is "83 times". After that, when the fluctuation that the number of remaining probability changes of the production becomes "1 time" without winning is completed, the number of remaining probability changes of the production "???" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the final production display, and the actual number of remaining probability changes is actually changed. It is displayed continuously until it reaches "0 times". With this configuration, even if the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of production residual probability changes do not finally match, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the third control example, "???" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display, but as in the first control example described above, the value of the remaining number of effects changes. When is "0 times", the value of the actual residual probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (in the example of FIG. 290, "35 times" is displayed). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual residual probability variation number when the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "0 times". With this configuration, it is possible for the player to play the latent state with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 291 and 292, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 regarding the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example becomes the latent state will be described. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 291 (a), a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 291 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), when it is confirmed that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the end of the jackpot (when V winning is performed in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state by winning V during the jackpot game). , The remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and "100 times" is displayed as the effect residual probability variation number (see point A in FIG. 290). Then, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the characters "RUSH rush" that informs the transition to the latent state and the character 811 that imitates the rabbit used for the display during the latent state shift to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you on doing so. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot game is completed.

In this third control example, the above-mentioned display is executed on the jackpot end screen, but when it is confirmed that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned display is executed. It may be configured in. Further, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in the third control example, the jackpot game ends depending on the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, instead of the configuration in which the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends by winning a V during the jackpot game. A configuration in which a probabilistic state is given later may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291 (b), the display screen during the hit game (during the small hit game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 291 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a hit game. As shown in FIG. 291 (b), even when a small hit game or a big hit game is executed during the latent state, the character 811 continues to move from the left side to the right side of the screen as in the case of the special figure change. Is executed. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time, the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“5 times” in FIG. 291 (b)), and the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect is added by “5 times” to display “95 times” (FIG. 290). See point B). Further, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value (“5 times”) of the number of residual probability variations of the effect added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

As described above, in the third control example, the additional effect executed in the latent state is executed by using a part of the effect (the effect of moving the character 811) that is always executed in the latent state. Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the number of residual probability changes (“5 times”) can be added (added) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

FIG. 292 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see the point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the change of the special map in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 292 (a), the effect of moving the character 811 from the left side to the right side of the screen is executed during the special figure change. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time, the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“40 times” in FIG. 292 (a)), and the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect is added by “40 times” to display “74 times” (FIG. 290). See point D). Further, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value (“40 times”) of the number of residual probability variations of the effect added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

As described above, as described with reference to FIGS. 291 (b) and 292 (a), the value of the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 during the winning game and during the fluctuation of the special figure in the latent probability state is set. An additional effect of adding (adding) is executed. Then, since the additional effect executed during the hit game and the additional effect executed during the special figure change are executed in the same effect mode, it is a special figure whether the additional effect currently executed is in the hit game. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the game is changing.

Further, since the display form of the value is different according to the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect added (added) by the additional effect (the display form of "+5" in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 292 (a). ), The effect of the additional effect can be visually notified to the player. It should be noted that an effect display suggesting the value of the effect residual probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect may be executed. For example, the value of the effect residual probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect is stored. The display form of the existing "treasure box" may be changed according to the added value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292 (b), the final effect executed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 292 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. This final effect is performed when the value of the actual residual probability variation number is larger than "0 times" and the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is "0 times". Therefore, it is an effect of displaying "???" as the value of the effect residual probability change number until the remaining actual residual probability change number is exhausted. As a result, even if the values of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number are different, the effect in the latent state can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed as an effect suggesting that the latent probability state ends in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to visually suggest to the player the possibility that the latent state will end, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Further, "pinch" is displayed in the display area D4 as a character suggesting that the latent state is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the display contents during the game per latent state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 293 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the hit effect in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 293, when the hit game is executed during the latent state and the ball wins the variable winning device 65, the winning display mode 815 indicating that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 is displayed. To. The winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side (see 815c in FIG. 293) of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to the left side (see 815b in FIG. 293) through the upper center and is enlarged. It is stopped and displayed in this state (see 815a in FIG. 293). In the prize display mode 815, a value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable prize device 65 (“15” in this control example) is displayed, and the variable prize device 65 is displayed for the player. It is configured so that the player can be notified of the winning of the ball and the number of prize balls paid out by the winning.

Further, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in one winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning display is displayed until the one winning game is completed. The aspect 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, other configurations may be used as the display method of the prize display mode 815, and for example, the prize display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this control example, the winning display mode 815 is not displayed corresponding to all the balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but the type of the winning game (big hit game or small hit game). ) And whether or not to execute the display of the winning display mode 815 based on the winning number information during the winning game, and when it is determined that the winning display mode 815 is to be displayed, the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed. It is configured. With this configuration, even if the ease of winning the ball to the variable winning device 65 differs depending on the type of winning game (when the period during which the variable winning device 65 is opened is different). Even so), since it is possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game is based on the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent a person from grasping the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit game).

In this control example, as a prize display mode, a value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable prize device 65 (“15” in this control example) is displayed. For example, the variable winning device 65 may be configured to divide (for example, "10" and "5") into a plurality of values corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won. This makes it possible to set a plurality of patterns for the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed with respect to the number of balls winning in the variable winning device 65. Further, even if the player has a variable winning device in which the number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of winning is different, the player can win the game by displaying the value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out separately. It is possible to suppress grasping (big hit game or small hit game). Further, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be different depending on the winning type. Specifically, in the case of a winning type (for example, per 15R) in which a large number of prizes can be expected, the winning display mode 815 is the third symbol rather than the winning type (for example, per 7R) in which the winning is less than that. It is preferable to set so that the period until the display is displayed on the display device 81 is long. As a result, even if the winning type is determined by the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the period until the determination can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the first winning game ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294 (a), the ROM 222 in the third control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect table 222ca and a winning effect table 222cc are added. do.

First, with reference to FIG. 295 (a), the details of the additional effect table 222ca in the third control example will be described. FIG. 295 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table 222ca in this control example. The additional effect table 222ca is a table referred to when determining the type of the additional effect executed during the latent probability state, and is acquired as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of times of the effect residual probability change. The type of additional effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. This additional effect is an effect of adding (adding) the value of the residual probability variation number of the effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent probability state, and is a different value for each type of the additional effect. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) in the latent probability state, the additional effect table 222ca determines that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual residual probability variation number (FIG. 299). S5103: Yes), and when the hit ending command is received during the latent state (see S5218 in FIG. 300).

As shown in FIG. 295 (a), the additional effect table 222ca in this control example is set so that the additional effect type selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number is different. Has been done. Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional effect is executed. However, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 179", the additional effect A (addition number + 5) is set as the additional effect. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "180 to 198", the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

When the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the additional effect is not executed and the effect is produced. When the value of the counter 223f is "50 to 149", the additional effect A (addition number +5) is set as the additional effect. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

Further, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number is "81 or more" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional effect C (addition) is added as an additional effect. The number of times + 20) is set. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 198", the additional effect D (addition number + 40 times) is set as the additional effect.

As described above, in this control example, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number is calculated, and the type of additional effect is selected based on the calculated difference value. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional effect suitable for the display state of the remaining probability variation number of the effect in the latent probability state. In addition, the larger the difference between the value of the actual residual probability variation and the value of the effect residual probability variation, the easier it is to execute the additional effect. Therefore, the value of the actual residual probability variation and the value of the effect residual probability variation are large. When there is a divergence (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that a large value of the actual residual probability variation number remains even though the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "0". can.

Further, in this control example, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number value, the larger the value added (added) in one additional effect is set. As a result, when the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number greatly deviate (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, even though the value of the number of residual probability changes in the effect is "0", a large value of the actual number of residual probability changes remains, which suppresses the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect display in the latent state. be able to.

Next, the winning effect table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (b). FIG. 295 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table 222cc. This winning effect table 222cc is referred to when deciding whether or not to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when the ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed during the latent state. In the table to be played, the presence or absence of a winning effect is determined based on the winning / failing determination result (winning type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 223f. This winning effect is an effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG. 293 on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, if the winning / failing judgment result is a jackpot A to E and a jackpot G (that is, a jackpot that can be expected to come out) and the number of winning balls is 1 or 2nd, it does not matter the value of the production counter 223f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect "Yes" is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the winning game is being executed.

If the number of winning balls is the third prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "5 to 198". In the case of "," the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

If the number of winning balls is the fourth prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 119", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "120 to 198". In the case of "," the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

If the number of winning balls is the fifth prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 189", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "5 to 198". In the case of "," the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is 6 or more and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 193", the winning effect "None" is selected and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "194 to". In the case of "198", the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

Next, when the hit / fail judgment result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot for which no balls can be expected), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and further regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65. Further, even when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, the effect counter is irrespective of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more) and the value of the effect counter 223f (acquired effect counter) as in the case of the jackpot F described above. When the value of 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65.

As described above, in this control example, the player that the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is executed during the latent state is determined by the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. It is possible to notify to. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the hit game has occurred during the latent state.

Further, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is different depending on the type of the winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

Further, in this control example, the hit game executed during latency is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual residual probability variation number can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the game is completed, or the value of the actual residual probability variation number. In order to prevent the player from easily identifying whether or not the small hit game is unchanged, the big hit game (big hits A to E, where the ball is easier to win the variable winning device 65 than the small hit game). In and G), it is set so that the winning effect becomes more difficult to be executed as the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 increases. As a result, even if a large number of balls are actually won in the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls are won than the number of balls won in the small hit game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of the winning game by the number of times of the winning effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent state (cumulative value of the number of prize balls paid out in each game executed while the latent state continues) is displayed in the third symbol display device. The configuration displayed in 81 may be used. When such a configuration is used, the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of winning balls may be displayed according to the number of times the winning effect is executed. It may be configured to add. In this case, the actual cumulative value and the cumulative value on the display will differ by the number of winning balls for which the winning effect has not been executed. Therefore, a means for storing the difference in the cumulative value is provided, for example, small. When the winning game is executed, it is preferable to execute the winning effect without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and to enable the provisional winning effect to converge the difference in the cumulative values. As a result, the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of prize balls can be displayed without discomfort. Further, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display the winning display mode 815 equal to or greater than the number of balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the winning display mode 815. It is possible to further prevent the player from identifying the type of the winning game by the number of times the winning effect is executed (the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed).

Returning to FIG. 294 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294 (b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a residual probability variation number display flag 223ca, an additional effect flag 223 cc, and an additional effect type storage area 223 cc for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. Has been added.

The remaining probability change number display flag 223ca is a flag for indicating the period during which the effect residual probability change number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on. When it is set, the number of residual probability changes is displayed. This residual probability change number display flag 223ca determines that the hit ending command has been received in the hit-related command process 2 (see FIG. 301) (S5207: Yes in FIG. 301), and then the hit game this time. When it is determined that it is a hit to shift the gaming state to the latent state after the end (S5209: Yes in FIG. 301), and further, when it is determined that the remaining probability change number display flag 223ca is not set to ON (FIG. FIG. 301 S5210: Yes), set to on (S5213 in FIG. 301), and similarly, in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 301), it is determined whether or not the current hit game is a hit game in which an additional effect can be executed. It is referred to at the time (S5210 in FIG. 301). Then, in the state command process 2 (see FIG. 300), when a state command indicating the transition from the latent state to the normal state is received (S4531: Yes in FIG. 300), the game state is set to off (FIG. 300). 300 S4532).

The addition effect flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the addition effect based on the special figure variation is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display setting process is performed when the addition effect is set to ON. When 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, the additional effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4736 in FIG. 304) executed in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) (FIG. 303). 304 S4813). This additional effect flag 223 bb is set to on (S5108 in FIG. 299) when the additional effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5106: Yes in FIG. 299). 2 It is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 304) (S4809 in FIG. 304), and when it is determined that it is set to on (S4809: Yes in FIG. 304), it is set to off (S4810 in FIG. 304). , Additional effects are set.

The additional effect type storage area 223 cc is an area for setting the additional effect type selected with reference to the additional effect table 222ca, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional type is the special figure 2 variation start processing (FIG. 304). It is configured to be executed in (see). In the additional effect type storage area 223cc, the type of the additional effect selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) is set (S5107 in FIG. 299), and the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 304) is set. When it is determined that the additional effect flag 223 cab is set to ON (S4809: Yes in FIG. 304), the additional effect based on the set type of the additional effect is set (S4812 in FIG. 304).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third control example is the first winning process (see FIG. 228) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above. The first winning process 2 (see FIG. 296) is performed instead of the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 296), and the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 234) is performed instead of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 232). 297) is executed, and the same processing is executed otherwise. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first winning process 2 (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (S2113). The first winning process 2 (S2113 in FIG. 296) is the same as the first winning process (see FIG. 231) in the first control example described above, in which the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening) is used during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10. The process based on the ball that won the prize in 65a) is executed.

When the first winning process 2 (S2113) is executed, the same processing as in S2401 to S2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 231) of the first control example described above is executed. Then, when the processing of S2404 is completed, the winning command is set (S2431), and then the same processing as in S2405 to S2411 of the first winning processing (see FIG. 231) described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. In the first winning process 2 (S2113), by setting a winning command, a ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 during the big hit game. Information about can be output.

Information regarding the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is given to this winning command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, the winning command processing described later will be performed. (See FIG. 302) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect (see FIG. 293) during the winning game.

Next, the second winning process 2 (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (S2513). The second winning process 2 (S2513) is the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10 as in the second winning process (see FIG. 234) in the first control example described above. Processing based on the winning ball is executed.

When the second winning process (S2513) is executed, the same processing as S2701 to S2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) described above is executed. Then, when the processing of S2704 is completed, the winning command is set (S2731), and then the same processing as in S2705 to S2711 of the above-mentioned second winning processing (see FIG. 234) is executed, and this processing is terminated. In the second winning process 2 (S2513), by setting a winning command, the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) is won from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 during the small hit game. Information about the sphere can be output.

Information regarding the number of balls won during the small hit game is given to this winning command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, the winning command processing described later (see FIG. 302). ) Is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect (see FIG. 293) during the winning game.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 298 to 304, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example is a command determination process 3 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. (S4111 in FIG. 298), the variation display setting process 2 (S4112 in FIG. 303) is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243), and the same processing is executed otherwise.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4111). This command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main control device 110 are received, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example described above.

The command determination process 3 (S4111) receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command for the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above (S4306: Yes in FIG. 298), and the special figure 2 When the variation setting process (S4351 in FIG. 299) is executed and the status command is received (S4313: Yes in FIG. 298), the status command process 2 (see FIG. 240) is replaced with the status command process 2 (FIG. 300). (See) is executed, a process for determining that a hit-related command has been received (S4352 in FIG. 298), and a hit-related command when a hit-related command is received (S4352: Yes in FIG. 298). The difference is that the process (see FIG. 301) is executed, and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S4111) is executed, first, the processes S4301 to S4306 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. Then, in the process of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation setting process is executed (S4351).

Here, the special figure variation setting process 2 (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351). In the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351), the process of setting the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e to ON (S5101) and the reception are the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. A process (S5102) for extracting a variation pattern command from the command is executed, and a process (S5103 to S5108) for determining whether or not to execute an additional effect (see FIG. 292 (a)) is executed.

First, when the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to on (S5101), and then the variation pattern command is extracted from the received commands (S5102). .. The process of S5101 described above is the same as the process of S4307 of the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238), and the process of S5102 is the command determination process of the first control example described above (FIG. FIG. Since it is the same as the processing of S4308 (see 238), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the number of residual probability changes set in the residual probability variation number area 223o (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability variation number) and the residual probability variation number set in the production probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the production residual probability variation number) are It is compared and discriminated (S5103). In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual residual probability variation number, that is, the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the residual number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined that the value is less than the number of residual probability changes actually set (the number of residual probability changes updated in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the main control device 110), and the additional effect can be executed. If this is the case (S5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (S5104), and then the additional effect table 222cc is referred to to obtain the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number. The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of S5104 (S5105).

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect is not less than (same or more) than the value of the number of probability changes of the actual residual probability, that is, the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that this cannot be done (S5103: No), this process is set as it is.

After finishing the process of S5105, it is next determined whether or not the additional effect is selected (S5106). When no additional effect is selected in the process of S5106, that is, in the process of S5105, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and is acquired. When the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "41-80", the acquired effect counter 223h value. When is "0 to 49" (S5106: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the additional effect is selected (S5106: Yes), the type of the selected additional effect is set in the additional effect type storage area 223cc (S5107), and the additional effect flag 223cc is set. Set it on (S5108) and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 298, the description will be continued. In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4306), then it is the same as S4309 to S4318 of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. Executes the processing of. Then, in the process of S4317, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has not been received (S4317: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S4352).

In the process of S4352, when it was determined that the hit-related command was not received (S4352: No), the other commands were responded to in the same manner as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238). Various processes are executed (S4319), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4352: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4353). This hit-related command process (S4353) is a process executed when each command related to the hit output from the main control device 110 is output, and specifically, a hit game (big hit game or small hit). The opening command output when the game) is started, the round start command output when a new round game is started in the big hit game, and the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) are executed. Winning command output based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, the ending command output when the ending period starts in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game), and other commands related to winning. It is executed when it is determined that (V winning command or the like) is output (received) from the main control device 110.

When the hit-related command processing (S4353) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S5201), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), then Set the display opening command (S5202). On the other hand, in the process of S5201 when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S5201: No), it is determined whether the round start command has been received next (S5203).

If it is determined in the process of S5203 that a round start command has been received (S5203), a display round command is set (S5204), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5203, if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S5205). This winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see S2113 in FIG. 296) and the second winning process 2 (see S2513 in FIG. 297) executed in the main control device 110, and is a big hit. This command is output based on the fact that a ball has entered the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during a game or a small hit game. It should be noted that this winning winning command includes information on the number of winning balls and information that can be identified as the type of winning game being executed (big hit type or small hit type).

Here, the winning command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S5206).

When the winning command processing (S5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (S5301), and then whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state. Is determined (S5302). When it is determined that the state is not latent (S5302: No), the winning effect is selected (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5302 that it is in the latent state (S5302: Yes), when selecting the winning effect to be executed in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state. The value of the effect counter 223h to be used is acquired (S5303), and the winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the winning effect table 222cc (S5304).

After the processing of S5304 or the processing of S5305 is completed, it is next determined whether the winning effect is selected (S5306), and if it is determined that the winning effect is selected (S5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is shown. A winning effect command for display is set (S5307), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5306 that the winning effect is not selected (S5306: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the variation display setting process 2 (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4112). In the variation display setting process 2 (S4112), the process of updating the display content of the number of residual probability variations of the effect and the additional effect flag 223 cab are turned on for the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above. When it is set to, a process for executing an additional effect has been added. The other identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the variable display setting process 2 (S4112), the same process as S4701 to S4704 of the variable display setting process (FIG. 243) of the first control example is executed, and when the process of S4704 is completed, the state setting area 223i is set. Based on the information being done. It is determined whether the present is in a latent state (S4731).

In the process of S4731, if it is determined that the current state is not the latent state (S4731: No), the process of updating the number of residual probability changes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state (S4732 to S4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4731: Yes), then the number of remaining production probability changes set in the production probability variation number area 223p is subtracted by 1 (S4732) and subtracted. It is determined whether the value of the effect residual probability variation number is larger than 0 (S4733). In the process of S4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is larger than 0, that is, "once" or more in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81. When the effect residual probability variation number is displayed (S4733: Yes), the display residual probability variation number command is set based on the value of the effect residual probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4734).

On the other hand, in the process of S4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is not larger than 0 (0) (S4733: No), then the actual residual probability variation number area 223o is set. It is determined whether the value of the number of residual probability changes is larger than 0 (S4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect residual probability variation number is 0, but the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not 0 (1 or more).

If it is determined in the processing of S4735 that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not larger than 0 (0) (S4735: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4734 described above, and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is used. Based on this, a display residual probability variation number command (that is, a command for indicating "0 times" in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S4734). Then, the process proceeds to S4705.

On the other hand, in the process of S4735, when it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is larger than 0 (S4735: Yes), a display residual probability variation number command indicating the effect residual probability variation number "???" is set (S4735: Yes). S4736), the process proceeds to S4705. By doing so, in a situation where the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not 0, when the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the residual number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes "0 times". Instead of displaying "0 times", "???" can be displayed (see FIG. 292 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent probability state continues even after "0 times" is displayed as the number of residual probability changes in the effect. In addition, by setting the number of residual probability changes to "???", the player can be made to play the game while predicting how long the latent state will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set on (set to off) (S4701: No), it is determined that the processing of S4731 is not in the latent state. After the case (S4731: No) and the process of S4734 or the process of S4736 are completed, the same process as S4705 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is then executed.

If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4705: Yes), then the special figure 2 variation start process is executed (S4737). The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4737) will be described later with reference to FIG. 304.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not set to on (set to off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4737) is skipped. The process proceeds to the process of S4709, the same process as S4709 to S4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third control example, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the number of times is less than the number of probability changes (120 times) set internally (120 times). For example, "100 times") is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual residual probability variation number different from the effect residual probability variation number (display the production residual probability variation number less than the actual residual probability variation number). In the state, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect of adding the number of residual probability variations of the effect. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times It is configured to subtract the number of residual probability changes displayed in the display area D1, but for example, when the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is changed in the latent probability state. May be configured so that the number of residual probability changes is not subtracted. In this case, as in this control example, the number of residual probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing of starting the latent state (timing when the latent state is set) is displayed less than the actual number of residual probability changes. As a result, even if the number of production residual probability changes is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player, the number of production residual probability changes may be larger than the actual number of residual probability changes. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third control example, the jackpot game when the jackpot with the actual residual probability variation number set to the initial value (120 times) as the lottery result of the special figure is won, and the actual residual probability variation number as the lottery result of the special figure. Is not set to the initial value (120 times). When a small hit is won, an additional effect is executed in which the number of remaining probability changes of the effect is added a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured in. As a result, whether or not the actual probability variation number is reset to the initial value (120 times) when the winning game (the game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state (during the latent probability state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not he / she has won the special figure jackpot).

Further, in the third control example, the timing at which the latent probability state is started (the timing at which the latent probability state is set) and the actual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state. In order to fill the difference between the above and the case, an additional effect of adding the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is executed as a special figure variation effect during the latent probability state. As a result, the number of remaining production probability changes can be added at various timings during the latent probability state, so whether or not the actual probability change number is reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent probability state (latent probability state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot was won.

Further, in the third control example, the number of additions (the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1) displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, winning game execution timing). The value of (the number of times to be added to) is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual number of probability changes and the number of residual probability changes in the effect (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the number of remaining probability changes in the effect is greatly added by the additional effect, it makes the player think that he has won the special figure jackpot in which the actual number of probability changes is the initial (120 times) during the latent state. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the number of residual probability changes in the effect from becoming "0" in a state where the actual number of probability changes in the effect and the number of residual probability changes in the effect are largely different.

In this third control example, during a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) executed when a hit is won in a latent state (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of balls among the big hit games). As a winning effect to be executed, the display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 293). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the hit game is executed during the latent state. Then, as a winning effect executed during this winning game, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The display mode) is configured to be different between the case where the big hit game is executed and the case where the small hit game is executed. As a result, even if a big hit is won in which the number of balls that win the variable winning device 65 in one hit game is larger than that in the small hit game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It is possible to do the same as the hit-and-middle production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the hit game will be executed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to know (display) whether the hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game. The player can play the latent state while having expectations until the end.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 325. In the first control example described above, when a big hit occurs during the latent probability state and the latent probability state is newly set 120 times (the value of the probability variation counter 203k is overwritten by 120), the latent probability on the display is displayed. The remaining number of states was configured to continue to display the number of times before the jackpot. Then, when there is a difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of latent states on the display, and the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is calculated. It was configured to execute a revival effect that was added and displayed. That is, the timing in which the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed is limited to the timing when the remaining number of times becomes 0.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times in the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a plurality of opportunities for displaying are added to the remaining number of times on the display are provided. And said. More specifically, in a state where there is a difference, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect at the start of the fluctuation, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times on the display may be added. It is configured to execute an additional effect that suggests that there is. In this addition effect, the number of times the addition is displayed is changed according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the additional production is improved. Hereinafter, the additional effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display by the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is referred to as the pressing additional effect.

Further, in the fourth control example, when the remaining number of times on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more), the guideline of the remaining number of times is not displayed (hidden). ) It is configured to set the non-display mode. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine when the latent state ends, so that it is possible to provide playability with a sense of tension in the latent state. Further, when the non-display mode is set, the second special symbol becomes a big hit when the remaining number of times (value of the probability variation counter 203k) in the actual latent state is within a predetermined number of times (5 times) ( That is, when the remaining number of times of the latent state is updated to 120 just before the end of the latent state), a special additional effect (special additional effect) different from the normal additional effect is executed. It is supposed to be. As a result, the player who has confirmed the special addition effect can win the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give greater joy to.

Further, in the fourth control example, in addition to the additional effect, an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 is provided. Specifically, there is provided a hold notice effect that changes the mode of the hold symbol according to the operation content of the frame button 22 in the normal state or the probable change state. In this hold notice effect, the range of the hold symbol for executing the notice effect is determined based on the operation (selection of the player) for the frame button 22 of the player, and based on the look-ahead result for the hold ball in the range selected by the player. Therefore, it is configured to execute a notice effect using a reserved symbol. As a result, when a highly expected effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased. In addition, even if a low-expected effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, if a reserved ball different from the selected range is selected, a high-expected advance notice effect may have been executed. You can make the player think that you don't know. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol outside the selection range.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. The first regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 310, display modes of various characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. 304 and 306 are diagrams showing a display mode when the hold notice effect is executed in the fourth control example, and FIGS. 307 and 308 show the press-added effect in the fourth control example. It is a figure which showed the display mode at the time of execution, and FIG. ..

FIG. 304A is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the hold notice effect in this control example is started. As shown in FIG. 305 (a), when the hold notice effect is started, the display area Ds1a in which the characters "Determine who to feed with PUSH" is displayed on the upper left side of the sub display area Ds1. Is formed. With this character, the player can be urged to press the frame button 22. Further, on the lower side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4, trays Ds1b on which a smaller number of bone-in meats than the number of reserved symbols are placed are displayed. In the example of FIG. 305 (a), the case where the number of reserved balls is four and the number of bone-in meat is three is illustrated. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a mode of reciprocating in the left-right direction.

Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 according to the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the timing of pressing the frame button 22. FIG. 305 (b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is arranged below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the trays Ds1b are stopped below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped trays Ds1b are changed to a mode in which they are happy with a smile. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose mode has been changed are the targets of the current reserved notice.

If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is formed, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time (for example, 2 seconds) of the display area Ds1a elapses. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 305 (c), the effect of eating the bone-in meat placed on the tray is executed by the reserved symbol in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped downward). After each reserved symbol has eaten the bone-in meat, a production in which a part or all of the reserved symbols that ate the bone-in meat lay eggs is performed. FIG. 305 (c) illustrates an embodiment in which the reserved symbol Dh2 and the reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. The reserved symbol that laid the egg is displayed to suggest to the player that it is a reserved symbol based on the reserved ball with high expectation. More specifically, when the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol in the selection range includes the reserved ball in which reach occurs, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball has completely eaten the bone-in meat. The production of laying eggs will be performed later. If the selected range does not include the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in which the reach occurs, the effect of laying an egg is not executed. As a result, the player can be made aware that the reach effect will occur before the lottery of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball is executed, so that the player can enjoy the reach effect. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the hold notice effect is configured so that it is easier to determine the execution when there is a hold ball on which the reach effect occurs. Therefore, if the effect of laying eggs is not executed after the effect of eating bone-in meat, a reach effect is generated for the reserved symbols outside the range of the reserved symbols selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. It is more likely that the reserved symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is executed by the reserved symbol within the range selected by the player, a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, and the egg is laid. If the effect of producing is not executed, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

After executing the effect that the reserved symbol lays an egg, as shown in FIG. 306 (a), an image urging the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit is displayed inside the display area Ds1a. From this image, the player can be made to recognize that the effect is developed by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can continuously press the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the hold notice production.

When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a and reaches the specified number of repeated hits set when the effect is generated, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. The effect of moving the egg is performed. Eggs are moved in order from the oldest reserved symbol. FIG. 306 (b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed at the upper part of the reserved symbol Dh2 moves to the inside of the house Ds1c. The move to the house Ds1c suggests that it may develop into a super reach in the variable display based on the reserved ball. Super reach is easy to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and difficult to be selected when the lottery result is out of order, so that the expectation of a big hit is high. Therefore, the player can be made to hit the frame button 22 more seriously. It is uncertain whether or not super reach will occur just by moving to the house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. 306 (c), the egg Dh2a is cracked and the word "super reach confirmed" is displayed from the inside. When it occurs, the super reach is confirmed.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the hold notice effect is executed, the range of the hold symbol that generates the notice is determined by the player's selection. As a result, depending on the content of the hold notice effect, the hold ball within the range selected by the player can be expected, or the hold ball outside the player's selection range can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel hold notice effect.

In the fourth control example, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect of determining the super reach if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it may be configured to notify all egg symbols at once whether or not it develops into super reach with one continuous hit by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the production easier to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308, the pressing addition effect executed during the latent state will be described. This pressing addition effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility that the remaining number of latent states on the display may be added by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. This pressing addition effect is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times the player is added is relatively small (or 0 times) when the player operates the frame button 22, and a special mode in which the number of times the player is added is relatively large. Has been done. In the special mode, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. It is an aspect that is easy to be selected in some cases. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode in which it is easy to select when the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is less than 30.

First, a normal aspect will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308 (a). FIG. 307 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the pressing addition effect in the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), when the pressing addition effect is started, the button D2 with the characters "push" is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and the "addition chance" is displayed above the button D2. Is displayed. Further, below the button D2, a horizontally long rectangular display area D3 is displayed, and below the display area D3, a display area D4 in which the characters "Press the button at the right timing !!" are displayed. Is displayed. The display area D3 has a small area D3b, D3f with the character "?", A small area D3c, D3e with the character "chance!", And a character "super hot !!!". It is composed of a small area D3d and a scroll bar D3a that scrolls on each small area from the left side to the right side in the front view. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the number of probability changes on the display may be increased by operating the frame button 22 at the right timing. The number of additions is the largest when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d, and the frame button is added at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small areas D3b and D3f. It becomes the least when 22 is pressed.

FIG. 307 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d with the characters “super hot !!!”. The additional number display area D5 on which the character "+5" is displayed is displayed, and the character "GET" is displayed above the additional number display area D5. Further, 5 times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. Further, the characters "Add 5 times GET !!" are displayed on the display area D4. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand the remaining number of times on the display added in the present pressing addition effect. The correspondence between the timing of pressing the scroll bar D3a and the remaining number of times on the display to be added is defined in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 308 (a) shows the display content when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3f with the character “?” With a low expectation to be added. It is a figure which showed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), the button D2 is split in half and the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed above the button D2. Further, the characters "addition failure ..." are displayed on the display area D4. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is bad. Therefore, when the additional pressing effect is executed next time, it is possible to make the player think that the frame button 22 is to be pressed at a better timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 308 (b), a special mode of pressing addition effect will be described. When the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen of the main display area Dm, and a "super addition chance" is displayed on the upper side of the button D2. Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special effect that is clearly different from the normal aspect has been started.

Further, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30 times) to be additionally displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. At the same time, the characters "Determine the number of additions by your own power !!" are displayed on the display area D4. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which he / she operates the frame button 22 affects the number of additions (so-called not a finished race). Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be pressed more positively by the player, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

Next, the non-display mode in the latent state will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 and 310. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of latent states on the display becomes 0, and the player makes it unclear when the latent state ends. It is a production to give a feeling of tension to.

As shown in FIG. 309 (a), when the remaining number of times of the latent state displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes 0, the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground as in the first control example. Is set to. Further, in this control example, the character "End ...?" Is displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. That is, the display content is set so that it is not yet known whether or not the latent state is terminated.

Then, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is not 0, the mode shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. 309 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309 (b), the effect of the rock 813 approaching from behind the character 811 imitating a rabbit is executed, and at the same time, "pinch! A display area appears in which multiple characters "!" Are displayed. Further, inside the remaining number display area D1, the characters "???" are displayed instead of the guideline of the number of remaining latent states. From these displays, it is possible to recognize that the latent state has not ended yet, but it is not known when it will end. Therefore, from the anxiety that the end of the latent state may be near, it is possible to face the game with a sense of tension.

FIG. 310A is a diagram showing the display contents when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 in the non-display mode and the latent state is completed. As shown in FIG. 310 (a), when the latent probability state ends in the state where the non-display mode is set (when the value of the probability variation counter 203k becomes 0), the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813. Will be. The characters "End !!" are displayed in the display area 812 above the crushed character 811. With these displays, the player can clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

Further, FIG. 310 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch de-appearance) when the display mode is set and the number of remaining latent states is 5 or less and a big hit occurs. .. If the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached just before the end of the latent probability state, the latent probability state is basically set 120 times after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player. In this case, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind. In addition, the characters "Pinch escape !!" are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to "100 times remaining". This pinch escape appearance is performed only when a big hit is made just before the end of the latent probability state (within 5 remaining latent states), so the player who confirms this pinch escape appearance is latent. It becomes a big hit just before the end of the state, and it is possible to recognize that a new latent state has been given. Therefore, it is possible to please the player that the big hit has been made at the right time, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 315, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 311A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 311 (a), in addition to the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the fourth control example includes an additional effect selection table 222da, a pressing period table 222db, and a hold notice determination table 222dc. And are provided.

The additional effect selection table 222da is a data table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the pressed additional effect in the latent state, and the mode (either normal mode or special mode) of the pressed additional effect to be executed. be. The details of the additional effect selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313.

FIG. 312 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 312 (a), in the additional effect selection table 222da, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the degree of participation of the player in the pressed additional effect is normal (the game is played with the additional effect within the past 5 times). Participation degree normal table 222da1 referred to when a person is operating the frame button 22 and a lottery result of a special symbol are small hits, and the degree of participation in the player's pressing addition effect is low (past 5). The low participation table 222da2, which is referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the additional effect over the number of times, and the jackpot table 222da3, which is referred to when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. And are provided.

First, the details of the participation degree normal table 222da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (b). FIG. 312B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the participation degree normal table 222da1. As shown in FIG. 312 (b), the participation degree normal table 222da1 has the value of the effect counter 223h for each difference between the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. The range and the type (mode) of the pressing addition effect are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 312 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h. Is specified in association with "no additional effect" for the range of "0 to 95". On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "96 to 99", the "normal mode" is defined in association with it. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. In addition, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). In addition, it is the remaining number of times on the display and the actual number that the special mode is not selected when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times. This is to prevent the additional display exceeding the difference from the remaining number of times of.

Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "additional effect" to the range of "0 to 90". "None" is specified in association with each other. On the other hand, a "normal mode" is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "91 to 97", and a "special mode" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "98,99". It is specified in association with each other. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. Further, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

In this way, if the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is large (if it is 30 or more), the probability of occurrence of the additional pressing effect increases, so it is possible to prevent the difference from becoming too large. can do.

Next, the details of the low participation table 222da2 will be described with reference to FIG. 313 (a). FIG. 313A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the low participation table 222da2. As shown in FIG. 313 (a), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h. Is specified in association with "no additional effect" for the range of "0 to 90". On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "91 to 99", the "normal mode" is defined in association with it. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. In addition, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation of the player in the pressing addition effect is low, the frequency of the pressing addition effect is increased (4% → 9%). As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "additional effect" to the range of "0 to 80". "None" is specified in association with each other. On the other hand, a "normal mode" is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "81 to 94", and a "special mode" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "95 to 99". It is specified in association with each other. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. Further, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). That is, even when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the frequency of the additional pressing effect is increased (9% → 19%). .. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

Next, the jackpot table 222da3 will be described with reference to FIG. 313 (b). As described above, the jackpot table 222da3 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is obtained by a special symbol lottery during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 313 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h. However, a "normal mode" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 99". That is, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is always executed.

Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "normal mode" with respect to the range of "0 to 49". Is specified in association with each other, and a "special mode" is specified in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 223h is "50 to 99". That is, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode or the special mode is always executed. In this way, in the latent state, when the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and a big hit is made, the pressing addition effect is always executed. With this configuration, it is possible to expect a big hit when a push-up effect occurs. In particular, in the addition effect of the special aspect, the selection rate is significantly increased as compared with the expectation normal table 222da1 and the expectation low table 222da2. Therefore, it can be expected that the jackpot will be stronger when the pressing addition effect of the special aspect occurs. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the mode of the pressing addition effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this fourth control example, when the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the big hit of the second special symbol is made, the pressing addition effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the ratio in which the pressing addition effect is set may be lowered, and the pressing addition effect may be set at a rate of 80%. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily cause a difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times, so that the additional pressing effect can be executed more effectively.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 311. The pressing period table 222db is a data table that defines the number of times of addition display according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution of the pressing addition effect. The details of the pressing period table 222db will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 (c) and 314.

First, FIG. 313 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222db. As shown in FIG. 313 (c), the pressing period table 222db is referred to when the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is set, and the normal table 222db1 which is referred to when the pressing addition effect of the special mode is set. A special table 222db2 to be used is included. When the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined, the table corresponding to the determined pressing addition effect is read out and stored in the pressing period storage area 223da of the RAM 223, which will be described later. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect, the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da is referred to, and the number of additions is determined.

First, the details of the normal table 222db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (a). FIG. 314 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db1. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the normal table 222db1 defines the number of times (additional value) to be added to the remaining number of times display area D1 in association with the elapsed time from the start of the pressing addition effect. ing. The elapsed time from the start of the effect is counted by the pressing period timer 223db of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 314 (a), "0" is associated with the additional value in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds. During this period (range from 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the pressing addition effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3b with the character "?". It becomes an aspect. Further, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds, "3" is associated with the additional value. During this period (range from 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the pressing addition effect), the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c with the characters "chance!" In the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. This is the mode to be used. Further, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds, "5" is associated with the additional value. During this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the pressing addition effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is such that the scroll bar D3a has a small area D3d with the characters "super hot !!!". It is a mode to move on.

Similarly, the elapsed time in the range of 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e) is associated with "2" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. (A period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f) is associated with "0" as an additional value.

As described above, the normal table 222db1 defines the correspondence between the elapsed time and the additional value according to the effect mode (timekeeping change of the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the push addition effect of the normal mode. As a result, the number of times according to the display mode (position of the scroll bar D3a) at the time when the player presses the frame button 22 can be added and displayed.

Next, the details of the special table 222db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (b). FIG. 314 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db2.

As shown in FIG. 314 (b), the elapsed time in the range of 0 to 799 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3b) is associated with "5" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is 800. The range of up to 999 ms (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c) is associated with "10" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1000 to 1099 ms (the scroll bar D3a is the small area D3d). "20" is associated with the additional value (the period overlapping with), and "10" is associated with the additional value in the range of the elapsed time of 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e). In the range of 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), "5" is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 2000 to 2049 milliseconds. (The period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g) is associated with "30" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 2050 to 2500 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h). , "5" is associated as an additional value.

With this special table 222db2, the number of additions displayed in the small area through which the scroll bar D3a is passing can be accurately added and displayed on the remaining number of times display area D1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 311 (a). The hold notice determination table 222dc is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect. As described above, the hold notice effect may be executed when the number of hold balls of the first special symbol increases in the normal state or the probable change state of the game state, and the lottery result with high expectation among the hold balls. Is a rendition performed to suggest that is present. The details of the hold notice determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG. 315.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold notice determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 315, the hold notice determination table 222dc has a reach table when there is a hold ball in which a reach effect is generated, and a reach effect is generated in the hold ball. It consists of a non-reach table that is referred to when there is no reserved ball to play. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h, which determines the execution of the hold advance notice effect, for each number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 315, in the reach table, the value of the effect counter 223h is not specified in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or less, the reserved advance notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0 to 9" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is set. "0 to 15" are associated with each other. That is, the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to execute the reserved advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to positively fire the ball to the player in an attempt to store more reserved balls, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315, the value of the effect counter 223h is not specified in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2 even in the table for no reach. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0" is associated with the value of the teeth and the effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is "0,1". "Is associated with it. That is, the table for the time without reach has a smaller random number value (counter value) for determining the execution of the hold notice effect than the table for the time with reach. Therefore, if there is a hold ball in which the hold notice effect is performed, it is easier to execute the hold notice effect. Therefore, when the hold notice effect is started, the reach effect is developed for the player. You can expect it strongly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 311 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 311 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. Is. The RAM 223 in the fourth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a press period storage area 223 da, a press period timer 223 db, and a continuous hit counter 223 dc are added.

The pressing period storage area 223da is a storage area for storing the pressing period corresponding to the determined type of pressing addition effect when the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined. That is, when the start of the pressing addition effect is determined, the table (normal table 222db1 or special table 222db2) read from the pressing period table 222db is stored (see S4392 in FIG. 321). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect, the addition value is determined based on the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da and the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db described later. , The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is updated.

The pressing period timer 223db is a timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the pressing addition effect. Based on the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da, the addition value in the pressing addition effect is determined.

The continuous hit counter 223dc sets a predetermined upper limit value for each effect when an effect (see FIG. 306 (a)) for urging the frame button 22 to be repeatedly pressed occurs in the hold notice effect, and the player is set during the effect. Is a counter in which the value is decremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated (see S5703 in FIG. 318). If the value of the continuous striking counter 223dc becomes 0 during the effect of prompting the continuous striking of the frame button 22, the effect develops to the next stage (the egg pattern moves to the inside of the house Ds1c).

The pressed flag 223dd is a flag indicating whether or not the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been executed by the player in the pressing addition effect of 1. If the pressed flag 223dd is on, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the pressing addition effect of 1, and if it is off, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is performed. It means that it has not been detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect, the pressed flag 223dd is referred to, and only when the state is off, the pressing stored in the pressing period table storage area 223da is performed. The additional value corresponding to the period is read out and displayed as an additional value with respect to the remaining number display area D1 (see S5605 in FIG. 317). That is, even if the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 a plurality of times in the addition effect of 1, only the addition to the first operation (press) is executed. Further, when the pressed addition effect is completed with the pressed flag 223dd turned off, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df described later. That is, the number of times that the player does not participate in the pressing addition effect (pressing the frame button 22) is counted by the participation degree counter 223df. In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing addition effect is changed according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df.

The hold notice flag 223de is a flag indicating whether or not the hold notice effect (see FIGS. 305 and 306) is being executed. If it is on, the hold notice effect is being executed, and if it is off, the hold notice effect is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. The hold notice flag 223de is set to on when the execution of the hold notice effect is determined (see S5808 in FIG. 322), and is set to off at the end of the hold notice effect (see S5835 in FIG. 325). While the hold notice flag 223de is on, it is avoided that a new hold notice effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by the duplicated execution of the hold notice.

The participation degree counter 223df is a counter indicating the degree of participation of the player in the pressing addition effect. When the pressing addition effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22, the participation degree counter 223df is incremented by 1 (see S5509 in FIG. 316), and the frame button 22 is pressed during the pressing addition effect. When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see S5609 in FIG. 317). That is, the value of the participation degree counter 223df counts the number of consecutive times in which the player does not press the frame button 22 (does not participate) in the pressing addition effect. In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing addition effect is changed according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (if the player has not participated in the pressing addition effect 6 times or more in a row), the determination ratio of the pressing addition effect is increased. As a result, the opportunity to urge the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 can be increased, so that the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect can be improved.

The non-display setting flag 223dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set as the display mode during the latent state. When the non-display setting flag 223 deg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 223 deg is set to on when the non-display mode is set (see S5896 in FIG. 324), and when an additional effect (pressing additional effect, special additional effect) is set (see FIG. 321). S4395, see S5860 in FIG. 323), it is set to off when the latent state ends during the non-display mode (see S5858 in FIG. 323).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 316 to 325, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 316, a frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 316) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and it is determined that the frame button 22 is detected. (S5501: Yes), and then determines whether or not the pressing addition effect is being executed (S5502).

If it is determined in the process of S5502 that the pressing addition effect is being executed (S5502: Yes), the addition value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 is added to the remaining number of times display area D1 in the pressing addition effect. The pressing process during the addition effect for making the effect is executed (S5503), and this process is terminated. The details of the pressing process (S5503) during the addition effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 317.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the pressing addition effect is not being executed (S5502: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed (S5504). If it is determined in the process of S5504 that the hold notice effect is in progress (S5504: Yes), the hold advance notice pressing process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect is executed (S5504: Yes). S5505), this process is terminated. The details of the hold advance notice pressing process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. 318. If it is determined in the process of S5504 that the hold notice effect is not being executed (S5504: No), other processes according to the pressing timing are executed (S5506), and this process is terminated. The other pressing timing is, for example, a timing at which the rear image can be changed. In the fourth control example, as described above, a plurality of rear images are defined, and the rear type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the variable stop state. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the processing of S5501 (S5501: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the pressing addition effect (S5507), and the pressing is performed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the addition effect (S5507: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508). Then, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5508: No), the pressing addition effect is completed without the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the pressing addition effect (player). Since it means that he / she has not participated in the additional effect of pressing this time, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df to update (S5509), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5507, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the pressing addition effect (S5507: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S5508 that the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508: Yes), S5509. This process ends as it is without executing the process of.

By executing the processes of S5507 to S5509, the degree of participation of the player in the pressing additional effect can be accumulated over a plurality of additional effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the pressing addition effect according to the degree of participation of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the details of the pressing process (S5503) during the addition effect will be described. As described above, the pressing process (S5503) during the addition effect is a process for displaying the addition value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 on the remaining number of times display area D1.

When the pressing process (S5503) during the addition effect is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5601), and if it is determined to be on (S5601: Yes), it has already been determined. Since the additional value has already been displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 in the press addition effect and it is not necessary to execute a new addition, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5601, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5601: Yes), then the pressing period set in the pressing period table storage area is read (S5602), and the reading is performed. Of the pressing period, the additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 223db is read out (S5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read additional value is 0 (S5604), and if it is not 0 (S5604), an effect of adding and displaying the read additional value on the remaining number of times display area D1 is set (S5605).

After the processing of S5605, the additional value read in the processing of S5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p and updated (S5606), and the processing is shifted to S5608. On the other hand, in the process of S5604, when it is determined that the read additional value is 0 (S5604: Yes), an additional failure effect (see FIG. 308 (a)) for notifying that the addition has failed is set (S5607). ), The process shifts to S5608.

In the processing of S5608 executed after the processing of S5606 or S5607 is completed, the pressed flag 223dd is set to ON (S5608), the value of the participation counter 223df is reset to 0 (S5609), and this processing is performed. To exit. By executing this pressing process during the additional effect (see FIG. 317), when the additional effect of pressing occurs, the additional value of the number of times corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. It can be displayed by adding it to the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide a natural effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the hold advance notice pressing process (S5505) will be described. As described above, the hold advance notice pressing process (S5505) is a process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect. In the hold advance notice pressing process (S5505), first, it is determined whether the hold period is the hold period (see FIG. 305 (a)), and if it is not the hold period (S5701: No), then. It is determined whether or not the continuous striking period (see FIG. 306 (a)) is reached (S5702).

If it is determined in the process of S5702 that it is not the continuous hitting period (S5702: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the continuous hitting period is in progress (S5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting counter 223dc is updated by subtracting 1 (S5703), and is the updated counter value 0? Is determined (S5704). Then, when it is determined that the counter value after the update becomes 0 (S5704: Yes), a development effect (see FIG. 306 (b)) in which the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c is set (S5705), and the present End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S5704, if it is determined that the value of the updated continuous hit counter 223dc is 1 or more (S5704: No), the process of S5705 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the process of S5701 when it is determined that the current period is the pressing period (S5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is specified in the third symbol display device 81 (tray Ds1b is displayed directly below). The winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes the winning information that causes the reach effect (S5707). The reach effect refers to any one of out-of-order normal reach, out-of-order super reach A and B, hit normal reach, and hit super reach A to C.

In the process of S5707, if it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is included in the specified range (S5707: Yes), then, for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that causes the reach. The effect of displaying the egg symbol (the reserved symbol lays an egg) is set (S5708). Then, a continuous striking period for executing the continuous striking effect for prompting the continuous striking of the frame button 22 is set (S5709), a value corresponding to the value of the continuous striking counter 223dc is set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S5707 that the winning information that causes the reach effect is not included in the specified range (S5707: No), the hold notice flag 223de is set to indicate the end of the hold notice effect. Set it to off (S5711) to end this process.

By executing this hold advance notice pressing process (see FIG. 318), when the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the hold notice effect, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the press timing. Further, as described above, in this control example, the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be selectable by the operation of the player. As a result, if no notice (display of the egg symbol) is given to the reserved symbol within the selected range, it is determined that there is a reserved symbol with high expectation among the reserved symbols outside the player's selection range. You can expect it. Therefore, even if the hold notice effect does not occur, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for the hold ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the command determination process 4 executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example will be described. Of the command determination processes 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, in each of the processes S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311, S4313 to S4315, and S4319, the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 238). ), The same processes as those of S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311 to S4315, and S4319 are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in the process of S4306 (S4303: Yes), the variation start of the second special symbol. The special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting is executed (S4361), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320. Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the winning command has been received in the processing of S4311 (S4311: Yes), it is based on the winning information notified by the winning command. The hold notice setting process for determining the execution of the hold notice is executed (S4362), and this process is terminated. The details of the hold notice setting process (S4362) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322.

Further, in the process of S4315, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4363). ), If the residual probability variation count command has been received (S4363), the residual probability variation count command process for executing the process according to the number of times notified by the residual probability variation count command is executed (S4364), and this process is executed. finish. The details of this residual probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be described later with reference to FIG. 324.

Further, in the process of S4363, when it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4363: No), then whether or not at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command and the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received. If at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command is received. The confirmation command process for setting is executed (S4364), and this process is terminated. The details of this confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 325.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4361) will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. When this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 320) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4371), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received is notified. The variation pattern is extracted (S4372).

When the processing of S4372 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state (S4373), and if it is in the latent state (S4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not to set the pressing addition effect. The additional effect setting process (S4374) for performing the above is executed (S4374), and the process is transferred to S4376. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4373 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the process of S4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. , The process shifts to S4376. In the process of S4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern selected variation pattern is set (S4376), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the details of the addition effect setting process (S4374) will be described with reference to FIG. 321. As described above, this pressing addition effect setting process (S4374) is a process for determining the execution of the pressing addition effect in the latent state.

When the additional effect setting process (see FIG. 321) is started, first, it is determined whether the lottery of the second special symbol is the lottery result of the small hit stop type (S4381), and it is not the small hit stop type. (S4381: No), then the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received is during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)), and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less. (S4382). In the process of S4382, if the non-display mode is not being set, or if the remaining number of probability changes is 6 or more (S4382: No), the process is shifted to S4391.

On the other hand, in the process of S4382, when the non-display mode is set and it is determined that the remaining number of probable changes is 5 or less (S4382: Yes), then the lottery of the second special symbol this time is a big hit E ~. It is determined whether the lottery result is the stop type of G (S4383), and if it is determined that it is neither of the jackpots E to G (S4383: No), the process is shifted to S4391. On the other hand, in the processing of S4383, when it is determined that it is any of the jackpots E to G (S4383: Yes), the jackpot is used from the additional effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the additional effect of pressing. Read the table 222da3 (S4384). Next, the difference between the latent probability number 120 given after the big hit and the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number storage area 223p is calculated (S4385), and the process is shifted to S4391.

Further, in the processing of S4381 when it is determined that the stop type this time is a small hit (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (S4386). If the value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (S4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 222da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the press addition effect (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent states stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of latent probability states on the display stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is calculated, and the process is performed in S4391. Move to.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4386 that the value of the participation degree counter 223df is less than 5 (S4386: No), the participation degree low table 222da1 is read out from the additional effect selection table 222da (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent states stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of latent probability states on the display stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is calculated, and the process is performed in S4391. Move to.

In the processing of S4391, which is executed after any of S4385, S4388, and S4391 is completed, the difference calculated by any of S4385, S4388, and S4391 and the processing of S4384, S4387, and S4388. Based on the read table, the mode of the pressing additional effect (any one of no additional effect, normal mode, and special mode) is specified (S4391), and the process shifts to S4392.

In the process of S4392, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing addition effect is decided (S4392), and if the execution of the pressing addition effect is decided (S4392: Yes), the mode of the pressing addition effect determined this time is set. The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 222db (see FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b)) and set in the pressing period storage area 223da (S4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when the player's operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect determined to be executed this time, and the addition corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing is performed. The value is additionally displayed with respect to the remaining number of times display area D1. As a result, the player can positively operate (press) the frame button 22 in the hope that the number of remaining latent states on the display will be added. You can improve your willingness to participate. After the processing of S4393, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to off (S4394), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4392 that the execution of the pressing addition effect is not determined (S4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S4395), this process is terminated. By executing this additional effect setting process, it is possible to select an appropriate form of the additional effect of pressing according to the player's participation in the past pressing additional effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the like.

In this control example, in the latent state, the pressing addition effect is set only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit EG, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, it may be configured so that the pressing addition effect can be set. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the production.

Next, the details of the hold notice setting process (S4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 322. As described above, the hold notice setting process (S4362) is a process for determining the execution of the hold notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When this hold notice setting process (S4362) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the latent state (S5801), and if it is determined that the game state is in the latent state (S5801), it is held. Each process of S5802 to S5809 for setting the advance notice effect is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is. It should be noted that the reason why the hold notice effect is not executed in the latent state is that the main fluctuation in the latent state is the fluctuation display of the two special symbols that cannot be held and stored. Therefore, in the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is almost always 0, and it is not necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not to execute the reserved notice. Therefore, by skipping the execution determination itself of the hold notice, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the latent state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (normal state or probable change state) (S5801: No), then whether the pending notice flag 223de is on. When it is determined whether or not (whether or not the hold notice effect is already being executed) (S5802), and when it is determined that the hold notice flag 223de is on (whether or not the hold notice effect is already being executed) (S5802). : Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5802 that the pending notice flag 223de is off (S5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5803). It is determined whether or not the read prize information includes the prize information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs (S5804).

In the process of S5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is included (S5804: Yes), it is used as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect when there is reach. The table is read from the hold notice determination table 222dc (see FIG. 315), the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process shifts to S5807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5804 that the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is not included (S5804: No), there is no reach as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect. The time table is read from the hold notice determination table 222dc, the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process shifts to S5807.

In the process of S5807 executed after the process of S5805 or S5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold notice effect is determined in the process of S5805 or S5806 (S5807), and it is determined that the execution of the hold notice effect is determined. If this is the case (S5807: Yes), the pending notice flag 223de is set to ON (S5808). Next, an effect (see FIG. 305 (a)) for prompting the pressing of the frame button 22 is set (S5809), and this process is terminated.

By executing this hold notice setting process, it is possible to set the hold notice effect at an appropriate ratio according to the number of hold balls and the content of each hold ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the residual probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be described. As described above, this residual probability variation number command process (S4364) is a process for executing control according to the probability variation number notified by the residual probability variation number command. When this residual probability variation number command processing (S4364) is started, first, the residual probability variation number notified by the residual probability variation number command is stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o (S5851), and then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether the state is in the state (S5852).

If it is determined in the process of S5852 that the gaming state is not the latent state (S5852: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5852, when it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), then whether or not the non-display setting flag 223 deg is turned on (whether or not the non-display mode is set). (S5853), and if the non-display setting flag 223dg is off (S5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (S5861). ), End this process. The details of this non-display setting process (S5861) will be described later with reference to FIG. 324.

On the other hand, in the process of S5853, when it is determined that the non-display setting flag 223 deg is on (S5854), the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set. It is determined whether or not the number of residual probability changes stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o in the process is 5 or less (S5854). If it is determined in the process of S5584 that the number of residual probability changes is 6 or more (S5854: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of residual probability changes is 5 or less (S5584: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is any of the jackpots E to G (S5855), and the jackpot E to If it is determined that neither of G is present (S5855: No), then whether or not the number of residual probability changes is 0 (whether or not the number of times stored in the residual probability variation area 223o is 0) is determined. Determine (S5856).

If it is determined in the process of S5856 that the number of residual probability changes is not 0 (S5856: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5856, when it is determined that the number of residual probability changes is 0 (S5856: Yes), it means that the latent state in which the non-display mode is set has ended. (See FIG. 310 (a)) is set, the non-display setting flag 223 deg is set to off (S5858), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5855, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is any of the jackpots E to G (S5855: Yes), the latent state of 120 times is set after the jackpot, so first. , The execution of the special addition effect (see FIG. 310 (b)) is set (S5859), then 100 times are overwritten for the effect probability variation frequency area 223p, and the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to off (). S5860), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the non-display mode is set, the second is in a state where the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (value of the probability change counter 203k) is within a predetermined number of times (5 times). When it becomes a big hit of a special symbol (that is, when the remaining number of times of the latent state is updated to 120 times just before the end of the latent state), a special addition of a mode different from the normal pressing addition effect is added. It is configured to execute the production (special additional production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special addition effect can win the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give greater joy to.

Next, the details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described with reference to FIG. 324. As described above, this non-display setting process (S5861) is a process for executing determination of whether or not to set the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 324, when the non-display setting process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891), and if it is 1 or more. When the determination is made (S5891: No), the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is subtracted by 1 (S5892), and the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the stored value of the effect probability variation number area 223p after the subtraction. The number of impressions to be displayed is updated (S5893), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5891 when it is determined that the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891: Yes), the actual remaining number of times stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o is It is determined whether or not it is 0 times (S5894), if the actual remaining number of times is not 0 times (S58994: No), a non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set (S5895), and the display is hidden. The setting flag 223dg is set to ON (S5896), and this process ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it a state in which it is not known when the latent state ends, so that the player can be given a sense of tension in the remaining latent state games.

On the other hand, in the process of S5894, when it is determined that the remaining number of times of the actual latent state stored in the residual probability change number area 223o is 0 (S5894: Yes), the display is displayed at the end timing of the latent state. Since it means that the remaining number of times has also been updated to 0, a normal end effect (see FIG. 188 (a)) is set (S5897), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the non-display setting process in the fourth control example, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which it is unknown how long the latent state will last. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a sense of tension while the non-display mode is set.

Next, the details of the confirmation command processing (S4366) will be described with reference to FIG. 325. As described above, this confirmation command process (S4366) is a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol. When this confirmation command processing (see FIG. 325) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the received special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S5831), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command is received. (S5831), the final display of the first special symbol is set (S5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag 223de is on (S5833), and if it is determined to be on (S5833: Yes), the hold notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the confirmation display is set this time. It is determined whether or not it has ended (S5834). If it is determined in the process of S5834 that the hold notice effect has ended (S5834: Yes), the hold notice flag 223de is set to off (S5835), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5833, when it is determined that the hold notice flag 223de is off (S5833: No), or in the process of S5834, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is continuing (S5834: No). ), This process ends as it is. If it is determined in the process of S5831 that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (S5836), and this process is terminated. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to execute the hold notice effect as a hobby effect in the normal state or the probable change state. In this hold notice effect, the hold symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by operating the frame button 22 of the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of executing a hold notice effect indicating an expectation degree of a hold fluctuation display is known. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, it is suggested that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is expected to be a big hit, so that the variable display is started before the variable display is started. , It was possible to raise the expectations of the players.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect occurs, it may be difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the hold symbol that is not subject to the hold notice. This is because it was usual to set a hold notice effect for a hold symbol corresponding to a hold ball with a high expectation in the hold.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect can be specified. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of executing the hold notice effect is higher when the hold ball with a high expectation of being a big hit is included. As a result, when the hold notice effect is not set for the hold symbols in the specified range, or when the hold notice effect in a mode with low expectation is executed, the hold symbols outside the range specified by the player are dealt with. You can expect a big hit for the reserved ball. Therefore, when a hold notice effect with a high degree of expectation occurs in the selection range, the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol in which the hold notice has occurred is expected to be a big hit, and the hold notice does not occur. When a hold notice with a low degree of expectation occurs, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a feeling of expectation can be given to a hold ball outside the selection range.

Further, in the fourth control example, as a kind of pressing addition effect executed in the latent probability state, the remaining latent state displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. There is an effect to add the number of times.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an operation means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player, and as a kind of hobby effect, an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means can be executed. be. In this conventional gaming machine, by operating the operation buttons in the operation effect, a special effect different from the usual one is generated, a hit is notified, and the like, the player's interest is improved.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the operation result of the player with respect to the frame button is the result of the effect (the hit is). It was irrelevant whether or not it was notified. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation and production.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, there is a case where a difference occurs between the actual remaining number of times in the latent probability state and the remaining number of times on the display. Then, when the pressing addition effect is executed, a different addition value is added and displayed according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 within the range in which the remaining number of times on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number of times. It is supposed to be. As a result, since the remaining number of additions on the display is changed depending on the operation timing of the player, the player can be more actively participated in the addition effect (the frame button 22 is pressed at the right timing). .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Further, in the fourth control example, in the latent state, the number of remaining latent states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent states is hidden, and the actual remaining number of latent states is set. Is a big hit of the second special symbol within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (the latent probability state is newly set 120 times), it is possible to execute a special addition effect different from the normal addition effect. It is composed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a machine that sets an advantageous state more advantageous than a normal state over a predetermined number of lottery times based on a predetermined opportunity such as a hit. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a transition to an advantageous state is made, by performing an effect in which it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue, the expectation that the advantageous state will continue for a longer period of time can be obtained. There are things that are trying to improve the taste.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous state is reset (overwritten) due to a predetermined trigger such as a hit in the advantageous state, it is unknown at which stage of the advantageous state the advantageous state is reset. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special additional effect is provided that is executed only when the remaining latent number of times is within 5 times and a big hit is made. On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent state has been added just before the end of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to give greater joy to the player who recognizes that he has won the jackpot at the right time. In addition, since the number of remaining latent states at the time of a big hit is clarified, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the fourth control example, the special addition effect is executed only in the state where the non-display mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1, if the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (value stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o) is 5 times or less, a special case different from the normal one. It may be configured to execute an additional effect. As described above, in the fourth control example, there may be a difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states. That is, even if the remaining number of times on the display is within 5 times, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times. Therefore, it becomes a big hit when the remaining number of times on the display is 5 times or less, and even if the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is also within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). It is unclear whether the actual number of remaining times is sufficient, and there is a risk of causing discomfort to the player. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times, the special addition effect is executed regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set, so that the latent state is about to end. If the jackpot is won, the player can be surely recognized to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the effect mode of the special addition effect may be different depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, the sprinting character 811 may become enormous, and an effect may be executed in which 100 times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. .. By executing different special addition effects depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, it is possible to execute a more natural flow effect in each display mode. In addition, it is possible to diversify the production mode.

In the fourth control example, the effect of urging the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit in the hold notice effect is configured to notify whether or not the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect of determining the super reach if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it may be configured to notify all egg symbols at once whether or not it develops into super reach with one continuous hit by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the production easier to understand.

In the fourth control example, when the hold notice effect occurs and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the hold symbols for which the hold notice is given is automatically determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect itself may be terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the hold notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). That is, if the expectation of a big hit is suggested by the hold notice effect, there is a risk that the variable display corresponding to the hold ball with a low expectation cannot be enjoyed. Therefore, not only the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved advance notice effect but also whether or not to perform the hold notice effect itself is configured to be selectable by the player, so that the variable display corresponding to each reserved symbol is expected. You can feel it. Therefore, it is possible to meet a wide range of needs of each player.

In the fourth control example, the expected degree of each reserved symbol is suggested by whether or not the reserved symbol lays an egg and whether or not the egg breaks, but the mode of the reserved notice effect is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. The reserved symbol may be variable in a different manner according to the expectation of the corresponding reserved ball. For example, the color of the reserved symbol in the range selected by the player may be varied according to the expected degree. good. More specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color. Then, when the player selects a reserved symbol for which the reserved notice effect is to be performed, the reserved symbol in the selected range is changed to white. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the color of each reserved symbol may be changed. In this case, the extent to which the color changes according to the number of repeated hits for each reserved symbol may be determined in advance at the start of the reserved notice or when the player selects the reserved symbol. Specifically, for example, when a reserved symbol corresponding to a reserved ball that is a fluctuation pattern of short deviation, detached normal reach, and hit super reach A is selected, the reserved symbol corresponding to short deviation is changed from white to another color. Set so that it does not change, and the pending symbol corresponding to the off normal reach is set to change up to yellow (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow) according to the number of repeated hits, and the hold corresponding to the hit super reach A The design may be set to change up to rainbow color according to the number of repeated hits (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color). With this configuration, it is possible to have the player positively make repeated hits while looking forward to the color to which each reserved symbol changes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<First modification of the first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 to 331. In the first control example described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the same (0.5 seconds) fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It was composed. This was configured to improve the efficiency of the game in the latent state.

On the other hand, in the first modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is made different according to the remaining number of times in the latent state. In the first half of the latent state, it is easy to set a relatively short fluctuation time, and in the latter half, it is easy to set a relatively long fluctuation time. As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the interval between small hits or big hits becomes short, and it is possible to increase the prize balls in a relatively short time, while in the latter half of the latent state, small hits or big hits are made. It is possible to make the increase of the prize balls relatively gradual by lengthening the interval. Therefore, it is possible to add a wave to how the number of prize balls increases, and it is possible to give a sharp impression to the balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the latent state.

The first modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the RAM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 has been changed. The first regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modification of the first control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the electrical configuration in the first modification of the first control example will be described. FIG. 327 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), a variation pattern scenario table 202ea is added to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modification with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 191). It is different in that it is. Further, in this modification, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed.

First, the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202f in this control example. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification is replaced with the latency table 202f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 194) in the first control example. Therefore, a table for latency (first half) 202f4a and a table for latency (second half) 202f4b are provided.

The latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern in the first half of the latent probability state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lottery is executed), and is a latent probability (first half) table. The table 202f4b for the latter half) is a table referred to in the latter half of the latent state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lottery is executed). The details of the latent (second half) table 202f4b will be described with reference to FIG. 327 (a). The content of the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is the same as that of the latent probability table 202f4 (see FIG. 196 (b)) in the first control example, and is 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of .5 seconds is selected. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 327 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability (second half) table 202f4b. Of these, the provisions for the lottery of the first special symbol are the same as the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a (and the latent probability table 202f4 in the first control example), so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. Further, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is selected. If a small hit is obtained in, the small hit short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is missed. Is out of range (0 to 198) in the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 and a short variation (2 seconds) is selected.

In this way, when the latent probability (second half) table 202f4b is referred to, the fluctuation time is longer (0.5 seconds → 2 seconds) than when the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is referred to. By doing so, in the latter half of the latent state (51 to 120 times), the interval between small hits or big hits can be lengthened. Therefore, in the first half of the latent state, the number of balls held tends to increase, and in the second half, the number of balls held slows down. Can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 327 (b). The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea is a table in which the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big hit and the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern scenario table 202ea.

As shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern does not depend on the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit in which the normal state is set ends. A normal table A202f1 is associated with the selection table. Therefore, when the normal state is set after the big hit, the normal table A202f1 is always referred to to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the probability change state is set as the game state after the big hit, the probability change table is set for the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit is in the range of 1 to 120. 202f3 is associated and defined, and when the number of lottery of special symbols is 121 or later, the normal table A202f1 is associated and defined. Therefore, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is 120 times or less, the probability variation table 202f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variation pattern selection table, and when the number of lottery is 121 or more, the normal table A202f1 is referred to. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the latent state is set as the game state after the big hit, the number of lottery after the big hit is in the range of 1 to 50, and the latent probability (first half). The table 202f4a is associated with the table 202f4a, and the table 202f4b for latency (second half) is associated with the range of 51 to 120 lottery of special symbols, and is usually specified with respect to the range 121 and 122. The table B202f2 is associated with the standard table B202f2, and the normal table A202f1 is associated with the 123 and subsequent tables.

As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a in which the short fluctuation time is easily determined, so that the interval between small hits or big hits can be shortened. can. Therefore, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be improved in the first half of the latent state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latent probability state, since the fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent probability (second half) table 202f4b in which it is difficult to determine a long fluctuation time, the interval between small hits or big hits becomes long. Therefore, in the latter half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize balls can be slowed down, so that the degree of increase of the prize balls can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the latent state.

Further, since the fluctuation pattern can be selected with reference to the normal table B202f2 in the two special symbol lottery after the latent state is completed, the result of the latent state is the same as in the first control example. It is possible to secure a sufficient production time for displaying. Further, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 123 times, the normal table A202f1 is referred to.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 328. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 203 in the first modification has a scenario storage area 203ea and a lottery count counter 203eb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). Is different.

The scenario storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit among the scenarios defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea. In this scenario storage area 203ea, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is stored at the end of the big hit (see S2351 in FIG. 331). At the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ea.

The lottery count counter 203eb is a counter for counting the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is finished. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 203ea, the number of lottery of the special symbol is determined by the value of the lottery count counter 203eb, and the variation pattern selection table is selected.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first modification of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 329, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 2) executed in the first modification instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 212) in the first control example. 329) will be described.

In each of the processes S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as those of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 of (see FIG. 212) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) in the present modification, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery count counter 203eb is next from the scenario storage area 203ea. Is read out (S551), and the process shifts to S505. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, the variation pattern is selected by the processing of S505. Although the illustration is omitted, even in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when the variation pattern selection table is read out, the same process as in S551 is executed to determine the table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) executed in the first modification instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example will be described. Of the game state update processes 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification of the first control example, in each of the processes S601 to S608, the game state update processes (see FIG. 213) S601 to S601 in the first control example, respectively. The same process as each process of S608 is executed.

Further, in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification, after the process of S608, 1 is added to the value of the lottery count counter 203eb to update (S651), and this process ends. By updating the value of the lottery count counter 203eb each time in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330), the value of the lottery count counter 203eb can always match the lottery count of the special symbol executed after the big hit. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 331) executed in the first modification instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230) in the first control example will be described. Of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), in each of the processes S2301 to S2308, the same processing as each processing of S2301 to S2308 in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 230) of the first control example is executed. ..

Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 331) in the first modification, when the process of S2308 is completed, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of S2302 to S2306 is set to the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. Read from and set in the scenario storage area 203ea (S2351). Next, the value of the lottery count counter 203eb is reset to 0 (S2352), and this process ends. By this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), it is possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the gaming state after the jackpot end.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first control example, the first half of the latent state (the number of lottery after the big hit is 1 to 50) or the latter half (the number of lottery after the big hit is 51 to 120). The configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern selection table referred to for selecting the fluctuation pattern is switched according to the number of times). Then, the latter half of the latent state is configured so that the fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the first half of the latent state. As a result, it is possible to make the intervals between the first half and the second half of the latent state different from each other, and to increase the possibility that the first half will be a small hit or a big hit at a shorter interval. That is, in the first half of the latent state, the increasing speed of the prize balls can be increased, and in the second half, the increasing speed of the prize balls can be relatively slowed down. Therefore, since the increasing speed of the prize balls can be changed, it is possible to make a wave in how the prize balls increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the latent state. In addition, since the prize ball increases in the first half of the latent state, the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to win a big hit in the first half of the latent state (before rushing into the second half) and to make the player want to play the game in the first half of the latent state again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In this first modification, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the first half of the latent state, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the latter half of the latent state, the second special symbol is set. When the lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is always set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%). Similarly, even in a trial in a latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%). This makes it difficult to determine whether it is the first half or the second half of the latent state from the fluctuation time, so even if the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the game is played with the expectation that it is the first half. be able to.

<Second modification of the first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333. In the first control example described above, the third symbol is displayed based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (setting status of each standby flag) with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200). It is configured to set the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81, and in the normal state, the change status of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation (setting status of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t). Regardless of this, by executing the demo display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, which indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, has stopped, is set to ON. The configuration was such that the main fluctuation was displayed reliably.

Here, in the above-mentioned first control example, in the normal state, that is, in the state where the left-handed stroke is executed, the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1. Met. This is because the second ball entrance 1640 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right-handed area.

As described above, if the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while the lottery result is stopped, the ball enters the first entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. At that time, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be out of order by looking at the pattern displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation does not start.

On the other hand, in this second modification, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, which indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed since the change of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, has stopped during the normal normal state, is set to ON. In this case, the demo display for sub-variation (special figure 2 demo display) is configured to be executed in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the simultaneous fluctuation is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol (second special symbol) on the sub-variation side continues to be displayed while being stopped. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the game.

The second modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The first control is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed by the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 332. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state (or probability variation state).

As shown in FIG. 332, in the normal state (or probable change state), the first special symbol is in a fluctuating state, and the second special symbol is not fluctuating for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification). In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 182) showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, "during the game" indicating that the first special symbol is changing as a demo display for sub-variation. Character is displayed. In this way, by executing a display other than the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the demo display for the sub-variation, the game is executed even though the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed). The symbol (second special symbol) that does not change (despite the fact that the ball is inserted into the first entry port 64) is continuously displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Can be suppressed.

Further, the contents of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) can be set based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s). As shown in 332, when the first special symbol is changing (when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off), it means that the first special symbol, which is the main change, is changing. Since the content is displayed, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example>
With reference to FIG. 333, the electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example will be described. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 333, the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modification is in a normal state or a probable change state with respect to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) in the first control example. The difference is that the screen display type specified corresponding to the state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on is changed. There is. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 333, the screen is displayed when the gaming state is a normal state or a probable change state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on. "Special figure 2 demo display" is specified as a display type. This "special figure 2 demo display" is a screen display type in which "during a game" is displayed (see FIG. 332) with the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the demo display area of the second special symbol. ..

As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuations of the two types of special symbols are executed at the same time, one of the two types of special symbols is advantageous for the player. The special symbol) is variablely displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the main variation) is a part of the third symbol display device 81'. Area in which the variation display of the sub-variation is executed (sub-variation display area) when the configuration in which the variation is displayed as the sub-variation using (the area smaller than the display area in which the variation display of the main variation is executed) is used. Since the demo display corresponding to the sub-variation can be executed, it is possible to prevent the symbol showing the lottery result of the sub-variation from being stopped and displayed for a long period of time (30 seconds or more), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Furthermore, by setting the content of the demo display executed for the sub-variation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation status of the main variation (first special symbol), the sub-variation (second special symbol) is displayed. It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) by using the region (sub-variation display region). Therefore, in the state where the demo display is executed in the sub-variation area, it is possible to execute the display related to the main variation by using all (almost) of the third symbol display device 81, which provides the player with an easy-to-understand effect. be able to.

In this second modification, the demo display for the second special symbol is executed instead of the stop symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, the stopped symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol may be reduced and displayed, and the demo display for the second special symbol may be executed in the empty space of the sub-variation display area, or the sub-variation display area may be executed. A configuration may be used in which the second special symbol demo display is executed in a region different from that of the above.

Further, in this second modification, the configuration of the demo display (sub-variation demo display) for the second special symbol in the normal state or the probabilistic state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the sub-variation has been described. However, for example, it is preferable to use the same configuration even in a latent state in which the second special symbol is the main variation and the first special symbol is the sub-variation. In this case, the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 is set as the variation display area of the first special symbol, and the small area Dm1 is set as the sub-variation display area regardless of the gaming state, so that the demo display for sub-variation can be displayed. It is possible to standardize the display data and the display control, and there is an effect that the processing load of the display control on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

<First modification of the fourth control example>
Next, the first modification in the above-mentioned fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 350. In the fourth control example described above, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times in the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed, and the special symbol is changed. A non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set when the additional pressing effect executed together and the remaining number of times on the display are 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more). , When the non-display mode is set, the configuration has a special addition effect that is executed when a big hit occurs when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within a predetermined number of times (5 times). The effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display was executed at various timings in the latent state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main control device 110. There is a device that makes it difficult for the player to understand how long the specific gaming state will continue by giving a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In such a gaming machine, by executing an effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display and converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the player can feel the specific gaming state without discomfort. It is configured to be played.

In this case, as the effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display, as described in the fourth control example described above, the additional effect (pressing additional effect) executed based on the fluctuation of the special symbol and the remaining number of times on the display are added. It is conceivable that the additional effect (special additional effect) is executed based on the fact that the number of times is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various additional effects in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times that the specific game state (latent state) is executed, and to give the player a sense of tension. It is possible to continue playing the game, and further, it is possible to give a sense of security when a large number of times are added by the additional effect.

However, the effect (additional effect) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display is different depending on the player, and the player can perform the additional effect of various patterns. There was a risk that the motivation would drop. Specifically, for players who prefer to keep the actual remaining number unknown until the remaining number on the display is low, and add the actual remaining number when the remaining number on the display is low. On the other hand, if the additional effect is performed before the remaining number of times on the display is reduced, the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number is reduced by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times the actual remaining number is added is reduced, and there is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the first modification, as the additional effect executed during the latent state, the effect mode (addition chance mode) that can be expected for each variable addition effect and the remaining number of times on the display are a predetermined number or less. Since the player can select the effect mode (post-notification mode) in which the additional effect is executed in the case of such a situation, the mode of the additional effect desired by the player can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation for the production is lowered.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the effect mode of the additional effect can be selected as described above, for example, the first effect mode in which the additional effect can be executed is set every time the change of the special symbol is executed, and the remaining on the display. If 3 times are displayed and the additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 rotations), the additional effect is performed. There was a problem that the timing of execution was missed and the effect of the production was reduced.

On the other hand, in this modification, it is possible to select the effect mode of the additional effect during the jackpot game in which 120 times are reset as the actual remaining number of times, and further, the remaining number of times on the display is a predetermined number of times as the effect mode. Based on the selection of the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when (for example, 5 rotations), the remaining number of times on the display is set to 100 during the jackpot effect.

Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode of the additional effect, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode regardless of which effect mode is selected at any timing.

The first modification of the fourth control example differs from the fourth control example in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed, and the content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 4 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the effect display executed by the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. In this first modification, as an effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display that moves in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach loss), some of the symbols are in the vertical direction. A moving variation pattern (scroll change effect) is set (see FIGS. 334 and 335). Further, when the jackpot G is won during the latent probability state, a plurality of effect modes in which different additional effect modes are executed during the jackpot game are configured to be selectable (see FIGS. 336 and 337).

First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335. FIG. 334 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the lateral direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the scroll change effect, and FIG. 334 (b) is a schematic diagram. , FIG. 335 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a part of the symbols is displayed in a suggestion mode suggesting that some symbols move in the vertical direction after the first reach mode is disengaged and stopped (temporary stop). FIG. 335 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed, and FIG. 335 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second reach mode is hit and stopped at the symbol. .. Since the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the lateral direction has the same contents as the above-described fourth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 334 (a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2 so that they can be controlled. During the symbol variation display (horizontal symbol variation display), the display control of the left display area Dz1 and the right display area Dz2 is collectively executed to change the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the display is executed and a special symbol variation display (vertical symbol variation display) different from the normal one is executed, the area subject to the vertical symbol variation (left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2) is executed. ) Is configured to execute the control to update only the display data. As a result, an appropriate symbol display effect can be executed only by updating the display data in the area suitable for the symbol variation display, so that the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing can be reduced.

In FIG. 334 (a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode), and as a result, the symbol is stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit. The symbol string L2 is stopped and displayed in a mode of being shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of symbols in which symbols showing the same number are stopped and displayed in a straight line).

After that, among the symbols stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a "lion", the symbol row L2 is a sub symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a "snake"). A symbol imitating a character is displayed in a movement direction suggestion mode indicating an action suggesting an action in the vertical direction (downward), and a vertical (downward) symbol sequence is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, the sub-symbol is displayed on the upper side of the symbol string L1 displayed in the left display area Dz1, and the sub-design is displayed on the lower side of the symbol string L3 displayed in the left display area Dz1 to display the left. A vertical symbol sequence (from the top, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a "lion", a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a "snake", and a symbol column displayed in this order) is displayed in the area Dz1. (See FIG. 334 (b)).

As a result, it can be suggested that each symbol displayed in the left display area Dz1 fluctuates in the vertical direction, and it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the first modification, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display mode of each symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 is changed and displayed, and the display is newly added in the left display area Dz1. Because it is configured to suggest that the reach (second reach mode) in which the symbol changes in the vertical direction is executed in the future only by executing the process of adding a new symbol and additionally displaying the vertical symbol column). , It is possible to reduce the processing load of control related to the symbol variation processing.

It should be noted that the configuration suggesting that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) in the right side display area Dz2 without using the configuration of the first modification. May be used. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the second reach mode (reach in which the symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction) is executed, as shown in FIG. 335 (a), the symbol row L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 is in the vertical direction (downward direction). As the second reach mode, the main symbol with the number "1" attached to the effective line V5 or the effective line V6 (the main symbol imitating an elephant) is stopped and displayed to indicate a big hit. A special double reach aspect is performed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the unidirectional symbol sequence (L1 to L3) can be obtained. It is also possible to easily execute a complicated symbol variation display. Further, as shown in FIG. 335 (a), it is possible to set a plurality of stop positions where a specific main symbol (main symbol with the number "1") indicates a jackpot, which raises the expectation of a jackpot. You can perform the production.

Then, when the execution of the second reach mode is completed and the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit, the main symbol (simulating an elephant) in which the number "1" is added to any of the effective lines V5 and V6. The main symbol) is stopped and displayed in a row (see FIG. 335 (b)). After that, a jackpot game is executed.

In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is from the state in which the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)) to the state in which the second reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped). An example of not changing the display data in areas other than the above is shown, but the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 is prevented from being updated, and other than that. The display data (for example, the display of "reach" displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be configured to be updated. As a result, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 334 (a) is executed, the display of "reach" is changed to the display of "multi-reach" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach mode. It can be updated and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In addition, a display area showing the current symbol change status (area in which "reach" is displayed in FIG. 334 (a)) is provided in the left display area Dz1, and the content to be displayed is appropriately changed according to the symbol change status. It may be configured to do so. As a result, the second reach mode is executed and the symbol variation status is executed only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (left display area Dz1) in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to execute the display according to the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing and to execute the effect of increasing the expectation of the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, the contents of the additional mode selection effect for selecting the additional effect executed during the latent state in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This addition mode selection effect is displayed on the display in order to converge the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent probability state (value of the residual probability variation number area 223o) and the remaining number of times on the display (value of the effect probability variation number counter 223p). It is an effect for selecting an effect mode (addition mode) of an additional effect that adds (adds) the remaining number of times of, and it is determined whether or not to execute the additional effect every time the change of the special symbol is started. The player can select any effect mode (addition mode) from the effect mode (addition chance mode) and the effect mode (post-notification mode) in which the addition effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number. It is a selectable production.

As a result, the player can select an effect mode in which the additional effect suitable for his / her taste is executed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended additional effect from being executed and the motivation to be lowered. ..

First, with reference to FIG. 336 (a), the display contents of the addition mode selection effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 336 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the addition mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the first modification, the addition mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

When the addition mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of times on the display (number of remaining probability changes in the effect) when the jackpot G is won continues in the remaining number of times display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. Is displayed. This makes it possible to easily check the remaining number of times on the display even during the jackpot game. In the main control device 110, the value of the probability variation counter 203k is cleared (set to 0) when the jackpot game is executed, but the remaining number of times on the display in the effect probability variation number area 223p of the voice lamp control device 113. By storing (setting) (the number of remaining probability changes in the effect), the remaining number of times on the display can be continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

Then, in the central area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a in which the characters "push" prompting the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is displayed, and "addition chance mode" is displayed on both sides thereof. The described first selected display D6b and the second selected display D6c described as "post-notification mode" are displayed, and the first selected position for selecting the first selected display D6b and the second selected display D6b are displayed. The selection display D6d that moves between the display D6c and the second selection position is displayed. In the display area D4, a display explaining the content of the additional mode selection effect is displayed as a telop, and in FIG. 336 (a), the description "Please select your favorite mode with a button" is displayed. Further, on the left side of the sub-display area Ds, the additional effect mode (addition mode) selected in the state where the jackpot is won is displayed, and it is easy to indicate which additional effect mode the player has selected. I am trying to figure it out.

During this addition mode selection effect, the specified addition mode is set by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the selection display D6d specifies the desired addition mode.

Then, in FIG. 336 (a), when the additional chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), "RUSH continuation" for notifying that the latent state continues. Is displayed, and the character 811 in a display mode congratulating the continuation of the latent state is displayed. Further, in this case, since the additional effect mode is not changed in the additional mode selection effect (because it is the "addition chance mode" at the time of winning the jackpot → the "addition chance mode" after the additional mode selection effect), the remaining number of times display area D1 The same "3 remaining times" as when the jackpot was won is continuously displayed. As a result, the latent state can be restarted in the same situation (remaining number of times on the display) as when the jackpot was won, so that the player is in the latent state without giving a sense of discomfort. You can play games.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. Thereby, by looking at the display contents of the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the addition mode at the time of the big hit and the addition mode after the addition mode selection effect.

On the other hand, in FIG. 336 (a), when the post-notification mode (second selected display D6c) is selected, “+97” is added so that the remaining number display area D1 indicates 100 times, as shown in FIG. 337. The display is executed. Other than that, the same content as described in FIG. 336 (b) is displayed. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this way, when the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect is different from the additional mode at the time of winning the big hit, the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100 times, so that the additional mode is newly executed. It is possible to smoothly add the effect without any discomfort, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in a state where the remaining number display area D1 indicates "3 times", and an additional mode selection effect during the jackpot game is executed. When the addition mode is changed from the addition chance mode to the post-notification mode, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left as "3 times", the addition effect is executed in the post-notification mode. There is a risk of losing an opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is within "5 times"), and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 100 times, so that the addition effect is executed in the post-notification mode. It is possible to reliably secure an opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is within "5 times").

In this first modification, it is configured so that whether or not the latent probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game is determined in the seventh round of the jackpot game (the ball passes through V in the seventh round). (Because it is configured so that the latent state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179) is passed), the above-mentioned additional effect mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the 8th round during the jackpot game. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of selecting the addition mode in a state where it is confirmed that the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times. Therefore, the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the jackpot If the latent state is not given after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional effect mode selection effect.

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 338 and 339, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A202ff1 provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 338, the second normal table A202ff1 is partially modified from the normal table 202f1 (see FIG. 195) used in the above-described fourth control example. It is different in that it is. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the fluctuation patterns specified in the second normal table A202ff1, the fluctuation patterns changed from the normal table A202f1 will be described. In the first modification of the fourth control example, the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is configured to be executed as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, in the case where the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to the range of "101 to 150" and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with "151". Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "~ 198".

Furthermore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is out and the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "71 to 150" and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is set. It is associated, and the range of "171 to 198" is out of range, and Super Reach C (30 seconds) is associated. In addition, when the lottery of the first special symbol is out and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "131 to 170" and corresponds to normal reach B (20 seconds). Attached, the range of "186 to 198" is out of range, and Super Reach C (30 seconds) is associated with it.

When the hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 183 (b)). , A mode in which the first reach mode indicates an deviation (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then a suggestion suggesting a scroll change effect. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggestion effect period, the reach effect (second reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed for 10 seconds (FIG. See 335 (a)). Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit (see FIG. 335 (b)).

When the hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 183 (b)). , A mode in which the first reach mode indicates an deviation (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then a suggestion suggesting a scroll change effect. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggestion effect period, the reach effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit.

When the out-of-order normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 183 (b)). A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a deviation (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334 (a)). After that, after the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation.

When the out-of-order super reach C (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 183 (b)). , A mode in which the first reach mode indicates an deviation (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then a suggestion suggesting a scroll change effect. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggestion effect period, the reach effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination indicating the disconnection.

As described above, in the first modification of the fourth control example, the scroll change effect is the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestion effect in the first 20 seconds of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds (17 seconds). 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the end of the suggestion effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed as it is in the combination of the deviations, and the deviation fluctuation time is 20 seconds (the deviation normal reach B), and the remaining 10 seconds is the third reach mode different from the second reach mode (the third reach mode). By combining with the fluctuation (hit super reach E, missed super reach C) in which 10 seconds) is executed, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player expectation for hit at various timings during the symbol fluctuation.

Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted. Further, in the first modification, since the hit expectation is different depending on the direction in which the third symbol restarts, the game is played while expecting the direction in which the third symbol restarts. be able to. It should be noted that during the execution of this suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 334 (b), it is suggested whether or not the third symbol is restarted by the third symbol display device 81, or the direction in which the third symbol is restarted. Since the effect (suggestion effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggestion effect to determine whether or not the third symbol is restarted, or the direction in which the third symbol is restarted. You can play the game while predicting.

In addition, in FIG. 334 (b), the suggestion effect of changing the display form of the third symbol to the display form (movement direction suggestion display form) suggesting the movement direction (downward direction) is executed, but other suggestions are executed. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the third symbol restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display form of the third symbol is displayed so that the character faces the left side (traveling direction) (second movement). Direction suggestion display form), suggestion effect that the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 changes to a display form suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, and display on the third symbol display device 81. Using other display bodies, there is a suggestion effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol.

Further, instead of suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, it may be configured to simply execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts. In this case, during the suggestion effect period, a suggestion effect (restart suggestion effect) suggesting that the third symbol is restarted is first executed, and then a suggestion suggesting the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It may be configured to execute the effect (restart direction suggestion effect). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation of the hit step by step, and it is possible to make the player continuously pay attention to the production.

Further, in the first modification, when the third symbol is restarted, the variation in the vertical direction (downward direction) or the variation in the horizontal direction (leftward direction) is executed. The three symbols may be restarted in a direction other than that, and for example, a variation pattern for restarting in the upward direction other than the above-mentioned downward direction may be provided as a restart in the vertical direction. In this case, the hit expectation of the fluctuation pattern in which the third symbol restarts in the vertical direction (upward, downward) is set to be different, and it is suggested that the third symbol restarts in the vertical direction as a suggestion effect. By providing a suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts upward, and a suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts downward, the player is provided with a suggestion effect. The degree of hit expectation can be notified step by step.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 339 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 399 (a), the ROM 222 in the first modification is provided with the addition mode selection table 222fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

The addition mode selection table 222fa stores the contents of each addition effect executed in the addition mode (addition chance mode, post-notification mode) that can be selected by the player during the latent state, and the addition mode effect selection. The effect corresponding to the additional mode effect selected in the process is read and executed.

FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In the first modification, the pressed a flag 223fa, the pressed b flag 223fb, the scroll change flag 223fc, the mode change flag 223d, the mode addition flag 223fd, and the addition mode setting area 223fe are added to the above-mentioned fourth control example. is doing.

In the pressed a flag 223fa, the frame button 22 is operated during the period set during reach (pressing period during reach) among the periods (operation valid period) in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined. It is a flag for indicating that, and is set to ON based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the pressing period during reach. The pressed a flag 223fa is set to on when the pressed pressing process (see S5332 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8002 in FIG. 341). It is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8201 in FIG. 343), and is then set to off (S8204 in FIG. 343).

The pressed b flag 223fb is operated by the frame button 22 during the period set during the big hit game (the big hit middle pressing period) among the period (operation valid period) in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined. It is a flag for indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and is set to ON based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the jackpot pressing period. The pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON when the jackpot middle pressing process (see S5334 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8102 in FIG. 342). It is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8207 in FIG. 343), and is then set to off (S8212 in FIG. 343).

The scroll change flag 223fc is a flag set to be turned on when the condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) in which the change direction of the third symbol is switched in the middle. This scroll change flag 223fc is set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period (suggestion effect period) of the fluctuation pattern (hit super reach D) in which the fluctuation direction of the third symbol can be switched in the middle. In addition, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in the scroll change effect, and the setting is turned on (see S8005 in FIG. 341). Then, it is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (see S8202 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined to be on (see S8202: Yes in FIG. 343), it is set to off (see S8203 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end processing (see S5537 in FIG. 343), the scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command output to the display control device 114 according to the setting status of the scroll change flag 223fc. is doing.

The mode change flag 223fd is a flag indicating that the addition mode currently set in the addition mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game has been changed, and is turned on when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect. It is set to. This mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105 in FIG. 342) when it is determined that the mode has been changed (S8104: Yes in FIG. 342) in the jackpot middle pressing process (see S5534 in FIG. 342). It is referred to in the end processing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8208 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined that it is set to on (S8208: Yes in FIG. 343), it is set to off (S8209 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end processing (S5537 in FIG. 343), the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is configured to be variable according to the setting status of the mode change flag 223fd, and the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON. If so, 100 is set in the value of the effect probability variation frequency area 223p (S8210 in FIG. 343). As a result, when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is set to 100, that is, it is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the state where the remaining number of times on the display (the number of remaining probability changes in the effect) is set to 100, and it is possible to suitably provide the additional effect executed in the added mode after the change. can.

The addition mode setting area 223fe is at least an area for setting (remembering) the currently set addition mode and the previously set addition mode, and is selected in the press end processing (S5537 processing in FIG. 343). The additional mode is set (S8211 in FIG. 343). Information indicating that the addition chance effect mode is set in the initial setting (S4001 in FIG. 235) of the start-up process (see FIG. 235) executed when the power is turned on is set in the addition mode setting area 223fe. It is configured so that the addition chance mode in the latent state is executed when the player has not selected the addition mode. The information (currently set additional mode) set (stored) in the additional mode setting area 223fe is referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (see S4361 in FIG. 344) (see S4391 in FIG. 344). Further, it is referred to in the remaining number of times command process 6 (see S4364 in FIG. 345) (see S5871 in FIG. 345), and the addition effect corresponding to the currently set addition mode is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 340 to 345, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. First, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 340. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4107).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is started, it is first determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. In the case (S5501: Yes), then it is determined whether the reach is being pressed (S5531).

In the process of S5531, if it is determined that the reach pressing period is in progress (S5531: Yes), the reach pressing process for changing the fluctuation direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol during the reach is executed (S5532). ), End this process. The details of the pressing process during reach (S5532) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341.

On the other hand, in the process of S5531, when it is determined that the reach pressing period is not poured (S5531: No), then it is determined whether it is the jackpot medium pressing period (S5533). In the process of S5533, if it is determined that the jackpot pressing period is in progress (S5553: Yes), the jackpot middle pressing process for selecting one addition mode from a plurality of addition modes having different types of additional effects to be executed is performed. Execute (S5534) to end this process. The details of this jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) will be described later with reference to FIG. 342.

Further, in the process of S5533, if it is determined that the pressing period is not during the big hit (S5533: No), other processes according to the pressing timing are executed (S5535), and this processing is terminated. The other pressing timing is an additional effect executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107 in FIG. 316) of the fourth control example described above in addition to the process of S5507 of the fourth control example described above. The middle pressing process (S5503 in FIG. 316) and the holding advance notice pressing process (S5505 in FIG. 316) are executed.

If the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected in the processing of S5501 (S5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (S5536), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing period. If this is the case (S5536: Yes), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 343) is executed (S5537), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 340) is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the contents of the reach pressing process (S5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing process during reach (S5532). This during-reach pressing process (S5532) executes a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach-during pressing period. Specifically, the process of determining whether or not the condition for changing the changing direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol is satisfied in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed.

When the pressed during reach process (S5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8001: No). , The pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8002), and then the display reach pressing command is set (S8003). By setting this display-during reach pressing command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed within the reach-during pressing period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that this pressed display mode is continuously displayed during the pressed period (suggested effect period) during reach, and although not shown, whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a mode that suggests the degree of expectation or the direction of restarting.

After finishing the processing of S8003, it is next determined whether the executed fluctuation pattern is the hit super reach D (see FIG. 338) (that is, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (S8004). .. In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a hit and super reach D (S8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the hit Super Reach D (S8004: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, when it is determined in the process of S8001 that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the pressed period during reach (second and subsequent times). Since the frame button operation has been executed), all the processes are skipped and this process is terminated. In the first modification of the fourth control example, the reach pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the reach pressing period. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, the reach middle pressing process (S5532) is executed, or the lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), and the lottery result is obtained. It may be configured so that the pressing process during reach (S5532) is executed when a hit occurs. With such a configuration, the content of the effect to be executed can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534). This jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executes a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the jackpot middle pressing period (addition mode selection effect period). Specifically, the process for setting the addition mode in the latent state executed after the end of the big hit is performed based on the content of operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the addition mode selection effect (see FIG. 336). Will be executed.

When the jackpot middle press process (S5534) is executed, it is first determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No). , The pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8102), and then the display jackpot middle press command is set (S8103). By setting this display jackpot middle-press command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot middle-pressed period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. Although this pressed display mode is not shown, the button D6a shown in FIG. 336 (a) is displayed in a pressed mode, and the selection display D6d is stopped and displayed at a designated position for the selected addition mode, and is designated. It is displayed in an manner indicating that the selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side has been selected.

After finishing the process of S8103, it is next determined whether or not the addition mode has been changed (S8104). Here, the addition mode can be changed by reading the addition mode that was set before the jackpot game is executed from the addition mode setting area 223fe and comparing it with the addition mode selected in the addition mode selection effect this time. It is determined whether it was done. If it is determined in the process of S8104 that the addition mode has been changed (S8104: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition mode has not been changed (S8104: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON in the processing of S8101 (S8101: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the jackpot middle pressing period (second and subsequent times). Since the frame button operation has been executed), all the processes are skipped and this process is terminated. In the first modification of the fourth control example, the jackpot middle pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the jackpot middle pressing period, and the addition mode is determined. However, for example, the addition mode may be configured to be reconfigurable as long as it is within the jackpot middle press period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the contents of the press end processing (S5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing end processing (S5537). This pressing end processing (S5537) is a processing executed at the timing when the pressing period (reach middle pressing period, jackpot middle pressing period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 ends, and is during each pressing period. To set the effect content to be executed after the press period ends, based on the status of the flag set in.

When the pressing end processing (S5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201). Here, when it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is not set to on (set to off) (S8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the pressed period during reach. Since this is not the case, the process (S8202 to S8205) based on the frame button operation within the pressed period during reach is skipped and the process proceeds to S8207.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201 when it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202). If it is determined that it is set to on (S8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to off (S8203), the display scroll change command is set (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8206.

If it is determined in the process of S8202 that the scroll change flag 223fc is not set to on (set to off), a display scroll non-change command is set (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8206. In the process of S8206, the pressed a flag 223fa is set to off (S8206).

After finishing the processing of S8206, it is next determined whether or not the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207). Here, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is not set to on (set to off) (S8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the jackpot middle pressing period. Since this is not the case, the process (S8208 to S8212) based on the frame button operation within the jackpot middle press period is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the jackpot pressing period (during the addition mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p and the setting content of the addition mode setting area 223fe are not changed. The latent state after the end of the big hit game is executed in a manner in which the state at the time of winning the big hit (addition mode and the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1) is continued. Therefore, when the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the addition mode selection effect because he does not want to change the addition mode during the latent state, the addition mode and the addition mode after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 from being changed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8207, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8208). If it is determined that it is set to on (S8208: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to off (S8209), the value of the effect probability variation frequency area is set to 100 (S8210), and the selected addition mode is set. Is set in the addition mode setting area 223fe (S8211). Then, the pressed b flag 223fb is set to off, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8208 that the mode change flag 223fd is not set to on (set to off) (S8208: No), the processing of S8209 and S82110 is skipped to the processing of S8211. Transition. In this way, when the addition mode is changed during the addition mode selection effect, by setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p to 100, the added mode after the change is set in the latent state executed after the jackpot game ends. The additional effect used can be suitably executed. Further, when the addition mode is selected so that the addition mode is not changed during the addition mode selection effect (see S8208), the process of setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p (S8210) is skipped, so that the probability is latent. When the player intentionally selects the same addition mode as the addition mode currently set during the addition mode selection effect because he does not want to change the addition mode during the state, the addition mode and the remaining mode after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area D1 from being changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6. The special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) is added to the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 319) of the fourth control example described above based on the type of the addition mode currently set. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process has been added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) is executed, first, the same processes as those of S4371 to S4373 and S4375 of the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) of the above-described fourth control example are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4373 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4373: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (S4391). In the process of S4391, the information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 223fe is read out, and the determination is executed based on the addition mode information.

When it is determined in the process of S4391 that the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (S4391: Yes), S4374 of the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) of the above-mentioned fourth control example. , S4376 Performs the same processing and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set addition mode is not the addition chance mode (post-notification mode) (S4391: No), the processing of S4374 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode. In the case of, the additional effect setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional effect.If the currently set additional mode is the post-notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not executed and is actually By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-notification (additional effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) is increased. Can be made larger. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the details of the residual probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the residual probability variation number command process 6 (S4364). The residual probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) is related to the addition effect based on the type of the addition mode currently set for the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process has been added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the residual probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) is executed, first, the same processes as S5851 and S5852 of the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above are executed, and in the process of S5851. If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post-notification mode (S5871). In the process of S5871, the information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 223fe is read out, and the determination is executed based on the addition mode information.

When it is determined in the process of S5871 that the post-notification mode is set (S5871: Yes), the same process as S5853 to S5861 of the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above is performed. Execute and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5871 that the post-notification mode is not set (additional chance mode is set) (S5871: No), the processes of S5853 to S5861 are skipped and the present process is terminated. ..

With this configuration, when the residual probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) is executed (when the change of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode. In that case, the additional effect setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional effect. If the currently set additional mode is the post-notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not executed and the actual By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-notification (additional effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) is increased. can do. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect desired by the player.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 350, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. In this modification, the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 346) differs from the above-described fourth control example in that a press-related command process is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 346. In the command determination process 6, the processes S6401 to S6417 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 247) in the fourth control example described above.

Then, in the process of S6416, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not the display press-related command has been received (S6431).

If it is determined that the display press-related command has been received in the process of S6431 (S6431: Yes), the press-related command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to the process of S6401. The details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350.

On the other hand, in the process of S6431, when it is determined that the press-related command has not been received (S6431: No), then other command processes are executed in the same manner as in the first control example (S6418), and S6401. Return to processing.

Next, the details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350. The press-related command process (S6432) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (execution) the press-related effect.

In the press-related command processing (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not the press command during the reach for display has been received (S8301). If it is determined in the process of S8301 that the press command during reach for display has been received (S8301: Yes), the press command process during reach is executed (S8302), and the process proceeds to S8303.

Here, the details of the press command process during reach (S8302) will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the press command processing during reach. This reach press command process executes a process corresponding to the display reach press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the reach press command processing, first, the reach press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the reach press command for display is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8402).

Then, based on the reach pressing display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8405), the press command processing during reach is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8301 when it is determined that the display reach pressing command has not been received (S8301: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll change command has been received (S8303).

If it is determined that the display scroll change command has been received in the process of S8303 (S8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (S8304), and the process proceeds to the process of S8305.

Here, the details of the scroll change command processing (S8304) will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the scroll change command processing. This scroll change command process executes the process corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the scroll change command process, first, a symbol array for vertical scrolling is set based on the display content displayed in the display area Dm1 and the pass / fail related information, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, a vertically scrolling effect display data table corresponding to the display content of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scrolling effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8502). ). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8503).

Then, based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8502, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8507). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8508), the scroll change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8303, when it is determined that the display scroll change command has not been received (S8303: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305).

If it is determined in the process of S8305 that the scroll non-change command for display has been received (S8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (S8306), and the process proceeds to the process of S8307.

Here, the details of the scroll non-change command processing (S8306) will be described with reference to FIG. 350 (a). FIG. 350 (a) is a flowchart showing scroll non-change command processing. This scroll non-change command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the scroll non-change command processing, first, the scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8602).

Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8605), the scroll non-change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (S8305: No), then it is determined whether or not the display jackpot middle press command has been received (S8307).

If it is determined in the process of S8307 that the display jackpot middle press command has been received (S8307: Yes), the jackpot middle press command process is executed (S8308), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 350 (b), the details of the jackpot middle press command process (S8308) will be described. FIG. 350 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle press command processing. This jackpot middle press command process executes the process corresponding to the display jackpot middle press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot middle press command processing, first, the jackpot middle press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the jackpot middle press command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot middle press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702).

Then, based on the jackpot middle-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8705), the jackpot middle press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8307 that the display jackpot middle press command has not been received (S8307: No), this process ends.

<Another example in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, another example in the first modification of the above-mentioned fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 354. In this alternative example, the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) executed in the first modification of the fourth control example described above is combined with the special reach effect (FIG. 184, FIG. 184, which is executed in the first control example described above. (See FIG. 185) is configured to be feasible to perform a combined reach effect. As a result, it is possible to execute a complicated reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this alternative example, the inside of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed for each control example described above, and the operation is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The difference is that the partial processing has been changed. Other configurations are the same as each configuration and various control processes used in each of the above-mentioned control examples. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 351 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 used in the present alternative example will be described. FIG. 351 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 351 (a), in this alternative example, for each control example described above, a symbol string L4 that is scrolled and displayed in a variable manner in the left-right direction is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1 and is displayed in the left-right direction. The difference is that the symbol string L8, which is scrolled and displayed in a variable manner, is added to the lower side of the symbol string L3.

Further, in this alternative example, in the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm in which the symbols are variablely displayed is scrolled in the left-right direction and the five (five columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4) are variablely displayed. , And L8), the number of symbol columns that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three columns), and the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is switched in the vertical direction. Of the five (five columns) symbol strings (L1 to L4, and L8) that are scrolled in the left-right direction and displayed in a variable manner, the symbol strings displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

Then, the fluctuation control of five (five columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4, and L8) is executed for the fluctuation region Dz3 in which the main display region Dm is wider than the display region that can be displayed. , The display control is configured to be executed for the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when changing the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dmm, the changed symbol sequence can be displayed only by executing the display control based on the fluctuation control content executed in advance. , It is possible to execute the variable display of the symbol sequence for the player without delay.

In addition, the present alternative example is different in that the symbol columns L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are preset. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, the combination pattern of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) is set in advance in the first reach mode, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is used. The symbol sequence corresponding to the second reach mode is set so that the second reach mode is executed.

Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, the display is controlled so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) by one frame off as the first reach mode, and the stop of the first reach mode is performed. In the (temporary stop) display state, the display area in the vertical direction in which the symbol indicating the combination of reach (reach symbol) and the symbol displayed to be stopped (temporarily stopped) by one frame off (temporary stop) are not displayed. The second reach mode of variable display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is executed. In this way, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame off stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial stage when the second reach mode is executed. It is possible to pattern a symbol array.

Then, in this alternative example, as the symbol array corresponding to the second reach mode, the symbol array corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode is stored in advance for each of the symbol sequences L5 to L7. Therefore, the second reach mode is configured to be feasible corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. As a result, when the second reach mode is executed using a part of the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first reach mode, the effect can be executed without delay.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 351 (b) to 352 (b), the content of the composite reach effect in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 351 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the symbol variation in the left-right direction is executed in the composite reach effect, and FIG. 352 (a) is a main display area Dm in the composite reach effect. FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the area displayed in is changed, and FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the symbol change in the vertical direction is executed in the composite reach effect. be. In this compound reach effect, symbol variation (normal symbol variation) in the left-right direction using symbol sequences L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 351 (b)), and then the display area is displayed in the main display area Dm. A reach effect (first reach mode) in which the symbol row is changed upward or downward is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352 (a)), and the fluctuation direction (scrolling direction) of the symbols is changed from the left-right direction to the up-down direction. The reach effect (second reach mode) changed to the above is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352 (b)), and the effect is composed of a total of 30 seconds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351 (b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating deviation in the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm. )Is displayed. At this point, the fluctuation control of the symbol sequence (L4, L8) that is not displayed in the main display area Dm (the fluctuation data is updated according to the progress (elapsed time) of the fluctuation time) is executed. That is, when the compound reach effect is executed, first, the execution of the variation control is started for all the symbol sequences (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to the symbol variation in the left-right direction, and among them, the main display is performed. Fluctuation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed for the symbol strings (L1 to L3) displayed in the area Dm, and for the symbol strings (L4, L8) set outside the main display area Dm. , 20 seconds (the period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 352 (a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)) is executed. In this way, even for the symbol string that is not displayed in the main display area Dm, by executing the fluctuation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect, the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dm is changed and a new one is created. When displaying a symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence L4 or L8), the display can be performed without delay.

In the example shown in FIG. 351 (b), the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is located at the center position of the symbol row L1 and at the right position of the symbol row L2. The temporary stop is temporarily displayed in the stopped (temporarily stopped) disengagement display mode (first temporary stop mode). When the deviation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the deviation display mode shown in FIG. 351 (b), and the symbol variation ends.

Then, a suggestion effect suggesting that the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed while the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode (for example, FIG. 184 (b)). As shown in the above, an effect suggesting that the display form of the character attached to the third symbol is changed to change the display area, and a display suggesting that the display area is changed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 352 (a)).

In the example shown in FIG. 352 (a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol columns L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area), and the first temporary stop mode (1st temporary stop mode). (See FIG. 351 (b)), the symbol string L3 displayed in the main display area Dm has moved out of the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop mode, which was a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating disengagement, the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is a symbol sequence. It will be displayed in the reach display mode (first reach mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right position of the symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol string) displayed by the main display area Dm, the player can be hit from the stop display mode (first temporary stop mode) that is once thought to be out of alignment. Since it is possible to change to the reach display mode (first reach mode) in which the player can expect the hit, it is possible to continue to have the expectation for the hit even after the third symbol indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed. It is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game.

In this alternative example, the third symbol of the first temporary stop mode (each third symbol displayed in FIG. 351 (b)) reaches by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. Since the effect (first reach mode) is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a feasible combination, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward, but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination that can execute the reach effect (first reach mode) by moving it to the lower side, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved to the lower side. The process is executed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm so as to be movable in two different directions (upper side or lower side), a combination of the third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. Can be increased.

That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable in only one direction, the main display area Dm before the movement is performed in order to execute the reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement. It was necessary to display the same third symbol in a row in the symbol row displayed on the upper side and the center of the main display area Dm, but the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower). When the configuration is used, it is the same as either the symbol row displayed on the upper side and the center of the main display area Dm before the movement or the symbol row displayed on the lower side and the center of the main display area Dm before the movement. By displaying the third symbol in a row, the reach effect (first reach mode) can be executed in the display area after the movement, so that the third symbol that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode can be displayed. It is possible to increase the number of combinations of the above, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting whether or not the symbol variation develops into the first reach mode, that is, the symbol variation effect to be executed in the future. There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Then, in the reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. 352 (a), the third symbol (the number 1 is added) to the right position of the symbol row L4, which is the target of the reach effect, is attached (“elephant”). 3rd symbol with a character imitating ")) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop), that is, among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol The third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in FIG. 352 (b)) that is the same as the right position of the column (symbol column L2) and the middle symbol column (symbol column L1) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop) (temporary stop). When stopped (temporarily stopped) in the second temporary stop display mode), as shown in FIG. 352 (b), the symbol displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) at the left position of the symbol rows L1, L2, L4 is a symbol. It is variablely displayed in the vertical direction as column L5.

As a result, the same reach effect as that described in the second reach mode (see FIG. 335 (a)) described in the first modification of the fourth control example described above is executed. The contents of the second reach mode are described above. Since it is the same as the first modification of the fourth control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example, as a compound reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is used. The display area was changed so that the array was displayed, the first reach mode was made feasible, the first reach mode was temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol change was changed. The second reach mode is configured to be feasible. As a result, it is possible to perform a reach effect with a high effect on the player.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the compound reach effect, when the deviation variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the provisional stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect as when the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped (at least a part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. At the same time, even when the deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the compound reach effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This alternative example differs from the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned control examples in that the contents of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. The other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 353 (a), the contents of the character storage area 234a2 in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 353 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 234a2. As shown in FIG. 353 (a), the character storage area 234a2 has a command for designating a display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113). ) Is stored in the display area storage area 234a2a, and the symbol array used when executing the symbol variation display executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The storage area 234a2b for arrangement and the other storage area 234a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored are defined.

Here, the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (b). FIG. 353 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a. In the display area storage area 234a2a, as display area types, the display area 1 (reference area) in which the symbol sequences L1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm and the symbol sequences L1, L2, and L4 are in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the symbol arrangements L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The display area to be displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on the command for designating the display area of (display area change information included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113).

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. , The display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display contents are updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received display variation pattern command. .. Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 257), a drawing list is created for the symbol string corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. is doing. As a result, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol string to be displayed. In this case, a flag (storage area) for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 234a2a is provided, and the determination is executed with reference to the flag. good.

Next, the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 234a2b will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (c). FIG. 353 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 234a2b. In the symbol array storage area 234a2b, a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when the normal variation is executed and a vertically scrolling symbol array used when the second reach mode is executed are stored. Has been done. The symbol array for vertical scrolling includes a symbol array (for vertical scrolling 1) corresponding to the symbol array L5 (see FIG. 351 (a)) and a symbol array corresponding to the symbol array L6 (see FIG. 351 (a)). When the 2) for vertical scrolling and the symbol array (3 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to the symbol string L7 (see FIG. 351 (a)) are stored and the second reach mode is executed for each. The symbol array corresponding to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in is stored.

Specifically, as a symbol array of vertical scrolling 1 (symbol sequence L5), when the second reach mode is executed, the third symbol with the number 1 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the reach-off display mode. When the "symbol array 1" to the second reach mode set in the case of (see FIG. 334) is executed, the third symbol with the number 9 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the reach out display mode. Nine types up to the "symbol arrangement 9" that is set when the above is set are set. In this alternative example, the display mode (first temporary stop mode) of the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) when the second reach mode is executed is set to be a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of vertically scrolling symbol arrangement types stored in the symbol arrangement storage area 234a2b.

Similar to the symbol arrangements 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertically scrolling 1 (symbol sequence L5), the vertical scrolling 2 (symbol sequence L6) and the vertical scrolling 3 (symbol sequence L7) are also used, respectively. Nine kinds of symbol arrangements are set. When the third symbol, which is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, is variablely displayed in the vertical direction (vertically scrolled display), the first temporary stop mode is 2 This is a case where the third symbol of the type is stopped (temporarily stopped) by a combination indicating a disconnection in a state where the third symbol of the type is in the reach state (so-called double reach state).

In this way, by storing in advance the symbol arrangement used in the second reach mode (reach mode executed after changing the fluctuation direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol), the second reach mode is delayed. Can be executed without. Further, by predetermining the combination of the third symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode, it is possible to reduce the types of the symbol arrangement used when executing the second reach mode. ..

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, the pointer update process 2 executed for another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 354. The pointer update process 2 differs from the pointer update process (S7205 in FIG. 254) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pointer update process 2 (S7205). When the pointer update process 2 (S7205) is executed, first, the same process as S7401 of the pointer update process (see FIG. 254) described above is executed, and then it is determined whether the display area is changed at the timing. (S7431). When it is determined in the process of S7341 that it is the timing to change the display area (S7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 234a2a (S7432). , The determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (S7433). Then, it shifts to S7402.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7341 that it is not the timing when the display area is changed, the processing of S7432 and S7343 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7402. In S7402 to S7406, the same processing as in S7402 to S7406 of the pointer update processing (see FIG. 254) described above is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example, as a compound reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol arrangement is used. The display area is changed so that is displayed, the first reach mode can be executed, the first reach mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol change is changed. The two reach modes are configured to be feasible. As a result, it is possible to perform a reach effect with a high effect on the player. In this alternative example, two types of fluctuation directions of the symbol row are set, that is, the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, but the symbol row may be configured to be changed in other directions.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the compound reach effect, when the deviation variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the provisional stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect as when the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped (at least a part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. At the same time, even when the deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the compound reach effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the symbol string data used when executing the first reach mode and the symbol string data used when executing the second reach mode are stored and set differently, they are stored for each symbol column. By combining the data, various effects can be executed. Further, the first combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the combination of symbols set in the symbol string used in the second reach mode match. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the reach mode is set, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player when switching the effect mode from the first reach mode to the second reach mode.

It should be noted that the display control of each symbol string (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode is executed while the display control of each symbol string (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is executed. May be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the display of the first reach mode is executed and a layer in which the display of the second reach mode is executed are separately provided, and in the state where the first reach mode is executed, the display of the second reach mode is played. It may be controlled so that the person cannot see it, and the display control of each layer may be switched at the timing when the second reach mode is executed so that the player can see the second reach mode.

In each of the control examples described above, a case where a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed at the same time is used has been described. The symbol display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display the fluctuations of the special symbol (special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) and the normal symbol, and the technique described in each of the above-mentioned control examples may be applied. In this case, it is possible to achieve more effect by making the privilege executed when the special symbol is won the same as the privilege executed when the special symbol is won as a result of the lottery of the normal symbol. can.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the right-handed rotation unit 600 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a transmission member thereof. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for imparting a driving force to the vehicle, the transmission member includes a drive pin, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively. The first groove includes an action section affected by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, and the second groove includes at least an action section affected by the drive pin and the first groove. The groove and the second groove are overlapped with each other, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Displacement machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A directing member having a transmission member to be transmitted and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided through the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

According to this gaming machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the effect member is driven from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. Is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is increased, and the front view of the effect member is increased accordingly. There was a problem that the outer shape of the machine became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, and it is not preferable to increase the size of the outer shape of the effect member in the front view because it hinders the increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are overlapped (superimposed). Compared with the case of the conventional product in which the grooves and the second grooves are arranged side by side, the space required for the arrangement of the first grooves and the second grooves can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in the front view. In this case, even when the size of the liquid crystal display device is required to be increased, the space in the thickness direction (front-back direction) is relatively large, and the first groove and the second groove are formed like the gaming machine A1. In the configuration of superimposing the above, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in the front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted into the overlapped first groove and the second groove, the drive force from the transmission member is transferred by the drive pin 1 to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. It is possible to transmit to the above, and it is not necessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be shared, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The member is displaced with respect to the base member. In this case, in a state where the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are affected by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is from the transmission member. In the state of being affected (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member, and is connected to a driven member on which the second groove is formed and a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine A2 comprising a connecting displacement member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member, and the driven member on which the second groove is formed and the driven member thereof. Since it is provided with a connected displacement member that is connected to the driven portion and is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member, a link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connected displacement member. As a result, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connected displacement member can be largely relative-displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member is capable of forming a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped with each other. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member in the front view.

In the gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped with each other. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position in the posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped with each other. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in the front view by the amount of the overlap.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member includes an overhanging portion formed by projecting to the opposite side of the decorative portion with a portion displaceably distributed to the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member projects to the opposite side of the decorative portion with a portion displaceable to the first displacement member sandwiched between them. Since the overhanging portion to be formed is provided, the overhanging portion can play the role of a weight.

For example, when driving the driven portion and lifting the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the overhanging portion is formed on the opposite side to the decorative portion, so that the weight of the overhanging portion is used. , The decorative part can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be quickly lifted and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. Further, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be suspended, so that the decorative portion can be compared with the case where only the decorative portion is formed in the cantilever state. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to abut on the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the driven portion is driven and connected. When the displacement member is displaced, the overhanging portion is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connected displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion that serves as a weight can also serve to suppress rattling by contacting the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape in the gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that it is possible to secure the weight and rigidity while reducing the outer shape. can. Therefore, while the overhanging portion is hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, in a state where it cannot be visually recognized from the front), the connected displacement member can be displaced while functioning as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member. It is possible to surely exert the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the vehicle.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a protruding portion projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The 1-displacement member includes an abutting portion formed so as to be able to abut on the protruding portion, and the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protruding portion has the above-mentioned. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by abutting the contact portion.

According to the game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion serves as the first displacement member. Since the bearing is supported in a raised state from the base member, it is possible to form a space for arranging the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Therefore, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be arranged in a superposed posture.

In this case, according to the gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a protruding portion formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the protruding portion. By providing the contact portion with the protruding portion, the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed position, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has relatively high rigidity and is located on the outer peripheral side thereof. When a dead space is formed, a protrusion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the contact portion is brought into contact with the protrusion so that the first displacement member can rotate relative to the base member. The rigidity of the regulated part can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

A9 of the gaming machine A8, wherein the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that when the first displacement member is displaced, By contacting the protruding portion of the base member with the back surface of the first displacement member, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the first displacement member. Further, since the protruding portion having the role of regulating the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can also have the role of contacting the first displacement member and suppressing rattling, the structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the gaming machine A9 subordinate to the gaming machine A2, since the second displacement member (driven member and the connected displacement member) is arranged on the first displacement member, the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the machine, which tends to cause rattling. Therefore, a configuration in which the protruding portion of the base member is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member is effective.

In the gaming machine A9, the one end side of the first displacement member in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is at the edge portion of the first displacement member on the one end side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be in contact with the back surface of the side edge portion, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, the protruding portion can be arranged at a position where the tilting can be suppressed. As a result, the rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member in the gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protruding portion is increased. Can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the rigidity in the direction supporting the tilt (that is, the direction in which the protruding portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member) can be increased, so that the first displacement member rattles. It is possible to effectively suppress the sticking.

A12 of the gaming machines A12, wherein the base member includes an inclined surface formed by chamfering a ridge line portion on a side surface thereof and a front surface thereof.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface thereof. 2 It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being locked to the side surface of the base member and becoming undisplaceable. In this case, in the present invention, since the connected displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably and cantilevered on the back surface of the first displacement member, the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member is displaced. When the second displacement member is displaced, the connected displacement member of the second displacement member is likely to swing in a direction in which the second displacement member is close to and separated from the base member, and the connected displacement member is likely to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, a configuration in which an inclined surface is provided on the base member is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, in the second displacement member, the connecting displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member is projected from the front surface thereof and extended along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 characterized by having a ridge.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A12, the base member includes a ridge protruding from the front surface thereof and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member, so that the tip of the ridge is provided. Can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the second displacement member.

Here, in the second displacement member, since the connection displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material, when the connection displacement member is displaced and visually recognized by the player, the irradiated light is transmitted to produce an effect. Can be enhanced. In this case, when the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connected displacement member when the second displacement member is displaced, cloudiness is formed on the connected displacement member due to rubbing with the front surface of the base member. The effect of transmitting light of the connected displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member, so that the connection displacement member is rubbed. Cloudiness due to can be partially. As a result, it is possible to exert the effect of transmitting light through the connected displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member is provided with a connecting pin that connects the driven member and the connecting displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridges of the base member are formed by the second displacement member. A gaming machine A14 characterized in that it is extended along the locus of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connecting pin that connects the driven member and the connecting displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and has a convex strip of the base member. Is extended along the locus of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the protruding tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing between the ridges and the portion made of the light-transmitting material of the connecting displacement member, and to exert the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member. Can be done.

In the game machine A13 or A14, a gear interposed between the drive means and the transmission member is provided, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for axially supporting the gear in its internal space, and the base member thereof. A game machine A15, wherein the gear receiving portion is projected from the front surface of the base member, and the convex stripe is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13 or A14, the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion protruding from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member is the base. It is possible to prevent the gear receiving portion protruding from the side surface of the member from being locked and unable to be displaced or the displacement being hindered. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to the position corresponding to the gear receiving part, it is possible to project the gear receiving part from the front surface of the base member. Can be done. As a result, the gears can be stored in the internal space in a rotatable state while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held by the gear receiving portion of the base member, so that the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted into the gear. ) Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is a retracted position located on the front surface of the base member. It is formed so as to be displaceable from the overhanging position overhanging in the direction away from the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is arranged on the overhanging position side with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission member. A game machine A16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is the transmission member. Since it is arranged on the overhanging position side of the rotation axis of the above, the area of the first displacement member overhanging to the overhanging position can be made larger, while the first displacement member can be located between the retracted position and the overhanging position. Even in the case of, a transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easily invisible to the player.

In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is the transmission member when the second displacement member is extended to an overhanging position. A game machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be in contact with a bearing portion.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effect of the game machine A16, the base member is provided with a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is such that the second displacement member projects to the overhanging position. In this case, the bearing portion of the base member is formed so as to be in contact with the bearing portion, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member having the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means can also serve as a stopper for restricting the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It can be simplified and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed posture, and the rigidity is relatively high. Where a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof, the transmission member is brought into contact with the bearing portion to ensure the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member. Therefore, the durability can be improved, the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member has a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member projects to the overhanging position, the bearing portion receives the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it can be formed.

According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is extended to the overhanging position, the bearing is provided. Since the portion is receptively formed in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amount of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, since the position of the rotation axis of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while securing the movable range of the transmission member, the first displacement member retracts while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. During the displacement between the position and the overhanging position, it is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, a state in which the transmission member cannot be seen from the front).

In any of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the positive direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted on by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and the second. After each of the displacement members is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove. The gaming machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. ..

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the positive direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the first direction, respectively, and then the first displacement member. 1 The displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia due to the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction. The forces can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force and improve the durability.

The gaming machine A19 includes one or a plurality of gears interposed between the driving means and the transmitting member to transmit the driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A game machine A20 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the transmission member is driven in the positive direction, the weight is increased. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member can be stopped last. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the gears.

That is, from the state where the transmission member is driven in the positive direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is second. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by shifting the transmission member from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the drive means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is generated on the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped is the rotation of the drive means and the gear. However, since the member to be stopped in this case is only the second displacement member having a light weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member that is displaceably arranged in the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced by the action of the second displacement member. The gaming machine A21 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A20, the first displacement member is provided with a third displacement member displaceably arranged, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a third groove, and the third groove is provided. The gaming machine A22 comprising an action section affected by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere with each other.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effect of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member has a third groove. Since the third groove includes an action section affected by the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere with each other, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. And a mode in which only one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, the gaming machine A23 is characterized in that the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in the third displacement member.

According to the game machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, the third displacement member is displaced. By causing the second displacement member to be relatively displaced, the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the third displacement member, and as a result, the first The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the left rotation unit 700 as an example>
The base member, the first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the second displacement member displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member thereof. The second displacement member is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member. In a gaming machine that is displaced relative to a first displacement member, the connecting member is connected to a connecting first member whose one end is connected to the base member and the other end to the other end of the connecting first member. Along with this, a connecting second member having one end connected to the second displacement member is provided, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the first displacement member. There is a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for displacementing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). Displacement No. -17886).

According to this gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member is displaced. , The second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the base member, the connecting member connecting the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There was a problem that it became visible to a person and the appearance was spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member is connected to the first connecting member whose one end is connected to the base member and the other end to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. A first displacement member is used as a base because it is provided with a second connecting member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. Even when the member is displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (connecting first member and connecting second member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably displaced on the first displacement member. The gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the connecting second member of the connecting member can be slidably displaced to the first displacement member. Since it is arranged, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, the amount of rotation thereof is large (that is, it is necessary to increase the displacement amount of the first connecting member and the second connecting member). Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the connecting second member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and the appearance from being impaired.

Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the connection second member of the connecting member is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the first displacement member, so that the connection line and the connection second member can be displaced. It is possible to easily suppress the interference with. Therefore, in order to avoid interference, it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection line, and the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the connecting first. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is generated. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted from the drive body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connecting member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When connecting the drive body to the first displacement member, the drive body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the drive body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member. There is. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member a size including the displacement locus of the connecting member and the connecting portion to which the drive body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member is increased by that amount. do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member may be set to a size corresponding only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member and is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the base member is a base-side engaging member. The displacement side engaging member formed so as to be engageable with the base side engaging member in a state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that one is provided.

Here, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The base member and the second displacement member are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to incline the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine B4, in the connecting member, since the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member, the first displacement member is connected at the retracted position. With the rotation axis as the base end, the portion on the side opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) becomes the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tends to tilt in the direction away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base side engaging member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member engages on the displacement side. In a state where the member is provided and the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are formed so as to be engageable, so that the side opposite to the rotation axis of the first displacement member is formed. It is possible to prevent the portion (second displacement member side) from tilting in the direction away from the base member.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member, the engagement position between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is set to the first. The position can be relatively far from the axis of rotation of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) is tilted in a direction away from the base member. It can be effectively suppressed.

In the game machine B5, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member and the tip of the base portion. Each of the bent portions has an inner surface as an engaging surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position so that the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other. , The engaging surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side, or (and) the engagement of the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member is from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engaging surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the displacement-side engaging. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engaging surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between the two is wider toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member is shaken, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member Can be easily engaged.

Further, according to the gaming machine B6, the engaging surface of the bent portion at at least one of the base side engaging member or the displacement side engaging member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member is directed toward the retracted position. When displaced, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member as the engaging surface of the bent portion is tilted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member from the base member at the retracted position, and it is possible to absorb the rattling of the second displacement member and maintain its posture.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member have a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and the tip of the base portion bent. Each of the bent portions having an inner surface formed as an engaging surface is provided, and the first displacement member is displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position so that the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of the other party is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5 or B6, a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the other party is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member. In the state where the displacement member is arranged in the retracted position (the state in which the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is accepted by the receiving portion and is close to the base member of the second displacement member. Displacement in the direction can be tolerated. Therefore, the vertical dimensions of the bases of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are increased to facilitate engagement between the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, and at the retracted position, the second position is reached. Displacement of the displacement member in a direction close to the base member can be allowed to prevent damage due to collision.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to the gaming machine B7, when the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the displacement side engaging member is engaged with the first displacement member. The gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to the game machine B7, when the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the displacement side engaging member becomes the first displacement member. It is engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement side engaging member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member from rattling with respect to the first displacement member at the overhanging position. Further, the displacement side engaging member that engages with the base side engaging member at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member to the base member, and engages with the first displacement member at the overhanging position to perform the second displacement. Since the member can be combined with the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, an interposing means provided between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is provided, and the interposing means is provided with respect to the base member. The mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member differs depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction. A gaming machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, an interposing means provided between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is provided, and the interposing means thereof is provided. Is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member in the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member may be different depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction with respect to the base member. Can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the connecting second member, and one end of the first displacement member or the connecting second member. The other side is provided with a guide portion for guiding the guided portion, and the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the second displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that by guiding the guide portion by different routes of the guide portion, the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is different.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the interposing means may be used depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guide portion by different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is different. Therefore, depending on the shape of the guided portion, the first The mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom in the design can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. The gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, the interposing means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released, so that the first displacement with respect to the base member is released. It is possible to easily make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member significantly different depending on the case where the member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Concept of the invention using the center frame 86 as an example>
Displaceable between a gaming board having a gaming area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the gaming board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement member, a center frame formed of a light-transmitting material and incorporated in an opening of the gaming board is provided, and the center frame forms a part of the gaming area. A gaming machine C1 comprising a region forming portion.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board having a gaming area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, and a tension that can be visually recognized through a retracted position and an opening on the back side of the gaming board. There is a gaming machine provided with a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device, and a region where the displacement member can be visually recognized is secured by that amount. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down in the gaming area, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the gaming board, and a region where the displacement member can be visually recognized is provided. There was a problem that it could not be secured sufficiently.

On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a center frame formed of a light-transmitting material and built in an opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes a region forming portion forming a part of the gaming region. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized via the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient area where the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. Therefore, the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized can be secured as much as possible.

In the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball, so that the area forming portion is set to a width that allows the passage of only one gaming ball. That is, it is possible to secure the maximum visible region of the displacement member (without going through the center frame).

In the gaming machines C2 or C3, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall portion that is erected on the downstream side of the region and is integrally formed with the center frame.

Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and nails cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball becomes high, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame includes a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region, so that the gaming ball flowing down the region forming portion hits the downstream wall portion. Can be touched. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the flow speed of the gaming ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to see. Further, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by mold molding, and it is not necessary to fasten and fix another part, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

In the gaming machine C4, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion that is erected in the area to partition a passage through which the game ball flows and is integrally formed with the center frame, and the side wall portion is downstream thereof. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being connected to a wall portion.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion that is erected in the region and divides a passage through which the gaming ball flows, and the side wall portion thereof is downstream. Since it is connected to the wall portion, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion that receives the flowing game ball can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the downstream wall portion. Further, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by mold molding, and it is not necessary to fasten and fix another part, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .. Furthermore, since the side wall portion of the role of partitioning the passage through which the game ball flows can also serve as a role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

The gaming machine C5 is provided with an inner rail that guides a game ball erected and launched from the front surface of the gaming board to the gaming area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail is that it collides with a nail and then collides after bouncing, and the speed is relatively slow, which causes damage to the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting. On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to secure the maximum visible region of the displacement member, the width of the region forming portion forming a part of the gaming region is narrow (for example, only one gaming ball is allowed to pass). Width to be set). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed down at the area forming portion. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion, it becomes necessary to guide the game ball flowing down the game region toward the region forming portion, and as a result of the guidance, a part of the game ball is on the inner rail at a relatively high speed. There is a risk that the inner rail will bend due to a collision with the rail.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side on the inner rail, the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is guided toward the region forming portion, and as a result, the gaming ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if it flows down, it is possible to catch the game ball at the side wall portion and avoid colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, it is possible to suppress bending of the inner rail.

The gaming machine C5 or C6 includes a light emitting means that is arranged on the back surface side of the region forming portion of the center frame and is formed so as to be able to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is operably formed as a light guide body that guides the gaming region to the front side.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is operably formed as a light guide body that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming region. It is possible to exert the effect of the effect. In particular, in the gaming machine C7 subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side on the inner rail, the leakage of light can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. .. As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is set to the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is set to the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. Is placed in the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. It can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect of producing light can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a pair of side wall portions that are erected in the area to partition a passage through which the gaming ball flows and are integrally formed with the center frame. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are projected on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and nails cannot be planted in the region forming portion, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions becomes high, and the game ball flowing down is played. It becomes difficult for a person to see.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, one or a plurality of protrusions are projected on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, so that the game ball flows down the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusion to prevent its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the flowing speed of the gaming ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing gaming ball.

In the gaming machine C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the protrusions on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions on the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the protrusions on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions on the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered manner, so that the protrusions are divided into the pair of side wall portions. When a game ball flows down the passage, the game ball can be alternately collided with the left and right protrusions to meander the flowing game ball. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the flowing speed of the gaming ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing gaming ball, and the flowing gaming ball can be made to be orthogonal to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove recessed in the front surface thereof and extended in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the region forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove recessed in the front surface thereof and extended in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the region forming portion can be played. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. Further, according to the gaming machine C11 which is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the concave groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front surface of the gaming area, and the effect of the light is exhibited. can do.

In the gaming machine C11, the concave groove is arranged so that the bent portion thereof is displaced with respect to the protrusion in the flow direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the concave groove is arranged so that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flowing direction of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball flows down the region forming portion. In this case, the gaming balls that are guided by the inner surface of the concave groove and meander can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the protrusion. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a convex strip protruding from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with ridges protruding from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the area forming portion can be played. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. Further, according to the gaming machine C13 which is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front surface of the game area by using the convex stripe as a lens, and the effect of the light is exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the convex strip is arranged so that the bent portion thereof coincides with the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C13, the convex stripes are arranged so that the bent portion thereof coincides with the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the protrusion, so that the gaming ball flows down the region forming portion. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming balls, which are guided by the outer surface of the ridge and meander, to collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the flowing game ball. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge is oriented so that its extension direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and points to the exit of the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Characteristic gaming machine C15.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal side of the concave groove or the ridge is partitioned by a pair of side wall portions while its extension direction overlaps the downstream wall portion. Since it points to the exit of the passage, the gaming ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or the convex can be made to collide with the downstream wall portion from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the gaming ball and its addition. While reducing the flow speed, the game ball can flow toward the exit of the passage. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged from the exit of the passage.

<Concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In a game machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotation axis, the seesaw member. The seesaw member is provided with a guiding means for guiding the game ball to, and the seesaw member is provided with a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on one end side of the rotation axis. The game machine D1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. In addition to forming the first state in which the other end side is raised, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered in the second state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming ball is dropped on a seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation axis and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be placed. The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately display the first state and the second state, and one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down to produce an effect. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and the one end side is maintained in the raised second state, and the first state and the second state are obtained. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, in the seesaw member, the receiving surface for receiving the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is located on one end side of the rotation axis, so that the other end side is lowered and one end side is raised. Even in the second state, one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form a first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is received in the first state, the receiving surface can be sent to the other end side. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means is received in the first state, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably switch from the first state to the second state.

The form in which the game ball can be sent to the other end side is, for example, a form in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end side even in the first state, and a protrusion is formed on the receiving surface. An example is a form in which the protrusion is formed in a shape that repels the game ball guided by the guiding means to the other end side.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a decorative member rotatably supported is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is rotated around a rotation axis of the seesaw member. The gaming machine D3 characterized in that is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, a decorative member rotatably supported is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded and the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the link ratio.

Here, in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when no load is applied. It is preferable that the seesaw member can be restored at an early stage. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end side of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to one end side of the seesaw member to lower the one end side. be able to. Therefore, when the no-load state is reached, the seesaw member can be easily returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and as a result, the seesaw member is in the first state and the second state. It is possible to easily switch between states.

The weight of the decorative member hinders the raising of one end side of the seesaw member (forming a second state), but since the weight of the game ball is sufficiently heavy, the game ball is from the rotation axis of the seesaw member. By placing the seesaw on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the guiding means is provided with a passage through which the game ball passes, and is extended in a substantially horizontal direction on the terminal side of the passage, and the game ball rolls. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided to a receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guiding means includes a passage through which the gaming balls pass, so that the passage can be used to store a plurality of gaming balls. , The plurality of game balls can be guided in order from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by falling from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, these plurality of game balls are on the receiving surface. It is not possible to switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member alternately.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage having a rolling guide surface extending in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling a game ball is formed on the terminal side of the passage, and the horizontal passage is rolled. Since the game balls that have rolled on the moving guide surface are guided from the horizontal direction to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). You can receive one ball at a time from the passage), and you can avoid stacking multiple game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the game machine D4, the guiding means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extended in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and has an extended length of the horizontal passage. Is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the guiding means is provided with an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extended in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage. Since the extended length of the horizontal passage is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even if multiple game balls are stored in the passage, one game ball is placed on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to guide while keeping intervals.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to make the horizontal passage have only one game ball, and the extension of the horizontal passage. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different, when a ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow to the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage is flowed into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that. The game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is separated from the earlier game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one at intervals.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (a state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal passage. Since a step is formed above the guide surface, that is, between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface, the game ball that has rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage guides the seesaw member to the receiving surface. At that time, the game ball can be made to ride on the receiving surface (collision with a step), and this riding operation (collision) can be used to make it easier to lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. The featured gaming machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in the no-load state, and the game ball guided from the horizontal passage and received on the receiving surface is promptly sent to the other end side. It is required that the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side of the rotation axis to lower the other end side (form a second state).

In this case, according to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or the rolling of the horizontal passage. Since it is located below the moving guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and it is possible to avoid a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is dropped onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. This is because the seesaw bounces, a time lag is generated by that amount, and the load on the rotation shaft of the seesaw member increases due to the impact of the drop.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed by bending the other end side of the seesaw member upward in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is bent upward in an abbreviated shape on the other end side in the axial view of the rotation axis. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, if the seesaw member has an insufficient downward inclination on the other end side of the rotation axis, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered, and the second state is set. The formation time) becomes longer, and the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotation axis is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member (that is, the space required for the arrangement of the seesaw member becomes large). ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, that is). Since the other end side is lowered and the time during which the second state is formed) becomes shorter and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. Further, in order to keep the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side within the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft is insufficient. ..

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member into a shape that bends upward in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, each of the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and as a result, the above-mentioned problems can be solved. It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the seesaw member is provided on the other end side of the seesaw member. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that a claw portion formed so as to be able to switch the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotation axis toward the other end side toward the inflow port is provided.

According to the gaming machine D9, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, on the other end side of the seesaw member, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotation shaft toward the other end side is directed toward the inflow port. Since the claw portion that is formed so as to be switchable in the direction is projected, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state are formed. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching with.

The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the claw portion is unevenly arranged on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, the claw portion is arranged on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is the position of the seesaw member. Even if it varies in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) It can be made constant and easy.

That is, the game ball that rolls on the back side in the width direction (opposite the inflow port) of the seesaw member by disposing the claw portion unevenly on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member. Since the distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, it collides with the claw at an early stage and rolls to the inflow port, while rolling in front of the seesaw member in the width direction (the side closer to the inflow port). Since the ball has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it is possible to delay the collision with the claw portion. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member can be made to be equally close.

As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is The time during which the second state is formed after being lowered) can be easily kept constant.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the gaming ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the width of the inflow port is the diameter of the gaming ball. The gaming machine D11 characterized in that the dimensions are set to be larger than twice.

According to the gaming machine D11, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the game ball rolled from its rotation axis toward the other end side is provided, and the width of the inflow port is provided. Is set to a size larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side while the previous game ball is present on the other end side of the seesaw member. In some cases, each of these gaming balls can be smoothly flowed into the inflow port. For example, even when the later game balls collide with the earlier game balls and each of these game balls is simultaneously rolled to the inflow port, each of them can smoothly flow in.

In the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set to a larger dimension on the rotating shaft side than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set to a larger dimension on the rotating shaft side than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member. Even if the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls can be smoothly moved to the inlet. It can be inflowed. That is, even if the game ball after colliding with the previous game ball is flipped up, the height dimension of the inflow port on the rotation axis side is increased, so that the height can be used to move the game ball after that. It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the earlier game ball collides with the later game ball, it is difficult to be flipped up. Therefore, the height dimension on the other end side is lowered, so that the earlier game ball smoothly flows into the inflow port. While making it possible, the space required for the inflow port can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, the seesaw member is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member in a state where the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the gaming machine D13, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, a suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member is provided in a state where the seesaw member is arranged in at least the second state. , It is possible to secure a time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be ejected. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine D13, the guiding means includes a delivery port for sending a game ball to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a regulating portion disposed on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotating shaft. When the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state, at least a part of the restricting portion is projected to the delivery port, thereby suppressing the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member. The gaming machine D14.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion disposed on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotating shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulation unit to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also be used as a mechanism for projecting the regulating portion from the delivery port, and a driving mechanism for displacing the regulating portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing thereof can be eliminated.

In addition, the state in which the regulation unit is projected to the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed is when the gaming machine cannot pass through the delivery port or when the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Both are included. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation part is projected to the delivery port and the passage width of the delivery port is narrowed, so that the game ball is collided with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation part. Since it is sent from the delivery port, the throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
A first seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the gaming ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the rotating shaft is formed. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a discharging means for facilitating discharging the gaming ball mounted on the other end side of the ball.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member is provided in which one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotation shaft, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. In addition to forming the first state in which the other end side is raised, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered in the second state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming ball is dropped on a seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation axis and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be placed. The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately display the first state and the second state, and one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down to produce an effect. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and the one end side is maintained in the raised second state, and the first state and the second state are obtained. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharging means that facilitates discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end side by the discharging means, the weight of the game ball on the other end side can be removed, and the one end side can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a shaft support portion rotatably supported by a shaft, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft support portion and receiving a game ball guided from the guiding means, and a receiving portion thereof. When the receiving portion receives the gaming ball guided by the guide means, the extruded portion is provided with an extruded portion arranged with the shaft support portion interposed therebetween, and the extruded portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. The gaming machine E2, wherein the portion is projected toward the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball guided by the guiding means, the extrusion portion is a seesaw member due to the rotation around the shaft support portion. Since it is projected to the other end side, the gaming ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the extrusion portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by ejecting the game ball by the extrusion portion, and one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. It can be terminated early to make it easier to switch between the first state and the second state alternately. Further, since the receiving portion rotates the discharging means (protrudes the extruding portion) by utilizing the operation of receiving the game ball, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive mechanism for such rotation and a control means for controlling the rotation timing thereof.

In the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is characterized in that the shaft support portion is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, since the shaft support portion is rotatably supported by the seesaw member, the relative position of the discharging means with respect to the seesaw member can be fixed. .. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide means can be easily received by the receiving portion, the rotation around the shaft support portion can be reliably formed, and the extruded portion projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation is played. By making it easier to come into contact with the ball, the game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, with respect to a virtual plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the shaft support portion of the discharge means, the discharge means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the extrusion portion. The gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the extrusion portion of the receiving portion, so that the discharging means when the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. The angle of rotation of the ball can be secured, and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the pushing force of the game ball by the extruded portion due to the retracting of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be quickly and easily discharged.

On the other hand, since the amount of retreat of the extruded portion is smaller than that of the receiving portion, the rolling locus of the game ball increases when the game ball that rolls the seesaw member toward the other end side retracts the extruded portion. Can be suppressed, and the game ball can be quickly and easily ejected.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by raising one of the axial directions of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction. A gaming machine E5 characterized by facilitating the ejection of placed gaming balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, the discharge means raises one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction. By increasing the angle of downward inclination of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be discharged from the seesaw member. This makes it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

It should be noted that the fact that one of the axial directions of the rotating shaft is relatively higher than the other of the axial direction means that it is sufficient if the amount of increase of one of the axial directions is larger than the amount of increase of the other in the axial direction. Therefore, the state after raising may be arranged at a position where one axial direction is lower than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the discharge means axially one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the first section. In the second section, which does not rise relative to the other and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is relative to the other axial direction. A game machine E6 characterized by being raised in a targeted manner.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the discharge means is a rotation shaft of the seesaw member in the first section when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. In the second section, which does not raise one of the axial directions relative to the other in the axial direction and is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the axial directions of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is the other in the axial direction. Since it is relatively increased with respect to the above, the second state can be reliably formed, and the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, if the operation of raising one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation of raising one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction cannot be performed, the ejection of the game ball will be delayed (the residence time will be long), and the second state will occur. It becomes easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member becomes the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it is not relatively raised, it is possible to suppress the early discharge of the game ball (that is, to keep the game ball), and it is possible to reliably easily form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is relatively raised with respect to the other axial direction, the game ball can be quickly discharged and the game ball is placed. The time (ie, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state while making it possible to form the second state reliably.

In the game machine E5 or the game machine E6, in the seesaw member, a cam is formed at least in one axial direction of the rotation shaft, and as the rotation shaft rotates, from the axis of the rotation shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member in the axial direction is relatively raised with respect to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance between the two.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed at least in one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. By increasing the distance of, one of the axis of rotation of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction, so that the drive mechanism for operating the axis of rotation and the control for controlling the drive timing thereof are controlled. No means can be required. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided with a push-up portion arranged on a movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. The gaming machine E8, characterized in that one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided with a push-up portion arranged on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. When the push-up portion comes into contact with the seesaw member, one of the axis of rotation of the seesaw member is relatively raised with respect to the other in the axial direction. A control means for controlling the timing can be eliminated. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member and a displacement member whose base end side is rotatably arranged and rotated between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the base member includes a base side engaging member. At the same time, in a state where the displacement member includes a displacement-side engaging member formed so as to be engageable with the base-side engaging member at the retracted position and the first displacement member is arranged at the overhanging position, the base. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see in the front view of the member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A directing member having a transmission member to be transmitted and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided through the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

In this conventional gaming machine, a connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 The displacement member is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to incline the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the gaming machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the shaft, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) tends to tilt (tilt forward) in the direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion arranged on the front side.

In this case, according to the game machine F1, the base member is provided with the base side engaging member, the displacement member is provided with the displacement side engaging member, and the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the member and the displacement side engaging member are formed so as to be engageable, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member on the side opposite to the base end side (tip side).

On the other hand, when the base member is provided with the base side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement side engaging member in this way, when the displacement member is extended to the overhanging position, the front surface of the base member is provided. Is exposed, so that the base-side engaging member is visible to the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see in the front view of the base member, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be able to appear and disappear in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to a retracted position, the base-side engaging member is placed in front of the base member. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to an overhanging position while being projected from the base member, the base-side engaging member is immersed toward the back surface side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be able to appear and disappear in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the mating member is immersed toward the back surface side of the base member, the base side engaging member can be difficult to see from the player in the front view of the base member, and the appearance can be suppressed from being spoiled.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member is projected from the front of the base member, so that the height of the displacement-side engaging member protruding from the back surface of the displacement member is reduced accordingly. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, as the protruding height of the displacement-side engaging member can be lowered, a space for other members to be displaced can be secured.

The gaming machine F2 includes a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engaging member is projected from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine F3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the base-side engaging member is a base member due to the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it is projected from the front, it can also be used as a driving means to reduce the product cost. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for projecting the base-side engaging member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for such projecting.

In addition, as a form in which the base side engaging member is projected by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement member directly or indirectly engages with the base side. When the member is displaced in the protruding direction or the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is displaced, the base side engaging member is directly or indirectly displaced in the protruding direction by the displacement member. The form to be displaced is exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with an urging means for urging the base-side engaging member toward the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the urging force of the urging means acts. The gaming machine F4, wherein the base-side engaging member is returned to the immersion position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, an urging means for urging the base-side engaging member toward the immersion direction is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the attachment is provided. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the immersion position by the action of the urging force of the force means, it is not necessary to link both the protrusion direction and the immersion direction with the action of the drive force of the drive means, and only the protrusion direction is linked. Therefore, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed so as to be retractable from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member is placed in front of the base member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to an overhanging position while being retracted from the base member, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the base side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. By engaging the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, it is possible not only to prevent the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) of the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base side engaging member. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress rattling in the front-rear direction on the tip side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member. It can be difficult and can prevent the appearance from being spoiled.

<Concept of the invention using the right-handed rotation unit 18600 as an example>
The base member, the first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the second displacement member displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member thereof. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for driving the first displacement member, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in at least the first direction, and the second displacement member can be brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member. The inertial force that is formed and generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member is allowed to act as a force in the direction that displaces the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine G1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force is applied to a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a gaming machine provided with a driving means to be provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, in the embodiment in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load of the driving means is relatively small, while in the embodiment in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced. Since the load of the drive means is relatively large, the load of the drive means suddenly changes (increases) when the mode is switched. Therefore, there is a problem that stable (constant) displacement is difficult, for example, the durability of the drive means is lowered and the displacement speed is lowered when the mode is switched.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first displacement member or the base member, and is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force to be applied acts as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member, the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member is switched to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member. At that time, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means. As a result, the durability of the drive means can be improved, the decrease in the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect can be suppressed, and stable (constant) displacement can be easily performed. ..

As the first aspect and the second aspect, for example, the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, an embodiment in which the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member and the second aspect displaces only the first displacement member is exemplified. In the latter aspect, in particular, when the load required for the change of the first displacement member is sufficiently larger than the load required for the displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member as compared with the second displacement member). Is effective when you think enough).

In the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the first displacement member. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the directions of the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated when the second displacement member abuts on the first displacement member or the base member is generated. As a force that displaces the first displacement member in the first direction, it can be efficiently applied to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is in contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a component downward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine G3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since the direction includes the heading component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A gaming machine G4, wherein in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including a component that goes upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first direction is the direction including the component going upward in the direction of gravity, so that the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an auxiliary force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to the gaming machine G4, one end of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and the other end side of the second displacement member is close to one end side of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the other end side of the above is in contact with the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is first displaced. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the member and the other end side of the second displacement member is close to one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member is efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. Can be done. That is, when switching from the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is assisted to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as a force.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of the game machines G1 to the game machine G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and the other end side of the second displacement member is close to one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the other end side of the above is in contact with the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is first displaced. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the member and the other end side of the second displacement member is close to one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently used as a force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. Can act on. That is, when switching from the first aspect of displacement of the second displacement member to the second aspect of displacement of the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is assisted to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as a force.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of the game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member is provided, and the first displacement member is the drive pin. The second displacement member is provided with a first groove having an action section that is acted on by the drive pin and a non-interference section that is connected to the action section and does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second displacement member is an action section that is acted on by the drive pin. The first and second displacement members are displaced by the displacement of the drive pin in the first groove and the second groove which are overlapped with each other. Amusement machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section affected by the drive pin and the action section thereof, and the drive pin interferes with each other. The drive pin displaces the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove because the second groove of the second displacement member includes at least the action section affected by the drive pin. By doing so, the first aspect in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in the stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced between the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. This makes it possible to form a second aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and it is possible to smoothly shift from the first aspect to the second aspect.

<Characteristic H group> (Demo control with AT type and special figure 1 waiting)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. Based on the establishment of the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. A second acquisition means for acquiring the second information, a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and a second determination by the second determination means. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result. A gaming machine having a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is a specific second determination result is executed. In the first timekeeping means for starting the first timekeeping and the execution of the second timekeeping are finished when the execution of the first effect is completed and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. Then, when the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timing means for starting the second timing and the first timing based on the first set value. When the notification execution means for starting the execution of the first notification mode and the execution of the second notification mode based on the fact that the second timing has become the second set value and the second acquisition condition are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of switching between a first period for ending the first notification mode being executed and a second period for continuing the first notification mode.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during the game), and it is possible for the player to easily find a vacant platform. ..

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol in which a variable display is executed based on the above, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the fluctuation period of the first symbol and the second symbol is different, and a long-term fluctuation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the fluctuation period of one symbol. There is something.

In such a conventional gaming machine, if a specific screen (demo screen) is displayed when the variable display of both symbols is completed, the player immediately after the long-term variable period is executed. When the player finishes the game, the next player continues to be in a state (but the screen) where it is difficult for the next player to play the game on the game machine, so that there is a problem that the operation of the game is reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine H1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect is executed during the first effect period by the first effect execution means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination means is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect is executed during the second effect period by the second effect execution means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. When executed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is completed, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. In that case, when the first timekeeping means starts the first timekeeping, the execution of the second effect ends, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timekeeping means starts by the second timekeeping means. Will be done. The notification execution means starts execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the first timing has become the first set value, and the second notification is based on the fact that the second timing has become the second set value. Execution of the embodiment is started. In addition, the first period for ending the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied and the second period for continuing the first notification mode are switched and set by the setting means.

This makes it possible to continue the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed even when the second effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, when the second effect is executed, the setting means can switch between the first period for terminating the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed and the second period for continuing the first effect. , It is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

The configuration of the gaming machine H1 is, for example, a gaming machine in which the first and second effects can be executed at the same time, and the second effect is substantially not executed according to the gaming state, and the second effect. It is preferable to use it for a gaming machine having a period during which the effect is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second effect is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and the second effect is substantially executed. Can terminate the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine H2.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and the second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination are set by the gaming state setting means.

This makes it possible to set the first period or the second period according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine H2, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the setting means sets the second period, and the second game state setting means sets the second period. When the gaming state is set, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the first period is set.

According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and sets the first period when the second gaming state is set.

As a result, in the gaming state where the first determination is easy to be executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in the gaming state where the second determination is easy to be executed, the second When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect according to the game state, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the notification executing means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition. ..

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode being executed based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition is terminated by the notification executing means, so that the second effect is achieved. It is possible to execute an effect according to the execution state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the obstruction of the first effect even when the first effect is executed. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are played. That is, even while the first effect is being executed by the notification executing means, the second notification mode is executed while suppressing the obstruction of the first effect.

Thereby, it is possible to notify that the second effect is not executed while the first effect is being executed, while suppressing the obstruction of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game in which the game situation is easy to understand.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. The gaming machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first effect and the second effect can be simultaneously executed by the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means. There is an effect that the situation of the first effect and the second effect executed at the same time can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the notification executing means can execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode at the same time.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the notification executing means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode. There is an effect that the situation of the production and the second production can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, when the first effect is executed, the notification executing means notifies predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode. The gaming machine H8, characterized in that it executes a predetermined notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are played. That is, when the first effect is being executed, as the second notification mode, a predetermined notification mode for notifying predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is executed by the notification execution means.

As a result, when the first effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the information indicating the result of the previously executed second effect from being notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect with the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the first effect is executed, the notification execution means executes the first effect indicating that the first effect is executed as the second notification mode. The gaming machine H9, characterized in that it executes a medium notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the first effect during execution notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed is executed by the notification execution means as the second notification mode.

As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily understand the effect being executed, and there is an effect that the game situation can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, according to the case where the configuration of the gaming machine H6 is used, the information regarding the first effect that is actually executed among the first effect and the second effect that can be executed at the same time is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the game situation can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, a first display area for displaying either the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means, and a second display for displaying the other. The display means having at least an area, the first display area of the display means, and the display control means for controlling the display contents in the second display area, and the display control means is the setting means. When the first period is set, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The gaming machine H10, characterized in that the display content of the display means is controlled so as to be performed.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a first display area in which either one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed, and a second display area in which the other is displayed. When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The display content of the display means is controlled by the display control means.

As a result, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided to the player.

<Feature I group> (Demo control when the game state is variable)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. Based on the establishment of the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. A second acquisition means for acquiring the second information, a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and a second determination by the second determination means. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result. A gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is a specific second determination result is executed. In the advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times when a specific condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state setting means. Variable control that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination when the advantageous state is set, and makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination when the advantageous state ends. Means and the first setting is set when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and the second setting is set when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. Based on the setting means and the first setting being set when the advantageous state is set, the first display setting is set in the display means, and when the advantageous state is set, the first setting is set. The display setting means has a display setting means for setting the second display setting to the display means based on the setting of the two settings, and the display setting means is in the advantageous state in the state where the second display setting is set. When is completed, the gaming machine I1 is characterized in that a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during the game), and it is possible for the player to easily find a vacant platform. ..

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol in which a variable display is executed based on the above, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a game state in which the first symbol is easily changed and displayed according to the game state and a game state in which the second symbol is easily changed and displayed is set to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, if the gaming state shifts while a specific screen (demo screen) indicating that the variation display of one of the symbols has ended is displayed, the player displays the display content. There was a problem that it became difficult to grasp.

For example, in a predetermined game state, when the display area for a symbol that is easily variablely displayed is set larger than the display area for a symbol that is difficult to be variablely displayed, the displayed content becomes larger due to the transition of the game state. There was a problem that it would be different and would provide the player with a game that was difficult to understand. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine I1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information. The first effect based on the result of one determination is executed by the first effect execution means in the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second acquisition means acquires the second information, and the second determination means executes the second determination based on the second information. The second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed by the second effect execution means in the second effect period. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In that case, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous state setting means until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, it makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for the predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for the predetermined second period. .. Further, based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set by the display setting means, the first display setting is set to the display means and the second setting is set when the advantageous state is set. Based on the setting being set, the second display setting is set in the display means. In addition, when the advantageous state ends in the state where the second display setting is set, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

As a result, when the advantageous state ends in the state where the second display setting is set, the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting, so that the second display setting is set. Even in the state, the player can easily grasp that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine I1, the first display setting is set so that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is such that the predetermined second display mode is displayed. The gaming machine I2, characterized in that it is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first display setting is set, the predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and when the second display setting is set, the predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display means. To.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the execution status of the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

When the second effect is executed during the period when the second display setting is executed in the gaming machines I1 or I2, the second effect is supported while the second display setting is maintained. The gaming machine I3, characterized in that the effect mode is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect is executed during the period when the second display setting is executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. ..

As a result, when the second effect is executed during the period when the second display setting is executed, the second effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, it is preferable to provide the configuration of the gaming machine I3 in, for example, a gaming machine in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is set short. In this case, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is executed, the player can easily execute the second effect in which the short second effect period is set.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the second display setting is such that a setting for displaying a suggestion display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set is executed on the display means. A gaming machine I4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are played. That is, by setting the second display setting, the suggestion display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display means.

As a result, it is possible to display information on the gaming state to the player by using the period during which the second effect is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the second effect is not executed.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, when the advantageous state is set, the discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of the specific condition based on the information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination thereof. When it is determined by the means that the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming machine I5 is characterized by having a restricting means for restricting the setting of the second display setting and having the means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are played. That is, when an advantageous state is set, the determination means determines the establishment of the specific condition based on the information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when the determination of the specific condition is determined, the regulation means. Restricts the setting of the second display setting.

As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition is satisfied by not setting the second display setting. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, when the second determination is executed, the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from the plurality of second effect periods, and one other than the advantageous state. When the normal gaming state of is set, the probability that a longer period is selected as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means than when the advantageous state is set is set high. A gaming machine I6, characterized in that it has a probability-variable means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are played. That is, when the second determination is executed, the second effect period is determined by the second effect period determining means from the plurality of second effect periods. Then, when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability variable means, it is longer than the case where the advantageous state is set as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means. The probability that the period will be selected is set high.

As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to execute the second determination more than when the normal gaming state of 1 other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game aiming at an advantageous state in which the second determination is often executed.

A gaming machine I7, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, so that the game can be efficiently executed.

<Characteristic J group> (Securing result production in AT type)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. Based on the establishment of the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. The second determination means for executing the two determinations, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination are A game when a specific first effect based on a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the player is advantageous until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of gaming states. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state, and a second effect period setting means that facilitates setting the second effect period shorter when the advantageous gaming state is set by the game state setting means. And, when the advantageous gaming state ends, a specific first effect period is set as the first effect period until the number of times the first effect and the second effect are executed is executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine J1 characterized by having a first effect period determining means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is set with an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the winning lottery probability and making it easier for the lottery to be executed, and during the period in which the advantageous state continues. There is a game result display such as the number of hits generated in the game and the number of prize balls won on the display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). In such a gaming machine, the gaming result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state is completed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol in which a variable display is executed based on the above, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, whether the first symbol to be executed after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol depends on the gaming situation. May be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first fluctuation time after the end of the advantageous state is set as the fluctuation period in which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may be displayed depending on the first variable symbol after the end of the advantageous state. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time and the motivation of the player is lowered. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine J1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect is executed during the first effect period by the first effect execution means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination means is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect is executed during the second effect period by the second effect execution means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. When executed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the game is played from a plurality of game states until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the person is configured to be configurable by the gaming state setting means and the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second effect period is set short by the second effect period setting means. The first effect period is a specific first effect period until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times when the advantageous gaming state ends. It is determined by the deciding means.

As a result, it is possible to set a specific period as the first effect period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can understand the content of the effect to be executed when the advantageous game state ends. This has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the motivation of the player is lowered due to the inability to grasp the content of the production.

As an effect to be executed when the advantageous game state ends, it is preferable to execute an effect (for example, the number of big hits executed during the advantageous game state or the total number of prize balls) indicating the game result during the advantageous game state. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result during the advantageous gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Further, as in the game machine J1, by setting the first effect period executed after the end of the advantageous gaming state as the specific first effect period, the first effect executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous. It can be executed after the game state ends. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to set the first effect period executed at the end (final stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, so that the player can smoothly execute the advantageous game state. effective.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined number of times is two or more times.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the predetermined number of times is set to two or more times, so that even if the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, the first effect is performed. It can be executed using a specific first effect period, the content of the effect to be executed when the advantageous gaming state ends can be grasped by the player, and the content of the effect cannot be grasped by the player. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where motivation is lowered.

In the gaming machines J1 or J2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous gaming state is set. The gaming machine J3, which is characterized by a high proportion of pachinko machines.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 or J2, the following effects are played. That is, when a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set a period longer than the other first effect period only for a specific first effect period set for a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state ends, so that the first effect can be achieved. By setting the first effect period to be executed longer as a whole, there is an effect that the progress of the game is slowed down and the motivation of the player can be suppressed from being lowered.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result in the first determination and the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result in the second determination are set to be the same. The second determination means has a predetermined probability of producing a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result when the second determination does not determine the specific second determination result. The determination is made, and the privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game to which the privilege below the privilege game is given when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. The gaming machine J4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are played. That is, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result in the first determination and the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result in the second determination are set to be the same, and the specific second determination result in the second determination. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, the special privilege game to which the privilege less than or equal to the privilege game is given by the privilege game execution means is executed.

As a result, the second determination in which the second effect is executed can be more advantageous to the player than the first determination in which the first effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous gaming state in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is short and easy to be set can be surely set to the player's advantageous state, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced. ..

According to the gaming machine J4, a special privilege game is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result, thereby configuring an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. However, it suffices if the gaming state in which the second effect period is set to be short is configured to be an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, the second determination means is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability than that of the second determination means, or the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination means is the second determination means. It may be configured to be a privilege game having a lower value than the special privilege game (second special privilege game) executed based on the determination result.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the second determination is completed. The gaming machine J5 is characterized by having a variable control means that changes a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than a determination.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are played. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination. It is variable by variable control means.

Thereby, the advantageous gaming state can be made easier to execute the second determination as compared with the gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous gaming state can be changed to a more advantageous gaming state for the player, and the player's motivation to play aiming at the advantageous gaming state can be increased.

The variable control means of the gaming machine J4 includes, for example, a configuration in which the length of the production period between the first production period and the second production period is variable, and a configuration in which the ease with which the second acquisition condition is satisfied is variable. Can be considered.

The game machine J5 is characterized in that the variable control means is set by varying the selection ratio so as to change the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period. Gaming machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so as to change the length of the first effect period and the second effect period by the variable control means.

This has the effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily changed.

<Characteristic K group> (AT type, even if one small hit, the other variable effect is continued, and after the small hit, the variable effect that adjusts the book tail is executed)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period, and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. A first effect period determining means for determining an effect period from a plurality of effect periods, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and a second determination means thereof. The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determination means in the second effect period, and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means. A second effect period determining means determined from a plurality of effect periods, and a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result. 2 In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is executed, the privileged game executing means. When the privilege game is executed, the temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect, and the privilege game. To the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means even when the time is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means and the release means for canceling the temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the above. When there is a continuation means for executing the first effect or the second effect, and even when the first effect or the second effect is completed, there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period. , The gaming machine K1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect during the remaining period.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the gaming ball is won to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. Based on this, there is a second symbol in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that one of the symbols has been won, the variation period of the other symbol being displayed for variation is displayed. Some are configured to interrupt the measurement and resume the measurement of the suspended variable period when the winning game is completed.

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player expects that the fluctuation display based on the symbol in which the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted during the fluctuation display is stopped based on the interruption of the measurement of the fluctuation period. However, there was a problem that the fluctuation display that I was watching was suddenly stopped, which was a cause of spoiling the interest of the game. Further, even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the fluctuation display is continuously displayed, there is an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, an error corresponding to the suspension period). ) Will occur, and the effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity will be executed, which will cause a loss of the interest of the game. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine K1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means for the first effect period determined by the first effect period determining means from the plurality of effect periods. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination means is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means by the second effect period determining means in the second effect period determined by the plurality of effect periods. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. When the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the first effect being executed The timekeeping of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is canceled by the release means based on the end of the privilege game. Even when the timekeeping is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means is made to execute the first effect or the second effect by the continuation means, and the first effect or the second effect is performed. Even when the above is completed, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the remaining period.

As a result, even if the timekeeping of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect executed by the temporary stop means is temporarily stopped, the first effect or the second effect is continuously performed. You can perform the production. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the effect that the player is looking at while expecting it, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even when the first effect or the second effect is completed, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the remaining period. Even if there is an error between the timing at which the first effect or the second effect ends and the timing at which the first effect period or the second effect period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K1, the first effect is preset with an effect period corresponding to a plurality of the first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the first effect. (2) The gaming machine K2, which is preset with an effect period corresponding to a plurality of the second effect periods determined by the effect period determination means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is preset in the effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is a plurality of second effects determined by the second effect period determining means. The production period corresponding to the production period is set in advance.

As a result, the effect period in which the first effect is executed and the effect period in which the second effect is executed are predetermined, and the timing at which the first effect or the second effect ends and the first effect period or the second effect period It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing at which is ended. Therefore, the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop of the time by the temporary stop means, so that the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. be.

In the gaming machines K1 or K2, the first effect and the second effect are the results of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that a definite effect mode indicating the above is set.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first effect and the second effect, a definite effect mode showing the result of the first determination or the second determination is set in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses.

As a result, even when the temporary stop of timing by the temporary stop means is not executed, the result of the first determination or the second determination can be shown by executing the first effect or the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the specific effect is configured by at least a part of the final effect mode.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, since the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the final effect mode, the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is completed. Even so, there is an effect that the production can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the privileged game execution means is executed based on the determination by the first determination means that the first determination result is a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result. When the special first effect is executed, or when the second determination means determines that the special second determination result is different from the specific second determination result, the special second effect is executed. The gaming machine K5, which, when executed, executes a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the privileged game.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are played. That is, when a special first effect executed based on the determination of a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result by the first determination means is executed or specified by the second determination means. When a special second effect executed based on the determination of a special second determination result different from the second determination result of the above is executed, the player is made more than the privileged game by the privileged game execution means. A special game that is advantageous is executed.

This makes it possible for the player to execute the game with expectations for both the game in which the first determination means is executed and the game in which the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the specific effect executing means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period when the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine K6 characterized in that a special effect is executed for at least the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are played. That is, when the first effect or the second effect is completed during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the specific effect executing means, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed for at least the remaining period.

As a result, when the first effect or the second effect is completed and a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period occurs, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player even when an error occurs to the extent that the specific effect alone is insufficient.

As the special effect used for the gaming machine K6, an effect different from the specific effect is used by using the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. May be configured to execute, or in the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period, the first effect or the second effect is completed. Therefore, a new effect may be executed in the period from the end of the privilege game to the end of the privilege game, and the specific effect may be executed in the period from the end of the privilege game to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. .. In this case, the latter configuration has an effect that the capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the remaining period for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. The gaming machine K7 is characterized by having a period determination means and a specific effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of determination by the remaining period determination means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effect is played, that is, after the first effect or the second effect is completed, the first effect period or the second effect is achieved. The length of the remaining period until the end of the period is determined by the remaining period determining means, and the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect mode determining means based on the result of the determination.

As a result, since it is possible to determine the effect mode of the specific effect based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period. In this case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is defined as the effect mode of the specific effect. As a result, the specific effect can be executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the specific effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including the mode of notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. As a result, for the player who cannot grasp the content of the specific effect, the specific effect is executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and for the player who can grasp the content of the specific effect. By notifying that the production mode of the first effect or the second effect is extended, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the first effect or the second effect is not completed due to a malfunction of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to.

In addition, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully grasp the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period, the information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect. It is preferable to use an effect mode capable of displaying information other than (information indicating the determination result of the determination means). As a result, it is possible to provide new information to the player by using the remaining period, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

In the gaming machine K7, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining means is at least one of the definite effect modes as the specific effect effect mode. The gaming machine K8, which is characterized in that it determines a specific effect mode composed of a unit.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode that is composed of at least a part of the final effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect is the privilege effect mode determination means. Is determined by.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the specific effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining means may use the first effect or the first effect as an effect mode of the specific effect. The gaming machine K9 is characterized in that it determines a specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the second effect.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7 or K8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect is used as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the means for determining the privilege production mode.

As a result, it is possible to provide new information to the player by using the remaining period, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

<Characteristic L group> (ST number display control)
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times by satisfying a predetermined condition, a number update means for updating the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, and a means for updating the number of times. The remaining number of times determining means for determining the remaining number of times of the specified number of times, the number of times notifying means for notifying the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determining means, and the number of times notified by the number of times notifying means are increased. The gaming machine L1 is provided with a privilege notification executing means capable of executing privilege notification to be performed based on a predetermined rule, and a rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning a lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed, and the specific game is executed. Some display the remaining number of times to be performed on the display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the remaining number of times a specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen, so that the player's motivation is lowered when the remaining number of times when an advantageous state is set becomes small. There was a problem that it would end up. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine L1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game execution means, and the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of times of the specified number of times is determined by the remaining number of times determining means, and the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determining means is notified by the number of times notifying means. The privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

This makes it possible to notify the number of times that the specific game is executed or less. Therefore, even if the number of times of notification is reduced, the game can be performed while expecting that the specific game is continuously executed, and the motivation of the player can be suppressed from being lowered. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times of notification by the number of times notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is confirmed to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can play the game while maintaining an appropriate sense of security.

Further, since the rule for executing the privilege notification can be switched, the number of times of notification by the number notification means can be increased in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the gaming machine L1 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means based on the operation to the operating means that can be operated by the player.

Therefore, since the player can switch the predetermined rule according to his / her taste, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines L1 or L2, the rule switching means executes a lottery as to whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the lottery result. It is configured to be switchable between the first rule and the second rule that determines whether to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times notified by the number notification means is less than or equal to a predetermined number. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first rule in which the rule switching means determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result, and the number notification means. It is possible to switch to the second rule in which it is determined whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times notified by the user becomes less than or equal to the predetermined number of times.

As a result, since the privilege notification can be executed according to the rules having different tastes, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification if the remaining number of times is equal to or more than the predetermined number when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means. The gaming machine L4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are played. That is, when a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means by the privilege notification executing means, if the remaining number of times is the predetermined number or more, the privilege notification is executed.

As a result, the privilege notification can be executed at the timing when the predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of possible times is increased within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit times. Gaming machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are played. That is, the privilege notification executing means is executed to indicate that the number of possible times is increased within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit times.

This makes it possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and has the effect of suppressing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic M group> (The production at the time of winning the attacker is decided by lottery)
A privilege game that executes one of a plurality of different privilege games based on a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. When the privilege game is executed by the execution means and the privilege game execution means, a predetermined condition is satisfied from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. It is determined that the execution condition is satisfied by the variable ball entry means that changes until the ball enters, the condition determination means that determines the establishment of the execution condition based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the condition determination means. An effect executing means capable of executing the effect when the effect is performed, a ratio variable means for variablely setting the ratio of satisfying the execution condition based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and a ratio variable means. The gaming machine M1 characterized by having the above.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. As described above, there is a gaming machine that opens a specific winning opening when a winning game is executed and notifies that the game ball has won a prize in the specific winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-138735). .. In addition, there is also one in which a plurality of winning games having different opening patterns of specific winning openings are set, and the number of game balls that can be won in the specific winning openings is configured to be different depending on the winning game to be executed. On the other hand, there are some that improve the interest of the game by making the player predict the game by making it difficult to understand which hit game is being executed.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the notification is executed every time the gaming ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening, it is possible to easily make the player know that the winning game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time the game ball wins in the specific winning opening, it is executed only by grasping the notification content executed every time the game ball wins in the specific winning opening. There is a problem that the player can easily grasp the type of the game.

Further, in a gaming machine that shifts the game state after the end of the hit game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game to be executed, the type of the hit game to be executed is made difficult to understand, so that the interest of the game is enjoyed. However, when using such a gaming machine, if notification is executed every time a gaming ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening, while expecting a gaming state that shifts after the winning game is completed. There is a problem that it becomes impossible to play a hit game and the player's motivation to play is reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine M1, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and one of the different privilege games is one of the privilege games based on the discrimination result being a specific discrimination result. It is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable ball entry means establishes a predetermined condition from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. It is variable until it is done. The establishment of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, and when the condition determination means determines that the execution condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the effect. Will be done. Then, based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the ratio variable means.

As a result, it is possible to change the ratio at which the effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means based on the type of the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation for the game by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

The gaming machine M1 has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls as prize balls to the player based on the fact that the gaming balls have entered the variable entry means. The gaming machine M2 is set based on the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1. That is, based on the fact that the game balls have entered the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls predetermined by the payout means are paid out to the player as prize balls, and the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means. The production is set based on the number.

As a result, the effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can easily understand that the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the privileged game that is advantageous to the player has been executed, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machines M1 or M2, the privileged game executing means is a first privileged game in which a game ball is easily entered into the variable ball entering means, and a first privileged game in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first privileged game. The two privilege games can be executed at least, and the ratio variable means sets the ratio lower when the first privilege game is executed than when the second privilege game is executed. The gaming machine M3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine M3, the first privilege game in which the game ball is easily entered into the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means, and the second privilege game in which the entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. At least one of and is executed. Then, when the first privilege game is executed by the ratio variable means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is set lower than when the second privilege game is executed.

As a result, when the first privilege game and the second privilege game, which differ in the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means, are executed, it is possible to approximate the number of times the effect is executed by the effect execution means. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation for the game by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine M2 is used, regardless of the type of the privileged gaming executing means, the gaming ball that first enters the ball entering means is always (with high probability) directed by the effect executing means. It is good to let the production be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and further, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player cannot easily grasp the type of the privilege game being executed.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the effect is to display a display mode on a display means as at least one of the effect modes.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the effect modes, so that the player can display the content displayed on the display means. There is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed based on the above.

In the gaming machine M3 or M4, in the first privilege game, the period from when the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second privilege game. A gaming machine M5 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first privilege game, the period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than in the second privilege game.

This has the effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game that is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine M3 or M5, the number of times the first privileged game is changed to the second state is set to be larger than that of the second privileged game.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set to be larger than that of the second privilege game.

This has the effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game that is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

In any one of claims M1 to M6, there is a second ratio variable means for variably setting the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine M7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the following effects are played. That is, by the second ratio variable means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set based on the number of game balls entered into the variable entry means.

This makes it possible to change the rate at which the effect is executed based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution ratio of the effect more complicatedly.

In the gaming machine M7, the privileged game executing means is a first privileged game in which a game ball is easy to enter into the ball entering means, and a second privileged game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first privileged game. The second ratio variable means is characterized in that as the number of gaming balls entering the variable means increases, it becomes more difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied. M8.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball is easily entered into the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means and the second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. Is executed. Then, as the number of game balls entered into the variable means increases by the second ratio variable means, it becomes more difficult to satisfy the execution condition.

As a result, it is possible to approximate the number of times the effect is executed by the effect execution means between the case where the first privilege game is executed and the case where the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation for the game by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M8, the effect executing means pays out the divided display mode indicating the number of the prize balls paid out by the payout means as the effect. A gaming machine M9 characterized in that it is set to correspond to the number of prize balls.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M2 to M8, the following effects are played. That is, the effect executing means sets the divided display mode indicating the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means as an effect divided into a plurality of pieces corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

This makes it possible to display a plurality of divided display modes with one effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation for the game by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Further, even in a gaming machine having a privileged game having a different number of prize balls, there is an effect that the same effect can be obtained by executing the effect using the divided display mode.

<Characteristic N group> (Variable number of additions by PUSH production)
At least one of a privilege information determining means for determining privilege information advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means, and the privilege information stored in the storage means. Corresponds to the privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player corresponding to a part, and the privilege information stored in the storage means when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. The privilege information updating means for updating the privilege information reduced from the privilege, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means, and the display means for displaying the identification information. It corresponds to a determination means for determining the privilege information stored in the storage means up to the upper limit, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation timing when the operation means is operated. The setting means for variably setting the privilege information, the variable setting means for changing the privilege information set by the setting means based on specific conditions, and the setting means based on the operation of the operation means. It has a display update means for acquiring the privilege information set by the above-mentioned method and updating the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means to the corresponding identification information. A game machine N1 characterized by being there.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an operating means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player, and as a kind of hobby effect, an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means can be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-263523). In this conventional gaming machine, by operating the operation buttons in the operation effect, a special effect different from the usual one is generated, a hit is notified, and the like, the player's interest is improved.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the operation result of the player with respect to the frame button is the result of the effect (the hit is). It was irrelevant whether or not it was notified. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation and production. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine N1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determining means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means is stored in the storage means, and the privilege giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored privilege information is given by the privilege giving means. When the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the privilege information updating means updates the privilege to the privilege information reduced from the privilege corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means. The identification information based on the privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the determination means up to the privilege information stored in the storage means. When the operation means is operated by the player, the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is changed by the variable setting means based on a specific condition. The privilege information set by the setting means is acquired based on the operation of the operation means, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display update means. ..

This makes it possible to update the privilege information based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the operation production can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. It has a game execution means, and the privilege granting means holds a high probability state for increasing the probability of being determined as the specific determination result by the determination means a predetermined number of times until the determination by the determination means is executed. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it is continuously set as the privilege each time the determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. Then, a high-probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is provided as a privilege each time the determination is executed until the determination means executes the determination a predetermined number of times by the privilege granting means. It is set to continue.

As a result, the high-probability state in which the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is increased is continuously set until the determination is executed by the determination means a predetermined number of times, so that the high-probability state is set. The player can easily grasp what is happening. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine N2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times that the high probability state is determined to be continued and notified.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the identification information indicates the number of times that the high probability state is confirmed and notified.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of times that the high probability state is confirmed to be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the suggestion display control means for displaying the suggestion display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operation means on the display means, and the suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means. The gaming machine N4 is characterized by having a suggestion display mode determining means for determining based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are played. That is, the suggestion display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means is determined based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means by the suggestion display mode determining means.

As a result, by operating the operation means based on the suggestion display mode displayed on the display means, privilege information is given, so that there is an effect that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine N4, the suggestion display mode is a variable display mode that is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode that can discriminate the privilege information set in the setting means by the variable display mode. The gaming machine N5, characterized in that is at least displayed.

According to the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4. That is, as the suggestion display mode, the variable display mode is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and the discriminating mode in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be discriminated by the variable display mode is displayed.

As a result, since the privilege information given by the display content displayed as the variable display mode can be determined, it is possible to aim the timing at which the player operates the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played.

<Characteristic O group> (Suppresses the frequency of small hits)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. It has a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of establishments of the discrimination condition and a suppression means for suppressing the frequency at which the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means, and the suppression means is stored in the discrimination condition storage means. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that it makes it easier to suppress the frequency of execution of the determination when the number of the determination conditions is less than the predetermined number and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls to the starting winning opening, and the symbols are variablely displayed, and the player is drawn by lottery after the variable display is completed. There is something to inform the result of. Some such gaming machines are configured so that lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening can be held and stored a plurality of times (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). ..

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the frequency of winning a game ball to the starting winning opening is high, more gaming balls are paid out than when the frequency of winning the game ball to the starting winning opening is low. Since many lottery will be executed and the benefits to the player will differ greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game ball to the starting prize opening, the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening will be greatly different. There was a problem that the operation of infrequent gaming machines was reduced. In addition, in order for the player to know whether or not the frequency of winning the game ball to the starting winning opening is appropriate, it is necessary to execute many games, and a fair game machine is provided to the player who executes the game. There was a problem that it could not be done. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine O1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the player is determined by the privilege granting means based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. Will be given a privilege. A plurality of determination conditions are stored by the discrimination condition storage means. The frequency with which the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppressing means tends to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is more than a predetermined number than when the number is less than a predetermined number.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is more than a predetermined number than when the number is less than a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.

In the gaming machine O1, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means, and a dynamic display thereof. It has a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, and the suppression means has a longer dynamic display by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the frequency at which the determination is executed is suppressed by setting a period.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency of execution of the determination by the suppressing means is suppressed.

As a result, by setting a long dynamic display period, the frequency at which the discrimination is executed is suppressed, so that the frequency at which the discrimination is executed can be reliably suppressed, and it is fair to the player who executes the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine O2, a second discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the satisfaction of the second discriminating condition, and a second display means that displays the second discriminating information indicating the result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means. In the second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the player is given a second. The gaming machine O3 is characterized by having a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and by granting the privilege by the privilege granting means, the second determination condition can be easily satisfied. ..

According to the gaming machine O3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2. That is, the determination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second action in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the second privilege is given to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the second determination condition is easily satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the suppression means from giving a privilege that facilitates the establishment of the second determination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.

In the gaming machine O2, a second discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the satisfaction of the second discriminating condition, and a second display means that displays the second discriminating information indicating the result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means. In the second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the player is given a second. A game characterized by having a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, the determination condition can be easily satisfied. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2. That is, the determination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second action in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the second privilege is given to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, the determination condition is easily satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the provision of the second privilege that facilitates the establishment of the discrimination condition by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the suppressing means makes it easy to suppress the frequency at which the discrimination is executed when the discriminant result by the discriminating means is the specific discriminant result. The gaming machine O5.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are played. That is, when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the frequency of execution of the discrimination is likely to be suppressed by the suppression means.

This makes it possible to suppress the frequency with which the determination is executed when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which many benefits are granted in a short period of time.

In any of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the suppressing means has a number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number in which the number of the discriminant conditions stored in the discriminating condition storage means is less than the predetermined number. 2. The gaming machine O6 is characterized in that it makes it easy to suppress the frequency at which the determination is executed in the case of a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines O2 to O4, the following effects are played. That is, when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency with which the discrimination is executed by the suppressing means is high. It becomes easy to be suppressed.

As a result, the discrimination is executed when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number and the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number. Since it is easy to suppress the frequency of discrimination, it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing discrimination when the game is intentionally played continuously in a state where the number of stored discrimination conditions is small. It has the effect of being able to provide a fair gaming machine.

<Characteristic P group> (variable range of hold notice)
The information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit, and the information storage means. Based on the above information, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player are executed based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a gaming machine provided with a privileged game executing means, a pre-determining means capable of executing a pre-discrimination before the determination condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the information storage means, and the information. With respect to the identification symbol display control means for displaying the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means on the display means corresponding to each of the information of 1, and the information before being discriminated by the discrimination means. The variable means for varying the identification symbol based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means, and the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, which are variable by the variable means. A gaming machine P1 having a determination means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed, and the displayed hold symbol is displayed. There is one that can be used to execute a hold notice effect that can notify the information about the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, it is suggested that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is expected to be a big hit, so that the variable display is started before the variable display is started. , It was possible to raise the expectations of the players.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the hold symbol that is not subject to the hold notice, and the motivation for playing is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine P1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result, which is advantageous to the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, based on the information stored in the information storage means, the pre-discrimination is executed by the pre-discrimination means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. The identification symbol corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means for each information is displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. With respect to the information before being discriminated by the discriminating means, the identification symbol is changed by the variable means based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the combination of the identification symbols variable by the variable means is determined by the determination means.

This makes it possible to determine the combination of the identification symbols that can be changed by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the variable means for all the identification symbols displayed on the display means, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the gaming machine P1, the variable means has the information corresponding to the identification symbol when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the discrimination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the information based on the result of the prior determination is variable so as to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied by the variable means, the information based on the result of the prior determination for the information corresponding to the identification symbol is satisfied. Is variable to the mode in which is displayed.

This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine P1 or P2 has a specific display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol by using the identification symbol changed by the variable means for a specific period. The gaming machine P3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, using the identification symbol variable by the variable means, the specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed on the display means by the specific display control means for a specific period.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect mode using the identification symbol variable by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, when the operating means that can be operated by the player and the identification symbol are changed by the variable means, the setting of the specific effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine P4 characterized by having a specific effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are played. That is, when the identification symbol is changed by the variable means, the setting of the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

This has the effect that a specific effect mode can be executed for a specific period using the identification symbol variable by the variable means.

In the gaming machine P4, when the pre-discrimination means determines the specific discrimination result, the number of the identification symbols is changed by the variable means more than when it is determined to be other than the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine P5 is characterized by having a variable number setting means for setting a large number of machines.

According to the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5. That is, when the pre-discrimination means discriminates from a specific discrimination result, the variable number setting means sets a larger number of identification symbols variable by the variable means than when it is determined that the result is other than the specific discrimination result. To.

This has the effect that the frequency with which the identification symbol is displayed can be changed according to the game state, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic Q group> (Perform a specific effect when the number of remaining STs is less than the specified number and a big hit)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. As the gaming state after the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means is completed, a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means for setting one of the gaming states and the gaming state setting means, the more the number of times the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means, the easier the identification. Based on the specific condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. A game state changing means for changing to a state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. , When the comparison means for comparing the easiness of establishing the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the actual easiness of establishing the specific condition and the comparison result by the comparison means are specific comparison results. The gaming machine Q1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning a lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed, and the specific game is executed. There are some that do not notify the player of the number of times the game is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the player is not notified of the number of times the specific game is executed, if a winning is won during the execution of the specific game, the remaining number of times of the specific game cannot be grasped, and the game is played. There was a problem that it was not possible to sufficiently provide the player with a feeling of satisfaction with the result. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and based on the fact that the discriminating by the discriminating means results in a specific discriminating result, the privileged game advantageous to the player is the privileged game. It is executed by the means of execution. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. One of the game states is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition discriminating means determines whether or not the specific condition that is more likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of executions of the discrimination by the discriminating means increases. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the suggestion effect that suggests the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. When the easiness of establishing the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the easiness of establishing the actual specific condition are compared by the comparison means, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result, the predetermined condition A specific effect corresponding to a specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the establishment of.

As a result, when the easiness of establishing the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the easiness of establishing the actual specific condition are the specific comparison results, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. The corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, the player can be made to grasp the current state of the second gaming state, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, by configuring so that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the player can grasp the state of the second gaming state when the privilege game is executed. Will be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state.

The gaming machine Q1 has a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of executions by the discriminating means that satisfies the specific condition when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1. That is, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition setting means sets a predetermined number of executions by the determination means that satisfies the specific condition.

As a result, the specific condition can be set based on the number of times the discriminating means is executed, so that the number of times the second gaming state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while being aware of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and there is an effect that the motivation for the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, it is easy to establish the actual specific effect by performing the suggestion effect based on the establishment of the effect condition. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a variable effect means for varying the suggestion effect closer to that of.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the suggestion that the suggestion effect being executed by the variable effect means is closer to the ease of establishing the actual specific effect based on the establishment of the effect condition. It is variable to the production.

As a result, the number of times that the second game state is set can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can execute the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine Q3, the suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of remaining discriminations by the discrimination means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect means is a suggestion effect showing the number of discriminations close to the number of remaining discriminations. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being variable to.

According to the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3. That is, the number of remaining discriminations is suggested by the discrimination means until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestion effect, and the variable effect means is variable to the suggestion effect showing the number of discriminations close to the number of remaining discriminations.

As a result, it is possible to suggest the number of discriminations that is close to the number of remaining discriminations, which has the effect of giving the player a sense of tension.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, if the privilege game is executed when the comparison result is other than the specific comparison result, the gaming machine has a means for executing an effect different from the specific effect. Characteristic gaming machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are played. That is, when the privilege game is executed when the comparison result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

As a result, the player can know that the second privilege game has been executed when the effect different from the specific effect is executed and the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic R group> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol sequence)
A display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information columns composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order, and a dynamic display means thereof. A game provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stop display of a predetermined combination of identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information column by the display execution means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the machine, the stop display is based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information column. The new identification information string is displayed by the identification information column display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information column and the identification information column display means while stopping and displaying at least a part of the combination of the identification information. Based on this, when at least a part of the combination of the identification information stopped and displayed and the combination of the identification information predetermined by using the new identification information string are stopped and displayed, the privilege game is executed. The gaming machine R1 comprising: an executing means for executing the privileged game by means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given (for example). , JP-A No. 10-265). In such a gaming machine, while one symbol is changing and another symbol is stopped and displayed, a reach state in which the stopped and displayed symbols form a part of a predetermined combination is generated and becomes a hit. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the reach state does not occur, even if all the symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility that the hit state will be reached at that time, and the player's game will be dealt with. There was a problem that spoiled the interest. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine R1, the display means executes a dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that the combination of the identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information column by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the stop-displayed identification is based on the fact that a combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information column. A new identification information column is dynamically displayed by the identification information column display means while at least a part of the combination of information is stopped and displayed. Based on the fact that a new identification information string is displayed by the identification information column display means, at least a part of the combination of the stop-displayed identification information and the combination of the identification information predetermined by using the new identification information string. Is stopped and displayed, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means by the execution means.

As a result, a new identification information column is dynamically displayed by the identification information column display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information once stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed, which gives the player an unexpected effect. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means has a direction in which a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the plurality of identification information strings is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Is a gaming machine R2 characterized in that it is dynamically displayed in different directions.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are played. That is, the special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the identification information column display means is dynamically displayed in a direction different from the direction dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Is displayed.

As a result, the dynamic display direction of the symbol sequence can be changed to a different direction, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine R3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information column display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means.

This has the effect that the player can easily notice that the direction of the dynamic display has changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string is displayed. When the new identification information column is displayed by the display means, the non-display setting is set to hide at least one of the plurality of identification information columns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine R4 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information column display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information column display means displays a new identification information string. If this is the case, at least one of the plurality of identification information columns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is set to be hidden by the non-display setting means.

This makes it possible to dynamically display a new identification information string without changing the area for displaying the identification information string. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the dynamic display can be reduced.

In the gaming machines R1 or R4, the display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are displayed. The display data for display is set at the same opportunity, and is determined to determine the display data to be displayed among the set display data as the area set in the display area of the display means. A gaming machine R5 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines R1 or R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display data for displaying a new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information column display means and the display data for displaying the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are Among the set display data, the display data to be displayed is determined by the determination means as the area set in the same opportunity and set in the display area of the display means.

This has the effect of reducing the control load of the dynamic display.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls to the starting winning opening, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the variable display is completed. There is something to do. Some such gaming machines are configured to hold and store lottery executed multiple times based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 35664).
In such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is not possible to provide a fair gaming machine to a player who executes a game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing fair gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means are the specific discrimination results. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player, a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of establishments of the discrimination condition, and a suppression means for suppressing the frequency of execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means. The suppressing means makes it easier to suppress the frequency of execution of the discrimination when the number of the discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number. It is a thing.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed and the display means dynamically displays the identification information. The dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the suppression means. Suppresses the frequency with which the determination is executed by setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the second discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition and the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means are obtained. A second display means for displaying the second identification information to be shown, a second dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a second dynamic display execution means thereof. The second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second discriminating means and the discriminating result by the second discriminating means are specific second discriminating results. Based on the fact that the player has a second privilege granting means for granting the second privilege to the player, and the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the second determination condition is satisfied. It will be easier to do.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the second discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the satisfaction of the second discriminating condition, and the result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means. A second display means for displaying the second identification information indicating the above, a second dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a second dynamic display execution thereof. The second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the means and the result of the determination by the second determination means are specific second determinations. Based on the result, the player has a second privilege granting means for granting the second privilege, and the second privilege granting means grants the second privilege, whereby the determination is made. It makes it easier for the conditions to be met.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, and the suppressing means is such that the discrimination is made when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. It makes it easier to control the frequency of execution.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the fact that the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the privilege is based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Benefits are given to the player by the granting means. A plurality of determination conditions are stored by the discrimination condition storage means. The frequency with which the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppressing means tends to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is more than a predetermined number than when the number is less than a predetermined number.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is more than a predetermined number than when the number is less than a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency of execution of the determination by the suppressing means is suppressed.
This has the effect of increasing the accuracy of providing a fair gaming machine to the player who executes the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the determination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second action in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the second privilege is given to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the second determination condition is easily satisfied.
This has the effect of providing a fair gaming machine to the player who executes the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the determination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second action in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the second privilege is given to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, the determination condition is easily satisfied.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the provision of the second privilege that facilitates the establishment of the discrimination condition by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. When the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the frequency of execution of the discrimination is likely to be suppressed by the suppression means.
This makes it possible to suppress the frequency with which the determination is executed when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which many benefits are granted in a short period of time.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
S 401 First acquisition means S 405 First determination means S307 First effect execution means S504 Part of variable control means S 901 Second acquisition means S 905 Second determination means S805 Second effect execution means S1103 Part of variable control means
S1204 Part of variable control means
S1207 Part of variable control means
S2004 privilege game execution means S2112 advantageous state setting means
S4212 Display setting means

Claims (1)

The first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition,
A first determination means that executes the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and
The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period,
A second acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition,
A second determination means that executes the second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period,
A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result, or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when executed.
An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times when a specific condition is satisfied.
When the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, the first determination is made from the second determination. Variable control means that make it easier to execute,
When the advantageous state is not set, even during the period in which the second effect is executed, the first display mode is based on the fact that the first effect is not executed in the predetermined first period. The first display setting for displaying the above is set, and when the advantageous state is set, the second effect is predetermined even during the period in which the first effect is being executed. It has a display setting means for setting a second display setting for displaying a second display mode different from the first display mode based on not being executed for two periods.
The gaming machine is
When the advantageous state ends while the second display mode is displayed, it is possible to display a third display mode different from the second display mode after a lapse of a predetermined period.
When the advantageous state is set, the execution of the first effect and the second effect from the period when the second display mode is not displayed to the period when the second display mode is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to continuously suggest the remaining number of times until the total number of times reaches the predetermined number of times .

Images